ProductManual

GasinsulatedSwitchgear
ELK−04,145kV
WIKI R58: 01.07.2015 Only for Erection
Contents
1 GasinsulatedSwitchgear
1.1 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518611C
1.2 Notes on product manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518612A
1.3 Metalenclosed gas insulated switchgear (GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518617A
1.4 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518620B
1.5 Gas pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518614A
1.6 Gashandling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518615B
1.7 Sulphur hexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518616A

2 Delivery
2.1 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518621A
2.2 Structural loading due to switching forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518624B

3 Installation
3.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518631A
3.2 Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518630A
3.3 Outdoor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518632A
3.4 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518633B
3.5 Bay coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518634B

4 Commissioning
4.1 Tests prior to commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518640B
4.2 High voltage test of the main circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518641B

5 Maintenance
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518650A
5.2 Adsorber pack (size 114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518654B
5.3 Disposal of GIS components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518655B

6 ControlCubicle
6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518681A
6.2 Conventional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518682A
6.3 Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518685A

1HDG518888Aen 1
7 Modules
7.1 Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518712C
7.2 Circuit Breaker (145H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518714B
7.3 Circuit−breaker operating mechanism HMB−1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518701A
7.4 Integrated current transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518742C
7.5 Disconnector / earthing switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518717B
7.6 Insulated maintenance earthing switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518718A
7.7 Make−proof earthing switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518720C
7.8 Separate current transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518743C
7.9 90 degree module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518768C
7.10 Split−up module and SF6-air bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518773C
7.11 Compact cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518770B
7.12 IEC cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518722B
7.13 IEC cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518724B
7.14 Earthing accessories for IEC cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518796A
7.15 Extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518762C
7.16 Voltage transformer VT0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518730B
7.17 Voltage transformer VT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518731B
7.18 Voltage transformer VT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518734B
7.19 Inductive voltage transformer VT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518735A
7.20 Surge arrester MWGX/MWGXi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518790A
7.21 Gas density monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG518780B

1HDG518888Aen 2
Contents

1 GasinsulatedSwitchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
1.2 Notesonproductmanual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
1.2.1 Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
1.2.2 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
1.2.3 Structureoftheproductmanual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
1.2.4 Additionalinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
1.2.5 Typographicaldesignations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23
1.2.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
1.2.7 Pagenumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
1.2.8 Tableofcontents,maindocumentlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
1.2.9 Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
1.2.10 Customercomments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
1.3 Metalenclosedgasinsulatedswitchgear(GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
1.3.1 AdvantagesoftheGIStechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
1.3.2 GeneralstructureofaGIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
1.3.3 Generalstructureofthecomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33
1.4 Safetyinstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41
1.4.1 Safetyonthejob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41
1.4.2 Electricalsafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.43
1.4.3 Pressurizedparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45
1.4.4 WorkingwithSF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45
1.4.5 Safetyaspectsduringoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.46
1.4.6 Workingonoperatingmechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47
1.4.7 Hottemperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47
1.4.8 Internalfaultingas−insulatedmetal−enclosedswitchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.48
1.4.9 Intendeduseofequipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
1.5 Gaspressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51
1.5.1 Fillingandsignalpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51
1.5.2 Maintenancepressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.53
1.5.3 Temperaturedependencyofgaspressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.53
1.6 Gashandling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.61
1.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.63
1.6.2 Measuresduringworkongascompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.64
1.6.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.67
1.6.4 SafetymeasuresSF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.612
1.6.5 Evacuationofthegascompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.613
1.6.6 FillingthegascompartmentswithSF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.617
1.6.7 Measurementofmoisturecontents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.621
1.6.8 PurificationofcontaminatedSF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.624

ToC−1
1.7 Sulphurhexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.71
1.7.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.72
1.7.2 SF6Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.73
1.7.3 Decompositionproducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.74

ToC−2
2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.1 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
2.1.1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
2.1.2 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
2.1.3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
2.1.4 Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
2.1.5 Standardsandregulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
2.2 Structuralloadingduetoswitchingforces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
2.2.1 Generalremarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
2.2.2 Loadcharacteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
2.2.3 Considerationsatthedimensioningstage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

ToC−3
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.1 InstallationoftheGIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
3.1.1 PreparationoftheInstallationArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
3.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
3.1.3 Flangeconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
3.1.4 Tighteningtorqueforbolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
3.1.5 Fillingofgascompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
3.2 Conversiontables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
3.3 Outdoorinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
3.3.1 Operatingmechanismsandterminalboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
3.3.2 Outdoorflangeconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
3.4 Earthing ....................................................................... 3.41
3.4.1 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
3.4.2 InstallationoftheGISEarthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
3.4.3 Localcontrolcubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
3.4.4 SF6airbushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
3.4.5 Surgearresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
3.4.6 Cableterminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
3.5 Baycoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
3.5.1 Fixingthebaseframebymeansofadjustmentscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
3.5.2 Fixingthebaseframebymeansoffillplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
3.5.3 Couplingofbays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53

ToC−4
4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.1 Testspriortocommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
4.1.1 Toolsforon−sitetests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
4.1.2 Inspectionaftertransport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
4.1.3 Measurementofvoltagedrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
4.1.4 Checkofgasdensitymonitors/gasdensitysensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
4.1.5 Checkofgastightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
4.1.6 Dewpointmeasurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
4.1.7 Visualinspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
4.1.8 Mechanicalfunctionaltestsoftheswitchingdevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
4.1.9 On−sitetestofthelocalcontrolcubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
4.2 Highvoltagetestofthemaincircuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
4.2.1 Performanceofthetest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
4.2.2 Connectionofthetestset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25

ToC−5
5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.1 MaintenanceoftheGIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
5.2 Adsorberpack(size114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
5.2.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
5.2.2 Replacementoftheadsorberpack(indoorvariant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
5.2.3 Replacementoftheadsorberpack(outdoorvariant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
5.3 DisposalofGIScomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
5.3.2 Informationondisposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
5.3.3 InformationaboutmaterialcontentofGIScomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32

ToC−6
6 ControlCubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
6.1.2 Integratedcontrolcubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
6.1.3 Separatecontrolcubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
6.1.4 Variantforindoorapplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
6.1.5 Variantforoutdoorapplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
6.1.6 Wiringsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
6.1.7 Powerdemand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
6.1.8 Heatbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.112
6.1.9 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.114
6.1.10 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115
6.1.11 Fiberopticcable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
6.2 Conventionalcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
6.2.1 Equipmentandfunctionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
6.2.2 Controlpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28
6.2.3 Operatingelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
6.2.4 Displayelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.213
6.2.5 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.215
6.2.6 Normaloperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.215
6.2.7 Emergencyoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
6.2.8 Alarmsignalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.221
6.3 Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31
6.3.2 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31
6.3.3 Singlebusbar,line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33
6.3.4 Singlebusbar,transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.34
6.3.5 Singlebusbar,longitudinalcoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35
6.3.6 Singlebusbar,earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36
6.3.7 Singlebusbar,singlelongitudinalsectionalisingandbusbarearthing . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.37
6.3.8 Singlebusbar,doublelongitudinalsectionalisingandbusbarearthing . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38
6.3.9 Doublebusbar,line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.39
6.3.10 Doublebusbar,transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.310
6.3.11 Doublebusbar,coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.311
6.3.12 Doublebusbar,earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.312
6.3.13 Doublebusbar,singlelongitudinalsectionalisingandbusbarearthing . . . . . . . . . . . 6.313
6.3.14 Doublebusbar,doublelongitudinalsectionalisingandbusbarearthing . . . . . . . . . . 6.314
6.3.15 Doublebusbar,doublelongitudinalsectionalising,busbarcouplerand
busbarearthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
6.3.16 Singlebay,inandout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.320
6.3.17 Ringfeeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.321
6.3.18 1½Circuitbreaker,upperfeeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.322
6.3.19 1½Circuitbreaker,coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.323
6.3.20 1½Circuitbreaker,lowerfeeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.324
6.3.21 1½Circuitbreaker,earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.325

ToC−7
7 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.1 Circuitbreaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
7.1.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
7.1.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
7.1.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
7.1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
7.1.5 Inspectionofthecircuitbreaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
7.1.6 Replacementoftheinterruptingchamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
7.1.7 Commissioningafteroverhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
7.1.8 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
7.2 CircuitBreaker(145H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
7.2.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
7.2.2 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
7.2.3 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.214
7.3 Circuit−breakeroperatingmechanismHMB−1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
7.3.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
7.3.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
7.3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38
7.3.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.39
7.3.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.313
7.4 Integratedcurrenttransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
7.4.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
7.4.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
7.4.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
7.4.4 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
7.5 Disconnector/earthingswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
7.5.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52
7.5.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.55
7.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56
7.5.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.516
7.5.5 TechnicalData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.527
7.5.6 Operatingdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.530
7.5 Insulatedmaintenanceearthingswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
7.6.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.62
7.6.2 Installationworkfortestpurposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.63
7.6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
7.6.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
7.5.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.527
7.7 Make−proofearthingswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71
7.7.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
7.7.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74
7.7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.75
7.7.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.714
7.7.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.725
7.8 Separatecurrenttransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81
7.8.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.82
7.8.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83
7.8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83
7.8.4 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.84

ToC−8
7.9 90degreemodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91
7.9.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
7.9.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
7.9.3 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.93
7.10 Split−upmoduleandSF6airbushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.101
7.10.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
7.10.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
7.10.3 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105
7.11 Compactcabletermination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111
7.11.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
7.11.2 Importantinformationaboutplanningandinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
7.11.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
7.11.4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
7.11.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
7.11 IECcabletermination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111
7.11.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
7.11.2 Importantinformationaboutplanningandinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
7.11.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
7.11.4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
7.11.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
7.11 IECcabletermination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111
7.11.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
7.11.2 Importantinformationaboutplanningandinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
7.11.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
7.11.4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
7.11.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
7.11 EarthingaccessoriesforIECcabletermination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111
7.11.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
7.14.2 TransportandStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
7.11.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
7.14.4 DeinstallationandCommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1427
7.11.5 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
7.15 Extensionmodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151
7.15.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152
7.15.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152
7.15.3 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153
7.16 VoltagetransformerVT0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161
7.16.1 Equipmentdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.162
7.16.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163
7.16.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.164
7.16.4 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.165
7.17 VoltagetransformerVT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.171
7.17.1 Equipmentdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.172
7.17.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.173
7.17.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174
7.17.4 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175

ToC−9
7.18 VoltagetransformerVT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.181
7.18.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.182
7.18.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.184
7.18.3 Operationoftheintegratedisolatingdevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.185
7.18.4 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1811
7.19 InductivevoltagetransformerVT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.191
7.19.1 Designandfunctionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.192
7.18.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.184
7.19.3 Operationoftheintegratedisolatingdevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.195
7.19.4 TechnicalData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.198
7.20 SurgearresterMWGX/MWGXi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.201
7.20.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.202
7.20.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.205
7.20.3 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.206
7.21 Gasdensitymonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.211
7.21.1 Functionaldescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.212
7.21.2 Technicaldata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.214

ToC−10
1 GasinsulatedSwitchgear 1

10
1.1 Contact 1.1
Gas insulated switchgear 52170 kV: Aftersalesservice

ABB AG Business Area High Voltage Products as part of the ABB group tries hard to provide to its customers best
support and an effective aftersales service. Taking in mind that the team of ABB Service Energietechnik has a long
and wide experience with any kind of substations, that company is entrusted to assist our customers and local rep
resentatives with any kind of service which is needed.

For any assistance, support, or service we recommend to directly contact our local representatives first. They have
extensive knowledge of the specific customer’s needs, the individual circumstances and the possibilities of the
whole ABB group and consequently are able to organize an optimum service.

The aftersales service includes

− Technical support
− Personnel training courses
− Service and maintenance contracts
− Failure clearing and repair tasks
− Express delivery of standard spare parts
− 24-h emergency-hotline

INFORMATION In case of a hotline serve contract the customer has the right for free use of the
24h hotline. In case of emergency a competent service employee will record the
issue and cares for the respective measures.

24hHotline: +49 (0) 800 222 2526

For any other request you may contact us during the regular business hours (8:00h − 18:00h). Please fill out the re
quest form on the following page for simplified approach.

eMail: [email protected]

Telefon: +49 (0) 621 381 3000

Telefax: +49 (0) 621 381 2645

Further information about ABB and the various products and services are available from Internet.

Internet: http://www.abb.com

1HDG518611Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear|1.11

Request form Date:

Fax: +49 (0) 621 381 − 2645

EMail: power.service−[email protected]

Your sender:
Company: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Department: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Phone No.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fax No.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMail: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your station:
Designation of station: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contract No.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Order No. (or production order No.): . . . . . . .

Bay No.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module No.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your request:

Description:

1HDG518611Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear|1.12

1.2 Notes on product manual 1.2
1.2.1 Copyright
We reserve all rights to this document and the subject matter contained therein. Its contents are not to be used,
duplicated or disclosed to third parties without our express permission.

E ABB, 2014.

1.2.2 Warranty
In our experience, correct observance of the information contained in this documentation guarantees the safe oper
ation of our product. The documentation provided has been prepared with great care. Please inform us or our
nearest representative if it is no longer possible to operate our product safely on account of incorrect or omitted
information.

INFORMATION Please find our contact address in the product manual in chapter Gasinsulated
Switchgear in section Contact.

We will not accept any liability whatsoever for damage arising either directly or indirectly from the incorrect operation
of our product. Subject to technical modifications without notice.

Only the English and German version of the documentation is authorized by ABB as the original product manual. All
other languages are translations of the original product manual.

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.21

1.2.3 Structure of the product manual
The product manual is structured into the following different chapters:
− Gas−insulated switchgear
The chapter gives a general description of the functionality of the GIS and provides important information
concerning safety and SF6 handling.
− Delivery
The chapter contains the information on transportation and storage.
− Installation
The chapter contains general information on requirements for the installation, earthing, outdoor installation
and bay coupling.
− Commissioning
The chapter contains the requirements on commissioning of the GIS and the high voltage test on site.
− Maintenance
The chapter contains general information on maintenance requirements and general maintenance proce
dures which are not specific for a module, such as replacement of the absorber pack.
− Control cubicle
The chapter contains general information on the control cubicles.
− Modules
The chapter contains all relevant information on the different GIS modules supplied in the project. It con
tains a functional description and the general technical data

The product manual uses SI units for physical quantities. A table for conversion of SI units into other unit systems is
provided in chapter Installation in section Conversion tables.

1.2.4 Additional information

The product manual is only one part of the documentation supplied within a GIS project. Please observe all addi
tional information provided in the following project specific documentation which can be found in the ring binders or
on the compact disk provided with the project:
− Plans of primary engineering
− Layout plan
− Sectional drawings
− Building load plan
− Earthing plan
− Plans of secondary engineering
− Circuit diagrams of control cubicles
− Circuit diagrams of operating mechanisms
− Scope of supply

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.22

1.2.5 Typographical designations
Special texts

In our documentation texts with a special meaning are emphasized specially. Observe imperatively all texts desig
nated as follows. If texts designated the way shown below are not observed, any claim to warranty expires.

Warning messages

Warning messages consist of a signal word (DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE) which indicates the severity
of the hazard described. The nature of the hazard and its consequences, if the hazard is not avoided, are described
in row Hazard. The row Cause explains the causes of a hazard for better understanding by the operating person
nel. The row Action gives the guidance how to avoid the hazard.

Definitive hazard with risk of death or grave physical injury:

DANGER Hazard Nature of hazard and consequences

Cause Cause of hazard

Action Measures for prevention of hazard

Possible hazard with risk of death or grave physical injury:

WARNING Hazard Nature of hazard and consequences

Cause Cause of hazard

Action Measures for prevention of hazard

Hazard of slight to medium injury:

CAUTION Hazard Nature of hazard and consequences

Cause Cause of hazard

Action Measures for prevention of hazard

Notes regarding prevention of material damage:

NOTICE Hazard Nature of hazard and consequences

Cause Cause of hazard

Action Measures for prevention of hazard

Notes regarding ease of work, further information

INFORMATION Information

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.23

Actions in procedures

Actions which have to be carried out during installation, operating or maintenance procedures are structured in a
numbered list. The sequence of the numbers defines the order in which the actions shall be carried out:
1. ...
2. ...
3. ...

Mandatory actions

To express mandatory actions usually the imperative mood is used. The expression shall expresses also a manda
tory meaning in this product manual.

Mandatory actions have to be followed strictly to avoid danger to people and to avoid damage to the switchgear. If
you are in doubt concerning a procedure stop the work and contact ABB for clarification.

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.24

1.2.6 References
References to other passages of the documentation are made in the following way:

What is documented in which chapter and in which section?

Example

INFORMATION All pressures of the GIS and the recalculation to the ambient temperatures are de
scribed in chapter Gasinsulated Switchgear in section Filling Pressures.

All protocols of tests carried out at site are contained in the projectspecific part of the documentation.

1.2.7 Page number

The page number is composed of the chapter number, the current document number in the actual chapter and the
current page number in the actual section.

Example: 1.23 is the third page in the second section in the first chapter.

1.2.8 Table of contents, main document lists

Since all the tables of contents and all the main document lists of this documentation are selfgenerated individually
for each project, their respective footers only contain the date and the current number of pages.

1.2.9 Hyperlinks
The present documentation is also available in PDFformat on CDROM together with the appropriate Adobe Acro
bat reader. Dark blue formatted signs are almost hyperlinks, that allow onscreen navigation through the docu
mentation. Hyperlinks in the header of a document provide a direct jump into the related table of contents or to the
beginning of the respective section.

Clicking onto the dark blue formatted word Product Manual in the first row allows to jump to the table of contents.

Clicking onto the dark blue formatted chapter name in the second row allows to jump to the beginning of the actual
chapter.

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.25

1.2.10 Customer comments
Dear Customer,

We are permanently looking to further improve the quality of our documentation. For this reason, we are very much
interested in your feedback. Please take the time to fill in the form below if you notice any incomplete or omitted
information, or in case you encounter typographical errors. Please feel free to make any suggestions how we could
further improve this documentation to your benefit.

INFORMATION Please find our contact address in the product manual in chapter Gasinsulated
switchgear in section Contact.

Thank you very much for your help.

Your comments
Document / chapter Page

V Misprint

V Incomplete information

V Omitted information

V Amendment

Your comments
Document / chapter Page

V Misprint

V Incomplete information

V Omitted information

V Amendment

Your contact details

Customer

Installation

Person in charge

Street / P. O. Box

Town, Postal code

Country

1HDG518612A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.26

1.3 Metalenclosed gas insulated switchgear (GIS) 1.3
The metalenclosed SF6gas insulated switchgear ELK−04, 145 kV is designed for rated voltages up to 145 kV with
rated currents up to 3150A and short−circuit currents up to 40 kA. All GIS comply with the IEC standards and VDE
standards.

1.3.1 Advantages of the GIS technology

Metalenclosed SF6gas insulated substations (GIS) cover approximately only 5 % of the space needed of compa
rable conventional airinsulated substations (AIS). For this reason, they are of special interest in congested and in
dustrialized areas where they provide great economics. GIS is characterised by its:
− high operational safety
− high reliability
− long lifetime
− maintenancefree design
− small dimensions
− low weight
− modular design
− short installation times
− enclosure of all life parts

1HDG518617A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.31

1.3.2 General structure of a GIS
The interconnection of the individual GIS modules is designed to facilitate future extensions or changes. Gastight
barrier insulators between adjacent gas compartments limit the impact of an internal fault in one GIS module onto
its neighbours to an absolute minimum.

The enclosure of the GIS is made of non−corrosive aluminum. Due to the low specific weight of aluminum, costly
foundations are not required.

The GIS consists of a number of different modules. These individual modules are interconnected by bolted flange
connections.

5
1
6
7

2 8

9
2
10

1 − Integrated local control cabinet 6 − Line disconnector/earthing switch

2 − Busbar with integrated disconnector/earthing switch 7 − Current transformer
3 − Voltage transformer 8 − Cable termination
4 − Operating mechanism 9 − Cable
5 − Makeproof earthing switch 10 − Circuit breaker
Figure1.31: Typical double busbar feeder GIS

1HDG518617A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.32

1.3.3 General structure of the components
Busbar with combined disconnector/earthing switch

The busbars distribute the current within the switchgear. The busbar system consists of the individual busbar seg
ments of each bay.

The GIS can be laid out as single busbar or double busbar, in an Hcircuit, as ring bus or in form of a 1½breaker
arrangement.

The busbar phase conductors of each bay are mounted on the gastight barrier insulators. The busbar modules
have a telescopic transversal insertion module that greatly eases extensions. The springloaded flange connections
of the busbars compensate for any pressurerelated forces and changes in length induced by temperature gradi
ents.

The busbar conductors are interconnected by means of removable contacts in the transversal insertion module.
Length variations of the conductors due to temperature gradients are compensated in the telescopic transversal
insertion module and will not cause any mechanical stress on the insulators.

A combination of disconnector and earthing switch is part of each busbar module. The common motorized operat
ing mechanism of the combined disconnector/earthing switch is installed directly at the GIS enclosure. The motors
actuate via a drive rod and an insulated shaft the three moving contacts. Depending on the sense of rotation of the
insulating shafts the contacts work as a disconnector or as an earthing switch. The combined disconnector/earth
ing switch can be operated manually with a handcrank.

Circuit−breaker with current transformer

The circuit breaker operates as a single pressure, self blast breaker with one interrupting chamber for each pole.
The main and the arcing contacts in the interrupting chamber are consequently separated from each other. For
short circuit interruption the self blast breaker utilizes the thermal energy of the arc to generate an arc quenching
gas flow. In comparison with breakers of compressiontype, this operating principle saves up to 80 % of the drive
energy.

Circuit−breaker operating mechanism

All three poles, single pole operation is an option, of the circuit breaker are operated simultaneously by a hydraulic
springoperating mechanism. This hydraulic spring operating mechanism combines a hydraulic drive with a me
chanical energy storage in a set of heavy duty disk springs. The disk springs are hydraulically charged to store the
mechanism energy. The contacts of the circuit breaker are switched on respectively off by means of a hydraulic cy
linder.

Cable termination

The cable termination allows connection of high voltage power cables . Connections for the standardized dry−type
and fluidfilled cable fittings are provided. Dry−type cable fittings are characterised by simplified mounting on the
installation site without any gas handling in the gas compartments.

1HDG518617A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.33

Line disconnector/earthing switch

The line side disconnector consists of the same elements as the busbar disconnector switch. It is a motoroperated
combined disconnector/earthing switch. In addition, a voltage transformer can be connected to this disconnec
tor/earthing switch. Itmay be connected either to the line side or to the GIS side of the disconnector. As a conse
quence, it is possible to measure the voltage either on the line side or on the GIS side.

As an option, the earthing switch contact can be designed so that all three phases are isolated individually from
the housing of the GIS. In this case, these contacts are earthed by a copper conductor on the outside of the gas
compartment. In this way it is possible to reach the main current path for test purposes without opening the gas
compartment.

Makeproof earthing switch

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity is equipped with a snap spring operating mechanism. So the
earthing switch is capable of making short circuit currents.

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity can be isolated from the earthed GIS enclosure. By removing
the electrical connection between the enclosure of the earthing switch and the individually isolated contacts, it is
possible to access the main current path without opening the gas compartment. This greatly eases setting and
testing of protection relays, cable testing and locating of cable faults.

Barrier insulators

The GIS is separated into individual gas compartments by means of gastight barrier insulators. By this, the impact
of extensions or internal faults on the overall installation is reduced to a minimum, and control, supervision and
maintenance are greatly eased. All flange connections are sealed by ageresistant orings.

Support insulators

Support insulators are used to support the conductors mechanically. They are mainly used for long SF6 busduct
connections.

Current and voltage transformers

For conventional control and protection equipment the GIS is equipped with inductive current and voltage trans
formers for measurement and protection purposes. The primary side of the transformers is insulated with SF6. This
design provides an exceptional reliability since the insulating medium SF6 is not subject to aging.

SF6air bushing

The SF6air bushing allows connection of the metalenclosed switchgear to overhead lines or to airoil bushings on
power transformers.

The insulation of conductors has a capacitive potential grading consisting of a special paper impregnated with
epoxy resin and metallic layers for a uniform voltage distribution. The outer insulation consists of a glazed porcel
laine insulator cemented flange fittings.

Gas insulated composite SF6 air bushings are becoming more and more popular due to their simple structure and
their exceptional behaviour especially in highly polluted atmospheres.

1HDG518617A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.34

Gas compartment separation

The GIS contains two different types of gas compartments. In the circuit breaker compartment SF6 is used as insu
lating and as interrupting medium. In the other gas compartments SF6 is used for insulation purposes only.

All gas compartments are separated by gastight barrier insulators. Eachindividual gas compartment is equipped
with studs for connection of a gas density relay as well as gas filling devices. Thus, all maintenance works on the
gas compartments, such as taking gas samples or regenerating gas, can be performed without any loss of gas.
The gas density is supervised by gas density relays.

Local control cubicles

Each bay is equipped with a local control cubicle that comprises all auxiliaries for control, signalling and interlocking.
The devices are connected to the cubicle by multiple connector plugs which have an individual coding for each de
vice so that mixup is avoided.

1HDG518617A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.35

1.4 Safety instructions 1.4
Gas−insulated switchgear in accordance with IEC offers a high level of safety. Nevertheless the operation of high−
power equipment entails risks which can be avoided or minimized following the instructions in the product manual.

So, before starting any work read and understand the relevant chapters and sections in the product manual, espe
cially this section safety instructions.

If any of the contents remains unclear, stop the work immediately and contact ABB for clarification.

In addition local safety regulations might be applicable which are more extensive or more protective. They have the
priority over these instructions.

1.4.1 Safety on the job

For all work performed on the installation one person shall be nominated who will be responsible for the work activ
ity and job safety. This person shall ensure that all necessary safety precautions have been taken prior to starting
any work.

Personnel

All personnel involved in a work activity on, with, or near the switchgear shall be instructed in the safety require
ments, safety rules and company instructions applicable to their work. These instructions shall be repeated during
the course of the work where the work activity is of long duration or is complex. The personnel involved shall be
required to comply with these requirements, rules and instructions.

Personnel shall wear clothing suitable for the work in a switchgear environment and personal protective equipment.
The minimum personal protective equipment shall be:
− Safety shoes
− Protective gloves
− Protective helmet
− Heavy working clothes

The use of safety goggles and ear protection shall be used if required for certain work activities. When opening gas
compartments, especially after internal faults, the personal protective equipment specified in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear in section Sulphurhexafluoride shall be used. When working on high points, e.g. on the top of con
tainers (integrated GIS) use a suitable anti−fall guard.

Before any work activity is started and during that work activity, the nominated person in control of that work activity
shall ensure that all relevant requirements, rules and instructions are complied with.

The nominated person in control of the work activity shall instruct all persons engaged upon the work activities of all
reasonably foreseeable dangers.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.41

No person shall undertake any work activity where technical knowledge or experience is needed to prevent electri
cal danger or injury, unless that person has such technical knowledge or experience, or is under such supervision
as is necessary for the work undertaken.

Where there are no national requirements for competence, the following criteria shall be used in assessing the com
petence of persons:
− knowledge of electricity
− experience in electrical work
− understanding the installation to be worked on and practical experience of that work
− understanding the hazards which can arise during the work and the precautions to be observed
− ability to recognize at all times whether it is safe to continue working

The complexity of the work activity shall be assessed before the activity starts such that the appropriate choice of
skilled, instructed, or ordinary person is made for carrying out the work activity.

Organization

Each electrical installation shall be placed under the responsibility of a person, the nominated person in control of
the electrical installation.

The nominated person in control of the work activity and the nominated person in control of the electrical installation
shall agree both the arrangements of the electrical system to allow the work to take place and a description of the
work activity on, with or near the electrical installation before any changes to the arrangements of the electrical
installation are made or work takes place.

Where the work activity is complex, the preparation shall be made in a written form.

Work location

The work location shall be defined and marked clearly. Adequate working space, means of access and lighting shall
be provided at all parts of an electrical installation on, with, or near which any work activity is to be carried out.
Where necessary the safe access to the work location shall be clearly marked.

There shall be available up−to−date drawings and records for the electrical installation.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.42

1.4.2 Electrical safety

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Action Work on live circuits is strictly prohibited. Follow the five

safety rules" to de−energize before starting work on the
switchgear or on control circuits.

Before starting work on electrical circuits, high voltage as well as low voltage circuits, always follow the procedure
known as the five safety rules":
4. Disconnect completely
5. Secure against re−connection
6. Verify that the installation is dead
7. Carry out earthing and short−circuiting
8. Provide protection against adjacent live parts

Working on live circuits is strictly prohibited. In the following the single steps of the five safety rules" are explained in
more detail concerning the GIS relevant aspects.

Disconnect completely

Disconnecting completely means de−energizing all three phases of the GIS components on which work will be per
formed and of all the adjacent components. For disconnecting observe all interlockings. Using the open gap of a
circuit−breaker is not sufficient to disconnect a working place. In addition an open disconnector is required on all
sides of the working place for safe working.

The following has to be secured:

− In nonsolidly earthed networks the starpoint circuit breaker has to be opened.
− Capacitors without automatic discharging device have to be discharged by suitable means.
− Backfeeding via other switchgear, ring busses, or control and measuring circuits has to be prevented un
der any circumstance.

Secure against re−connection

All switching devices that have been used to disconnect the electrical installation for the work activity shall be se
cured against re−connection, preferably by locking the operating mechanism. In the absence of locking facilities,
equivalent prohibitive actions, in accordance with established practice, shall be taken in order to secure against re−
connection. If an auxiliary power source is required for operation of the switching device, this power source shall be
made inoperative. Notices shall be attached to forbid interference. Where remote control devices are used to secure
against re−connection local operation of the devices shall be prevented. All signalling and interlocking systems used
for this purpose shall be reliable.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.43

Verify that the installation is dead

All three phases of the location where the works are to be performed and the location for earthing and short circuit
ing shall be potentialfree.

Carry out earthing and short−circuiting

At the work location for all high voltage installations all parts which are to be worked on shall be earthed and short−
circuited. Whenever possible use the earthing switches provided with the GIS. Where during the course of the work
activity conductors are to be dismounted and there is danger from potential differences on the installation, suitable
measures such as bonding and/or earthing shall be taken at the work location before the conductors are dis
mounted.

If earthing is achieved via any switchgear other than the GIS, the following shall be observed:

All means for earthing and short circuiting of a GIS segment shall be sufficiently dimensioned for the level and dura
tion of fault currents that may occur at their designated location.

Prior to earthing and short circuiting, ensure that the contacting location is potentialfree.

In general, the means for earthing and short circuiting shall be connected first to the earthing grid and then to the
GIS segment to be short circuited.

The earthing and shortcircuiting equipment or devices shall be visible, whenever possible, from the work location.
Otherwise, the earth connections shall be applied as close to the work location as is reasonably practical.

Provide protection against adjacent live parts

Special care must be taken if parts of the GIS adjacent to the ones, that work is performed on, remain energized. All
energized parts shall be either covered, fenced or clearly marked as dangerous area. If necessary, a suitable super
visor must be assigned for the duration of the works.

Reenergization after conclusion of all works

All tools and material shall be removed from the working location prior to reenergization.

For reenergization follow the five safety rules" in the reverse sequence. Again, all interlockings shall be observed.

Earthing of the GIS enclosure

During installation of the switchgear connect the enclosure as soon as possible to the earthing grid of the substa
tion. During operation of the switchgear never remove any earthing conductor. If parts of the GIS are dismantled
make sure that the remaining parts stay sufficiently earthed.

Voltage transformers

One end of the high−voltage winding in a voltage transformer shall be earthed during operation. Otherwise high−volt
age can be lead to the secondary terminals. Never short−circuit the secondary terminals of the voltage transformer
during operation.

Current transformers

Current transformers shall be loaded by their specified burden or be short−circuited at the secondary terminals dur
ing operation. Otherwise dangerous high voltage can be induced at the secondary terminals.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.44

1.4.3 Pressurized parts

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to bursting pressurized parts.

Action Follow the instructions defined in chapter Gas−insulated

switchgear section Gashandling and the instructions defined
below.

The GIS enclosures are filled with SF6 at a significant pressure. Wrong handling can result in severe injury or death
due to bursting of pressurized parts.
1. Use only the specified screws, bolts and nuts
2. Tighten screws, bolts and nuts at specified torque
3. Follow strictly the bay coupling procedure.
Otherwise the compensation units might malfunction and overload the pressurized enclosures
4. Do not remove the protection cover of bursting disk to prevent damage of the bursting disk
5. Do not loosen any screws or bolts when GIS is energized and the enclosures are pressurized
6. Do not drill any holes into GIS parts. Also blind holes can weaken the enclosure significantly
7. Do not operate the GIS exceeding the specified ambient temperature
8. Do not exceed the specified filling pressure of a gas compartment.
9. Set the correct maintenance pressure before starting work on pressurized barrier insulators or on parts
fixed to pressurized barrier insulators.

1.4.4 Working with SF6

WARNING Hazard Hazard of suffocation.

Cause SF6 can replace the oxygen in a room

Action Follow the instructions defined in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Sulphurhexafluoride.

WARNING Hazard Irritation of skin and the mucous membranes

Cause Decomposition products are the result of internal arcs. De

composition products are filtered in the adsorber packs.
Action Follow the instructions defined in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Sulphurhexafluoride.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.45

1.4.5 Safety aspects during operation

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to maloperation of switching

apparatus.
Action Follow the operation instructions in the chapter Modules in
the section of the relevant switching apparatus strictly.

Manual operation of circuit−breaker

Manual operation of the circuit−breaker is prohibited. Operate the circuit−breaker only via the control elements in the
control cubicle or by remote control.

The equipment at the operating mechanism to carry out a manual operation (slow switching operation) is for main
tenance purposes only.

Manual operation of disconnector/earthing switch

Manual operation of the disconnector/earthing switch entails a certain risk, when the control voltage is down. In this
case the interlocking towards other switches in the GIS is not active anymore. There is a high risk for switching the
disconnector under load or switching the earthing switch on short−circuit if the relevant circuit−breakers have not
been switched off before. Only personnel with an adequate training on these risks shall operate the disconnector/
earthing switch manually with control voltage down.

Manual operation of make−proof earthing switch

Manual operation of the make−proof earthing switch entails a certain risk, when the control voltage is down. In this
case the interlocking towards other switches in the GIS is not active anymore. There is a high risk for switching the
make−proof earthing switch on short−circuit if the relevant circuit−breakers have not been switched off before. The
make−proof earthing switch itself withstands this switching operation. But switching on short−circuit will probably
cause an outage in the power system.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.46

1.4.6 Working on operating mechanisms

WARNING Hazard Crushing fingers or hands due to moving mechanical parts.

Action Follow the instructions below for each kind of operating

mechanism

The following shall be considered as special sources of danger concerning the operating mechanism:
Table1.41: Sources of hazard with respect to the different kinds of operating mechanism

Operating mechanism at: Circuit−breaker Combined disconnector/ Make−proof earthing switch

earthing switch

Fast moving mechanical parts x x

Live parts (control circuits) x x x

Hydraulic high pressure in

x
system

Slow moving mechanical

x
parts

The hazards listed in Table1.41 emerge in the moment when the covers of the operating mechanism housings are
removed. To avoid the hazards interrupt the control voltage of the operating mechanism. Untension the circuit−
breaker operating mechanism. For further information refer to the chapter Modules and the relevant section of the
specific module.

Be aware that automatic tripping of the switching apparatus is not possible anymore if the control voltage has been
interrupted.

1.4.7 Hot temperatures

Operating the GIS at normal current can result in significant heating of the enclosure. Although the temperatures
stay within the limits specified by IEC, longer touching of the enclosure might result in burn.

Material which is in direct contact with the enclosure shall have a minimum withstand temperature of 80°C.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.47

1.4.8 Internal fault in gas−insulated metal−enclosed switchgear
According to IEC 62271203 gas−insulated switchgear is designed in such a way that in the unlikely event of an
internal fault no burnthrough occurs within 0.1 s at rated shortcircuit current, or within 0.2 seconds for lower cur
rents except opening of suitable pressure relief devices. Also, within 0.3 or 0.5 s, no fragmentation of the enclosure
shall occur.

The appropriate design of the gasinsulated switchgear has been confirmed by the relevant type tests.

A fault leading to arcing within gasinsulated metalenclosed switchgear built to the above mentioned standard has
low probability. This results from the application of the insulation gas SF6 which a triple higher dielectric strength
than air at atmospheric pressure.

Further the insulating qualities are be checked by dielectric tests on assembled units in the factory and on site.

During planning and later operation of a gasinsulated, metalenclosed switchgear, it should be taken into account
that in occurrence of an internal fault, various physical phenomena also occur, i.e. the emission of hot gas, when
the pressure relief device operates.

So remote operation of the switchgear and limiting the access to the installation to authorized personnel only are
essential methods to reduce the hazard.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.48

1.4.9 Intended use of equipment

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to maloperation or malfunction

of equipment.
Cause Exceeding the specified ratings results in overload and
malfunction of the equipment.
Action Operate the equipment only within the specified intended
use. Make sure that the equipment is only used within the
ratings specified in the technical data.

Circuit−breaker

The circuit−breaker is designed for making and breaking normal and short−circuit currents within the ratings speci
fied in the technical data. The circuit−breaker is not a disconnector. The gap provided across the open circuit−
breaker contacts does not fulfill the strict withstand voltage requirements of a disconnector. For disconnecting a
working place use disconnectors in addition to the circuit−breaker.

Disconnector

The disconnector is designed to provide a gap with increased withstand voltage capability compared to the rest of
the switchgear. It is used to disconnect a working place within the switchgear which must be accessed for mainte
nance or repair purposes.

A disconnector shall only be switched into position ON or OFF after the current path has been interrupted by a cir
cuit−breaker. This prevents switching the disconnector under load. Switching a disconnector under load will prob
ably result in an internal fault which can cause severe injury or death to the operating person.

Earthing switch

The earthing switch, which is integrated in the combined disconnector/earthing switch, is a maintenance earthing
switch. The earthing switch shall only be switched into position ON if the switchgear section to be earthed has been
de−energized before. The earthing switch has not the capability to switch capacitive or induced currents.

Switching the earthing switch onto an energized section will probably result in an internal fault which can cause se
vere injury or death to the operating person..

Make−proof earthing switch

The make−proof earthing switch is used as an earthing switch with the capability to switch capacitive or induced
currents. Furthermore the make−proof earthing switch has the capability to switch on a short−circuit. It can be used
to verify that the installation is dead if no other means, such as high voltage detection systems, are available.

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.49

Voltage transformer

The voltage transformer is designed to transform the high system voltage to low voltages which can be processed
by the control and protection systems. For safe operation one end of the high voltage winding shall always be con
nected to earth. The voltage transformer shall not be fed from the secondary side to use it as a high−voltage trans
former.

Voltage transformer with integrated isolating device

Voltage transformers with integrated isolating device are voltage transformers which can be isolated from the rest of
the GIS. The isolating device is not a disconnector. The isolating device shall only be used for test purposes. Ope
rate the isolating device only with a de−energized voltage transformer.

Current transformer

The current transformers are designed to transform the high operating currents into low currents which can be pro
cessed by the control and protection systems. The safe operation of current transformers requires that the specified
burden is always connected to the secondary terminals of the current transformers,

1HDG518620 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.410

1.5 Gas pressures 1.5
The modules of gas insulated switchgear are filled with SF6. The pressure levels are combined according to the re
quirements of the installation layout. Each of the two pressure levels provides values for filling pressure, signal pres
sure1 and signal pressure 2. The detailed data of these values of the individual gas compartments can be found in
the installationspecific gas scheme.

1.5.1 Filling and signal pressure

Level 1

800
780
Pabs [kPa]

760
740
720
700
680 Filling
660
pressure
640
620 Signal
600 contact1
580 Signal
560
contact2
540
520
500
480
460
440
420
Tolerances:
400
380
Filling pressure: . +10kPa
Switch point: . . . +20kPa
360
340
−30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 °C
243 253 263 273 283 293 303 313 323 333 K
T
Figure1.51: Temperature influence on pressure

Table1.51: Pressures at 20 °C

Filling pressure Signal pressure 1 Signal pressure 2

600 kPa 540 kPa 520 kPa

1HDG518614A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.51

Level 2

800.0 Filling
780.0 pressure
Pabs [kPa]

760.0
740.0
720.0 Signal
700.0
contact1
680.0 Signal
660.0
contact2
640.0
620.0
600.0
580.0
560.0
540.0
520.0
500.0
480.0
460.0
440.0
420.0
400.0 Tolerances:
380.0 Filling pressure: +10kPa
360.0 Switch point: . . +20kPa
340.0
−30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 °C
243 253 263 273 283 293 303 313 323 333 K
T
Figure1.52: Temperature influence on pressure

Table1.52: Pressures at 20 °C

Filling pressure Signal pressure 1 Signal pressure 2

700 kPa 620 kPa 600 kPa

INFORMATION At a filling pressure of 700 kPa at 20 °C a partial liquefaction at −25 °C occurs.

1HDG518614A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.52

1.5.2 Maintenance pressure
The gas pressure may be reduced to the so called maintenance pressure, if necessary during maintenance work on
an adjacent gas compartment.

1.5.3 Temperature dependency of gas pressures

Formula for calculation of the pressure in dependency of the temperature

INFORMATION The following formula are only valid for the gaseous stage, not for partial liquefac
tion!

Conversion of gas pressures for temperatures other than 20°C

P í + P 20 @ 273 ) í
273 ) 20

P í = Pressure at temperature í

í = Actual temperature in °C

P 20 = Pressure at 20 °C

Example:

Circuit−breaker, pressure at 40 °C:

P 40 + 700kPa @ 273 ) 40 + 748kPa

273 ) 20

1HDG518614A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.53

1.6 Gashandling 1.6
WARNING Hazard Hazard due to high voltage, danger of severe injury due to
moving parts of switch linkage.
Cause During the work the enclosure is opened and there is direct
access to the high voltage conductors. After removing cov
ers there is an exposure to moving parts.
Action Before starting the work described in this chapter read and
understand all instructions, safety instructions, safety pre
cautions and warnings in the product manual, especially in
chapter Gas−insulated Switchgear in section Safety Instruc
tions. Follow all instructions in chapter Installation in section
Installation of the GIS.

WARNING Hazard Danger of suffocation due to SF6, hazard to health due to

decomposition products, danger to the environment if SF6
is released to the atmosphere.
Cause SF6 is a greenhouse gas. During switching operations
harmful decomposition products may be generated.
Action Follow the instructions in section Sulphurhexafluoride.

WARNING Hazard Wrong gas pressure during maintenance can result in

bursting of barrier insulators.
Cause During maintenance work an exact maintenance pressure
must be adjusted in the gas compartment. An excess of
the maintenance pressure can result in bursting of insula
tors.
Action For measuring and adjusting of gas pressures use exclus
ively the described precision pressure gauges!

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.61

 WARNING Hazard Danger of failure of insulation resulting in internal arc which
could cause severe injury or death to people.
Cause Operating the GIS below the minimum functional pressure
could result in the failure of insulation. Failure of insulation
can result in internal arc.
Action If a gas compartment has to be evacuated for any reason
or the gas pressure must be decreased below the minimum
functional pressure, it is mandatory that all active parts are
deenergized and earthed.
Therefore both sides of switching apparatuses in gas com
partments, which contain circuit−breakers or disconnector /
earthing switches in the OFFposition, must be earthed on
both sides.

NOTICE Hazard Damage of the voltage transformer.

Cause The voltage transformer is shipped with an SF6 filling at

150kPa pressure. If pressure is reduced or the voltage
transformer is evacuated there might be insufficient im
pregnation of the foil insulation. This can lead to failure of
the insulation although the voltage transformer has been
filled at filling pressure.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Never reduce the pressure below 150 kPa SF6.

NOTICE Hazard Danger to the environment.

Cause This equipment contains the fluorinated greenhouse gas

SF6 covered by the Kyoto Protocol and with a global warm
ing potential (GWP) 22200.
Action SF6 shall be recovered and not released into the atmos
phere.
For further information on use and handling of SF6 please
refer to IEC622714: Highvoltage switchgear and control
gear − Part 4: Handling procedure for sulphur hexafluoride
(SF6) and its mixtures.

INFORMATION The layoutspecific gas scheme shows the filling pressures and the signal contact
values of all gas compartments. The influence of the temperature on the filling pres
sures is explained by graphics and formulas in section Gas Pressures.

INFORMATION The gas valves of all gas compartments must be closed with the adequate cover
screw after gas filling. Alternatively a gas density relay/gas density sensor must be
connected to the gas valve.
Tighten the cover screw with a torque of 40 Nm.
Tighten the screw of a gas density relay/gas density sensor with the torque indica
ted in chapter Modules in the relevant section Gas density relay/Gas density
monitor.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.62

1.6.1 General

1.6.1.1Gas compartments

The GIS has several separate gas compartments which are gastightly separated by barrier insulators. Each gas
compartments is equipped with a gas density monitor for density supervision and a gas valve for filling respectively
evacuating the gas compartments. The gas valves contain a nonreturn valve which prevents an unintentional emis
sion of gas.

A gas compartment has to be evacuated before filling with SF6. During filling operation the pressure in the gas
compartment is measured with a precision pressure gauge which is independent from atmospheric pressure.

1.6.1.2Delivery of the GIS

The GIS modules are delivered ex works filled with dry nitrogen (N2) at a pressure of approximately 150kPa. The
exception to this rule is the inductive voltage transformer which will be delivered ex works filled with SF6 at a low
pressure of approximately 150kPa.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.63

1.6.2 Measures during work on gas compartments

INFORMATION During work on gas compartments we recommend to deenergize all adjacent gas
compartments so that the gas pressure can be reduced in the adjacent gas com
partments.

1.6.2.1Barrier insulators fixed on one side only

ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Figure1.61: Barrier insulator fixed from one (left) side only

Mechanical work on barrier insulators fixed on one side only, e.g. for assembly works or extensions, is only allowed
up to a maximum differential pressure of 100 kPa. (This corresponds to a filling pressure of 200 kPa in the respec
tive gas compartment and atmospheric pressure on the outside).

p  100 kPa

differential pressure p
pm = 200 kPa ambientpressure maintenance pressure pm
(~ 100 kPa)

Figure1.62: Pressure coordination during maintenance work

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.64

1.6.2.2Barrier insulators fixed on both sides

Ì
Ì Ì
Ì
Figure1.63: Barrier insulator fixed from both sides

A singlesided pressurization of the insulators exceeding a differential pressure of 100kPa due to gas handling at
not energized modules of the GIS is only allowed if both sides of the insulator are covered gas tight with pressure
proof enclosures /covers.

The maximum admissible differential pressure (equivalent to an absolute filling pressure with vacuum in the adjacent
gas compartment, see Figure1.64) is 600 kPa.

p  600 kPa

differential pressure p
pm = 600 kPa vacuum maintenance pressure pm
(~ 0 kPa)

Figure1.64: Pressure coordination at vacuum or during evacuation

In case of mechanical work on barrier insulators fixed on both sides, the gas pressure in adjacent gas compart
ments has to be reduced to the following maintenance pressure pm values if the module to be worked on is at at
mospheric pressure: 600 kPa.

Mechanical work on barrier insulators fixed on both sides, (e. g. maintenance of circuit−breaker, work in the context
of onsite routine tests, see Figure1.65) is only allowed up to a maximum differential pressure of 500 kPa.

p  500 kPa

differential pressure p
pm = 600 kPa ambient pressure maintenance pressure pm
(~ 100 kPa)

Figure1.65: Pressure coordination during maintenance work

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.65

1.6.2.3Supervision of the pressure during maintenance

The maintenance pressure in the affected module has to be adjusted and supervised applying a precision pressure
gauge.

In case the pressure falls below the signal pressure1 (see gas scheme) measured by the gasdensity relay, a further
reduction of the pressure is not admissible.

Adequate measures have to be taken in order to keep the maintenance pressure within the limits mentioned above.
These are for example:
− Deenergize the relevant part of the busbar
− Reschedule the maintenance work at a time with cooler ambient temperature
− Reschedule the maintenance work at a time with reduced operating current

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.66

1.6.3 Examples

1.6.3.1Work on circuit−breaker gas compartment

In this example maintenance work is done on the circuit−breaker in bay E02, e.g. replacement of the gas adsorber.

1 2 3 9 11
E01 E02 E03

10

6 8

1 − Busbar A in bay E01 7 − Cable termination in bay E02

2 − Busbar A in bay E02 8 − Make−proof earthing switch in bay E02
3 − Busbar B in bay E02 9 − Busbar sectionalizer disconnector A
4 − Circuit−breaker in bay E02 10 − Busbar sectionalizer disconnector B
5 − Outgoing disconnector in bay E02 11 − Busbar A in bay E03
6 − Voltage transformer in bay E02
Figure1.66: Gas scheme

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.67

 1. Switch OFF and earth circuit−breaker (4)
2. Reduce the pressure in the adjacent gas compartments (2, 3, 5, 7, 8) to the maintenance pressure if the
actual filling pressure exceeds the maintenance pressure due to ambient temperature or due to tempera
ture rise by the operating current.
3. Evacuate the SF6 from the circuit−breaker gas compartment (4) and inflate with air.
4. Check that the admissible differential pressures are not exceeded before and during the maintenance
work.
5. Carry out the necessary maintenance work
6. Evacuate the air from the circuit−breaker gas compartment (4) and fill with SF6
7. Increase the SF6 gas pressure of the adjacent gas compartments (2, 3, 5, 7, 8) to the filling pressure in
case the pressure has been reduced to maintenance pressure before
8. Carry out a leakage test

WARNING Hazard Severe injury due to bursting insulator.

Cause In case the circuit−breaker has to be removed from busbar

A and B during maintenance the counter flange of the insu
lators of the busbar disconnector modules is missing dur
ing the work. In this case the differential pressure value for
insulators with fixation on one side only is applicable.
Otherwise the insulator may burst.
Action Apply the correct maintenance pressure for insulators with
fixation on one side only. In this case busbars A and B have
to be de−energized up to sectionalizers 9, 10.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.68

1.6.3.2Work on outgoing module

In this example maintenance work at the outgoing disconnector with cable sealing end in bay E02 is described.

1 2 3 9 10
E01 E02 E03

6
8

1 − Busbar A in bay E01 6 − Voltage transformer in bay E02

2 − Busbar A in bay E02 7 − Cable termination in bay E02
3 − Busbar B in bay E02 8 − Make−proof earthing switch in bay E02
4 − Circuit−breaker in bay E02 9 − Busbar sectionalizer disconnector A
5 − Outgoing disconnector in bay E02 10 − Busbar A in bay E03
Figure1.67: Gas scheme

1. Switch OFF and earth circuit−breaker (4)

2. Reduce the pressure in the adjacent gas compartments (4, 6) to the maintenance pressure if the actual
filling pressure exceeds the maintenance pressure due to ambient temperature or due to temperature rise
by the operating current
3. Evacuate the SF6 from the outgoing disconnector module (5) and inflate with air (evacuating the outgoing
disconnector module (5) in this layout results also in the evacuation of the makingproof earthing switch (8)
and the cable sealing end (7) because they belong to a common gas compartment)
4. Check that the admissible differential pressures are not exceeded before and during the maintenance work
5. Carry out the necessary maintenance work
6. Evacuate the air from the outgoing disconnector module (5) and fill with SF6
7. Increase the pressure of the circuit−breaker (4) and the voltage transformer (6) to filling pressure
8. Carry out a leakage test

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.69

 WARNING Hazard Severe injury due to bursting insulator.

Cause In case the voltage transformer has to be disassembled

during maintenance work, the maximum admissible differ
ential pressure values for its barrier insulator are those for
insulators with fixation on one side only.
In case the outgoing disconnector module has to be disas
sembled from the circuit−breaker during maintenance work,
the maximum admissible differential pressure values for
the circuit−breaker insulators are those for insulators with
fixation on one side only.
Otherwise the insulator may burst.
Action Apply the correct maintenance pressure for insulators with
fixation on one side only.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.610

1.6.3.3Work on busbar

In this example maintenance work on the busbar in bay E02 is described (e.g.replacement of the gas adsorber).

1 2 3 9 10
E01 E02 E03

6
8
7

1 − Busbar A in bay E01 6 − Voltage transformer in bay E02

2 − Busbar A in bay E02 7 − Cable termination in bay E02
3 − Busbar B in bay E02 8 − Make−proof earthing switch in bay E02
4 − Circuit−breaker in bay E02 9 − Busbar sectionalizer disconnector A
5 − Outgoing disconnector in bay E02 10 − Busbar A in bay E03
Figure1.68: Gas scheme
1. Switch OFF and earth circuit−breaker (4)
2. Deenergize and earth busbar A
3. Reduce the pressure in the adjacent gas compartments (1, 4, 9) to the maintenance pressure if the actual
filling pressure exceeds the maintenance pressure due to ambient temperature or due to temperature rise
by the operating current
4. Evacuate the SF6 from the busbar (2) and inflate air
5. Check that the admissible differential pressures are not exceeded before and during the maintenance work
6. Carry out the necessary maintenance work
7. Evacuate the air from busbar (2) and fill with SF6
8. Increase the SF6 gas pressure in the adjacent gas compartments (1, 4, 9) to filling pressure, in case it had
to be reduced to maintenance pressure before
9. Carry out a leakage test

WARNING Hazard Severe injury due to bursting insulator.

Cause In case the complete busbar module (2) has to be disas

sembled during maintenance, the maximum admissible
differential pressure values for the barrier insulators in
modules 1, 4, 9 are those for insulators with fixation on one
side only.
Otherwise the insulator may burst.
Action Apply the correct maintenance pressure for insulators with
fixation on one side only. In this case bay E01 must be de−
energized additionally.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.611

1.6.4 Safety measures SF6
The handling of SF6 and its decomposition products is without risk if the following safety measures are being taken:
− Good ventilation of rooms
Ventilate the room during maintenance works on the gas compartments of the GIS (e.g. evacuating, filling,
opening and cleaning). For maximum safety, it is advisable to have a second person present during all
works.
− Avoid contact with decomposition products
Avoid contact, swallowing or inhaling of decomposition products when working on open gas compart
ments. Wear special protective clothing while working, such as plastic gloves, safety goggles and filtering
mask, and properly dispose of them after completion of the works.
− Clean eyes and skin thoroughly
After contact with decomposition products immediately rinse with soap and plenty of water. Thoroughly
clean face, neck, arms and hands with soap and plenty of water before interrupting and after completing
the work. In case the eyes have been exposed to decomposition products, immediately rinse them with an
aseptic solution (e. g. commercial NaCl solution). Immediately consult a doctor in any case.
− Avoid dispersing dust deposits
Avoid dispersing of dust deposits. Remove persistent solid decomposition products with a clean, dry
cloth. Remove loose dust with a suitable vacuum cleaner with paper filters. The vacuum cleaner should
work on the cyclone principle.
− Neutralize dust deposits
Used materials, single use suits, moisture filters of the gas compartments, filters of the vacuum cleaner,
the masks and the service devices and all decomposition products and cleansers have to be disposed in
such a way, that decomposition products and the water soluble fluorides contained therein will not be re
leased into the environment. Do not open the filter bags. If the waste cannot be disposed of by a special
ist, neutralize it in a soda lime solution (natrium hydroxide and calcium oxide). The soda lime solution can
be disposed in Germany with the designation mineral soda lime solution" (waste designation 316) resp.
calcium fluoride soda lime solution (waste designation 31641).
− Wear protective clothing
When entering gas compartments of the GIS which may contain toxic decomposition products wear a
dusttight overall, protective gloves and boots, cover your head and use a suitable respirator (separator, e.
g. Auer 3S with combination filter 89 ABEK 2Hg/St. or, if a sufficient oxygen concentration has been mea
sured, a filtering device).
− Do not eat, drink or smoke
Do not drink, eat, smoke or store food in any room with open GIS compartments that may contain de
composition products.
− Leave contaminated Rooms
If an unpleasant pungent odor (similar to hydrogen sulphide) indicates the presence of gaseous decom
position products, leave the room immediately. Do not enter the room before having thoroughly ventilated
it, or without wearing a suitable respirator.
− Check oxygen concentration
After faults, when potentially hazardous SF6 concentrations are to be expected, do not enter the switch
gear room and all rooms at a lower level before thoroughly ventilating them and measuring the present
oxygen contents (minimum 17 Vol.%), or without wearing a suitable respirator.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.612

1.6.5 Evacuation of the gas compartments

INFORMATION If a gas compartment is evacuated after long years of operation, the SF6 has to be
thoroughly filtered (1.6.8 Cleaning of contaminated SF6).

INFORMATION Contamination of the GIS gas compartments shall be avoided. That is why moving
air in the vicinity of the work area shall be avoided. So the released gas shall be
directed away from the work area. This can be realized by suitable positioning of
the gas filler (5) or using a hose which is connected to the gas filler.

1.6.5.1Evacuation of gas compartments filled with N2

All works associated with the evacuation of a gas compartment can be performed with a DILO service cart (e. g.
type Economy or Mega) or with the following assembled components.

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvistconnector)
− Evacuated hose (DILOtype)
− Vacuum pump(s) with pressure gauge, safety shutoff valve and slide valve (DILOtype connector)

or as an alternative
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Complete DILO service cart

INFORMATION In order to shorten the time required for evacuation of a gas compartment, several
vacuum pumps might be operated in parallel. Each vacuum pump must be
equipped with a safety shutoff valve to prevent oil originating from the vacuum
pump being sucked into the GIS gas compartment.

INFORMATION When using a DILO service cart, observe their respective operating instructions.

2
1

3 4 5 6 7 8

1 − Evacuated hose (DILO) 5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO)

2 − Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvist) 6 − DILOconnector to the vacuum pump
3 − Gas compartment 7 − Slide valve and nonreturn valve
4 − Gas valve (Malmkvist) 8 − Vacuum pump
Figure1.69: Schematics evacuation of N2

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.613

Connection of the individual components (Figure1.69)
1. Close the slide valve (7)
2. Remove the gas density relay from the gas compartment (3)
3. Connect the precision pressure gauge (2) to the density relay gas valve
4. Remove the screw cap from the gas valve (4)
5. Equalize the pressures between the N2filled gas compartment (3) and the environment:
a) Screw the closed gas filler (5) without the hose (1) onto the gas valve (4) on the gas compartment (3)
and tighten until you feel some resistance. The gas filler (5) is equipped with a nonreturn valve so that
gas is not released when the lever is opened. This is opened by attaching a suitable counterpart
b) Open gas filler with lever and release N2
c) Once no further gas is released, connect the vacuum pump (8) and the gas filler (5) with the hose (1)

Evacuating the gas compartment (Figure1.69)

1. Check the vacuum pump (8) and the hose (1) for gas tightness:
a) Start the vacuum pump (8) with the slide valve (7) closed
b) The pressure gauge on the vacuum pump (8) should indicate p0,1 kPa within a few minutes
2. Open the slide valve (7) and the gas filler (5)
3. Evacuate the gas compartment (3) for a minimum of two hours
4. Close the slide valve (7)
5. Check with the closed slide valve (7) whether the pressure gauge on the vacuum pump (8) and the preci
sion pressure gauge (2) on the gas compartment (3) indicate p0,1 kPa
6. If:
p0,1 kPa: continue with item 7.
p 0,1 kPa: continue evacuating the gas compartment for another ½ hour to 1 hour, then continue
with item 4.
7. Remove the running vacuum pump (8) from the hose (1)
8. Turn off the vacuum pump (8)
9. Close the gas filler (5) and remove from the gas valve (4)
10. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap
11. Remove the precision pressure gauge (2) from the gas compartment (3)
12. Reconnect the dismounted gas density relay to the gas compartment (3)

INFORMATION During operation of the vacuum pump oil vapours might be generated. It must be
prevented that these vapours enter the gas compartment in order to avoid conta
mination of the SF6. To prevent the oil vapours from being sucked into the evacu
ated gas compartment, the vacuum pump has to be removed from the gas com
partment while it is still running.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.614

1.6.5.2Evacuation of SF6 from the gas compartment

All works associated with the evacuation of a gas compartment can be performed with a DILO service cart (e. g.
type Economy or Mega) or with the following assembled components.

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvisttype connector)
− Evacuated hoses (DILOtype)
− Dry filters (alumina) (DILOtype connector)
− Molecular sieve (DILOtype connector)
− Compressor unit with diaphragm and piston compressor
(DILOtype connectors)
− Pressure reservoir (evacuated tank) (DILOtype connector)

or as an alternative
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Complete DILO service cart with liquefier (for liquefied storage)

INFORMATION When using a DILO service cart, observe their respective operating instructions.

2 1

ÈÈÉÉÉ
ÈÈÉÉÉ
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 − Evacuated DILO hoses 7 − Molecular sieve

2 − Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvist) 8 − Slide valve
3 − Gas compartment 9 − Twostage compressor unit (piston and diaphragm)
4 − Gas valve (Malmkvist) 10 − Slide valve
5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO) 11 − DILOgas connector to pressure reservoir
6 − Dry filter (Alumina) 12 − Pressure reservoir
Figure1.610: Schematics evacuation for SF6

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.615

Connection of the components (Figure1.610)
1. Make sure that the slide valves (8, 10) and the gas filler (5) are closed
2. Remove the gas density relay from the gas compartment (3)
3. Connect the precision pressure gauge (2) to the gas valve of the gas density relay
4. Remove the screw cap from the gas valve (4)
5. Connect the closed gas filler (5) to the gas valve (4) of the gas compartment (3)
6. Connect the dry filter (6) with an evacuated hose (1) to the gas filler (5)
7. Connect the molecular sieve(7) with an evacuated hose(1) to the dry filter(6)
8. Connect the compressor unit(9) with an evacuated hose(1) to the molecularsieve(7)
9. Connect the pressure reservoir (12) with an evacuated hose (1) to the compressor unit (9)

Filtering SF6 and filling into the pressure reservoir (Figure1.610)

1. Open the slide valves (8, 10) and the gas filler (5)
2. Start the piston compressor (9)
3. As soon as the precision pressure gauge (2) on the gas compartment (3) indicates a pressure of 100 −
150kPa, switch on the diaphragm compressor (9), as well
4. As soon as the precision pressure gauge (2) on the gas compartment (3) indicates a pressure of 2 kPa,
close all the slide valves (8, 10) and the gas filler (5)
5. Shut off the compressor unit (9) and disconnect behind the slide valve (8)
6. Remove the gas filler (5) from the gas valve (4)
7. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap
8. Remove the precision pressure gauge (2) from the gas compartment (3)
9. Reconnect the dismounted gas density relay to the gas compartment (3)

CAUTION Hazard Danger of damage to compressure and release of SF6.

Cause The diaphragm compressor is only designed for pressures

up to 150 kPa!
Action As a consequence, the diaphragm compressor will be
destroyed if it is connected when the sensitive pressure
gauge on the gas compartment indicates a pressure higher
than 150kPa.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.616

1.6.6 Filling the gas compartments with SF6
Only filling and measuring devices with safety valves shall be used. The filling procedure shall be monitored with a
precision pressure gauge connected to the gas compartment.

INFORMATION After the evacuation procedure fill the gas compartments only up to a pressure of
200 kPa with SF6 in a first step. The gas compartments of the GIS should not be
filled with SF6 up to the rated filling pressure before the completion of all installation
works. Then check the gas compartments for gas tightness.

INFORMATION The check for gas tightness shall be documented in the site test protocol
1HDG518680.

1.6.6.1Filling with SF6 out of gas bottles

All works associated with the filling of a gas compartment can be performed with a DILO service cart (e. g. type
Economy or Mega) or with the following assembled components.

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvisttype connector)
− Evacuated hose (DILOtype)
− SF6 gas bottles (DILOtype connector)
− Pressure reducing valve (DILOtype connector)

or as an alternative
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Complete DILO service cart (e. g. type Economy or Mega)

INFORMATION When using a DILO service cart, observe their respective operating instructions.

2 1 11 10

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 − Evacuated hose (DILO) 7 − Pressure reducing valve

2 − Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvist) 8 − Bottle valve
3 − Gas compartment 9 − SF6gas bottle
4 − Gas fittting (Malmkvist) 10 − Bottleside precision pressure gauge
5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO) 11 − Hoseside precision pressure gauge
6 − Filling valve
Figure1.611: Schematics for the connection between gas compartment and SF6gas bottle

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.617

Connection of the components (Figure1.611)

NOTICE Hazard Partial discharge due to contamination of gas.

Cause Operation with open pressure reducing valves may con

taminate the gas.
Action Close pressure reducing valves.

1. Remove the gas density relay from the gas compartment (3)
2. Connect the precision pressure gauge (2) to the gas valve of the density relay
3. Remove the screw cap from the gas valve (4)
4. Connect the closed gas filler (5) to the gas valve (4) on the gas compartment (3)
5. Connect the pressure reducing valve (7) with the evacuated hose (1) to the gas filler (5)
6. Connect the SF6bottle (9) via the bottle valve (8) to the pressure reducing valve (7)

Filling procedure (Figure1.611)

1. Open the gas filler (5)
2. Open the bottle valve (8) of the SF6gas bottle (9) (the precision pressure gauge on the bottle side (10) indi
cates the filling pressure of the bottle)
3. Preselect the output pressure with the adjustment ring of the pressure reducing valve (7) (indicated on the
precision pressure valve on the hoseside (11))

pExit q pFilling
4. Open the hoseside filling valve (6) of the pressure reducing valve (7)
5. Continue the filling procedure until the gas compartment is filled up to a pressure of 200kPa
6. Fill gas compartments in consideration of admissible differential pressures with SF6
7. Close the gas filler (5) and remove it from the gas valve (4)
8. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap
9. Remove the precision pressure gauge (2) from the gas compartment (3)
10. Reconnect the dismounted gas density relay to the gas compartment (3)
11. Check for gas tightness

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.618

Changing the bottle

INFORMATION Replace the gas bottle if:

Pressure in the bottle [ Momentary pressure in the gas compartment
Pressure in the gas compartment t Filling pressure!

INFORMATION If the pressure in the gas bottle is too low, compress the gas with a compressor
unit and fill it into a separate bottle. (For instance, four bottles with a remaining
pressure of 100kPa each can be filled into a separate bottle to obtain one bottle
with a filling pressure of 400kPa).

1. Close the filling valve (6)

2. Close the bottle valve (8)
3. Remove the pressure reducing valve (7) from the empty bottle
4. Connect the pressure reducing valve (7) to the new bottle
5. Continue gas filling procedure as described in section Filling procedure

1.6.6.2Filling with SF6 out of a pressure storage tank

All works associated with the filling of a gas compartment can be performed with a DILO service cart (e. g. type
Economy or Mega) or with the following assembled components.

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvisttype connector)
− Evacuated hoses (DILOtype)
− Piston compressor (DILOtype connector)
− Pressure reservoir with SF6 (DILOtype connector)

or as an alternative
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Complete DILO service cart (e. g. type Economy or Mega)

INFORMATION When using a DILO service cart, observe their respective operating instructions.

2 1

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 − Evacuated hoses (DILO) 6 − Slide valve

2 − Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvist) 7 − Piston compressor
3 − Gas compartment 8 − Slide valve
4 − Gas valve (Malmkvist) 9 − DILOGas valve to pressure reservoir
5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO) 10 − Pressure reservoir, filled with SF6
Figure1.612: Schematics for the connection between gas compartment and pressure reservoir

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.619

Connection of the components (Figure1.612)
1. Close the slide valves (6) and (8)
2. Remove the gas density relay from the gas compartment (3)
3. Connect the precision pressure gauge (2) to the gas valve of the density relay
4. Remove the screw cap from the gas valve (4)
5. Connect the closed gas filler (5) to the gas valve (4) on the gas compartment (3)
6. Connect the piston compressor(7) with an evacuated hose(1) to the gas filler(5)
7. Connect the pressure reservoir (10) with an evacuated hose (1) to the compressor unit (7)

Filling the SF6 from the pressure reservoir into the gas compartment (Figure1.612)
1. Open the slide valves (6, 8) and the gas filler (5)
2. Turn on the piston compressor (7) and fill the gas compartment
3. Continue the filling procedure until the gas compartment (3) is filled up to a pressure of 200kPa
4. Fill gas compartments in consideration of admissible differential pressures with SF6
5. Close the gas filler (5) and remove it from the gas valve (4)
6. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap
7. Remove the precision pressure gauge (2) from the gas compartment (3)
8. Reconnect the dismounted gas density relay to the gas compartment (3)
9. Check for gas tightness

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.620

1.6.7 Measurement of moisture contents

1.6.7.1Measurement

The moisture contents should be tested at the earliest 24 h after the initial gas filling.

INFORMATION The measurement of the moisture contents is to be documented in the site test
protocol 1HDG518680.

INFORMATION Connectors and measurement hoses might contain residual moisture. For this rea
son, continue the measurement until the reading remains stable. For measurement
of the moisture contents, no additional hoses may be inserted between the gas
compartment and the connector of the measurement hose.

The measurement hoses must be connected directly to the gas compartment, the gas density relay or the gas valve
for gas filling.

1.6.7.2Dew point

The dew point is defined as the temperature at which the first component of a gas mixture starts to condensate.
The dew point can be used to calculate the gas humidity.

INFORMATION If the ambient temperature is lower or equal to the dew point, the measured values
might be falsified. In this case, the measurement must be repeated at a higher
ambient temperature.

Limit values

Since the dew point depends on the gas pressure, the operating manual of the dew point measuring device shall
be strictly followed.

The maximum permissible dew point in relation to the ambient temperature depends on the permissible relative gas
moisture contents (Figure1.614).

The relation between the dew point and the pressure is shown in Figure1.615.

2
1

3 4 5 6 7 8

1 − Evacuated hose (DILO) 5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO)

2 − Density relay (Malmkvist) 6 − Slide valve
3 − Gas compartment 7 − Adapter (DILOdew point measuring device)
4 − Gas valve (Malmkvist) 8 − Dew point measuring device
Figure1.613: Schematics dew point measurement

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.621

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Dew point measuring device (reading to be given in_C, e. g. DP 19)
− Evacuated hose (DILOtype)
− Gas filler (between DILOhose and dew point measuring device)

Measurement of dew point (Figure1.613)

1. Close slide valve (6) and the gas filler (5)
2. Remove screw cap from the gas valve (4)
3. Connect the gas filler (5) to the gas valve (4) on the gas compartment (3)
4. Connect the dew point measuring device (8) with the evacuated hose (1) to the gas filler (5 )
5. Open slide valve (6) and the gas filler (5)
6. Read the measured value
7. Check the reading with Figure1.614 according to Figure1.615
8. Close the gas filler (5) and remove it from the gas valve (4)
9. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap

−1

−2

−3
Dew point temperature °C

−4

−5

−6

−7

−8

−9

−10
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Ambient temperature °C
Figure1.614: Maximum permissible dew point (measured at filling pressure)

INFORMATION See also IEC622711, clause5.2.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.622

 Moisture contents
Example:
ppmv
Pressure at 20 _C: . . . . . . . . . . 580 kPa
Moisture contents: . . . . . . . . 470 ppmv
2000
Dew point: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −10 _C
Conversion: . . . . . . . . . 1 bar = 100 kPa

Dew point
°C
1000
900
+15
800
700 +10
600 +5
Measured
500 gas pressure at 20 °C
0
kPa
400 −5
1000
−10 900
300 800

−15 700
600
200 −20
500

−25 400

−30 300

100
90 −35
80 200
70 −40
60

50 −45

40 100
−50

30

Figure1.615: Relation between dew point and pressure

INFORMATION For the conversion from ppmv to ppmw the following formula can be used:

1 ppmw = 8,13 ppmv

ppmv = parts per million by volume

ppmw = parts per million by weight

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.623

1.6.8 Purification of contaminated SF6
The switching of currents partially decomposes the SF6 into gaseous and/or solid decomposition products. The
SF6 must be purified when the contents of decomposition products is so high that the dew point of the contami
nated SF6 at filling pressure is higher than the lowest operating temperature. For purification the SF6 it is filtered
through a dry filter (alumina) and a molecular sieve.

All works associated with the purification of contaminated SF6 can be performed with a DILO service cart (e. g. type
Economy or Mega) or with the following assembled components.

Necessary components
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvisttype connector)
− Evacuated hoses (DILOtype)
− Dry filter (alumina) (DILOtype connector)
− Molecular sieve (DILOtype connector)
− Compressor unit with piston and diaphragm compressor
(DILOtype connector)
− Pressure reservoir (evacuated tank) (DILOtype connector)

or as an alternative
− Gas filler (between Malmkvist and DILOtype connectors)
− Complete DILO service cart (e. g. type Economy or Mega)

INFORMATION When using a DILO service cart, observe their respective operating instructions!

INFORMATION The filter has to be replaced: The usable time of the filter depends largely on the
amount of SF6 to be filtered and the concentration of its decomposition products
(between 2hours and 2 days). The filter condition cannot be established visually,
but can only be determined by measurement (e. g. dew point). The disposal of
filters is described in 1.6.4 Safety Measures SF6.

WARNING Hazard Bursting of pressure reservoir.

Cause If the pressure reservoir is overloaded it may burst.

Action Observe the maximum permissible filling pressure of the
pressure reservoir. Observe the extraction capacity of the
compressor unit.

CAUTION Hazard Danger of damage to compressor and release of SF6

Cause The diaphragm compressor is only designed for pressures

up to 150 kPa!
Action As a consequence, the diaphragm compressor will be de
stroyed if it is connected when the precision pressure
gauge on the gas compartment indicates a pressure higher
than 150kPa.

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.624

 1
2

ÈÈ
ÈÈÉÉ
ÉÉ
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 − Evacuated hoses (DILO) 7 − Molecular sieve

2 − Precision pressure gauge (Malmkvist) 8 − Slide valve
3 − Gas compartment 9 − Twostage compressor unit (piston and diaphragm)
4 − Gas valve (Malmkvist) 10 − Slide valve
5 − Gas filler (MalmkvistDILO) 11 − DILOgas valve to pressure reservoir
6 − Dry filter (Aloxide) 12 − Pressure reservoir
Figure1.616: Schematic connection between gas compartment and pressure reservoir

Connection of the components (Figure1.616)

1. Remove the gas density relay from the gas compartment (3)
2. Connect the precision pressuregauge(2) to the gas valve of the densityrelay
3. Remove the screw cap from the gas valve (4)
4. Connect the closed gas filler (5) to the gas valve (4) of the gas compartment (3)
5. Connect the dry filter (6) with an evacuated hose (1) to the gas filler (5)
6. Connect the molecular sieve (7) with an evacuated hose (1) to the dry filter (6)
7. Connect the compressor unit (9) with an evacuated hose (1) to the molecular sieve (7)
8. Connect the pressure reservoir (12) with an evacuated hose (1) to the compressor unit (9)

Filtering of SF6 and filling into the pressure reservoir (Figure1.616)

1. Open the slide valves (8,10) and the gas filler (5)
2. Turn on the piston compressor (9)
3. As soon as the precision pressure gauge (2) on the gas compartment (3) indicates a pressure of 100 − 150
kPa, switch on the diaphragm compressor (9)
4. As soon as the precision pressure gauge (2) indicates a pressure of 5 kPa at the gas compartment (3),
close the slide valves (8) and (10)
5. Turn off the compressor unit (9) and remove it behind the slide valve (8)
6. Close the gas filler (5) and remove it from the gas valve (4)
7. Close the gas valve (4) with the screw cap
8. Remove the sensitive pressure gauge (2) from the gas compartment (3)
9. Reconnect the dismounted gas density relay to the gas compartment (3)

1HDG518615B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.625

1.7 Sulphur hexafluoride 1.7
This document contains a description of the general properties of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and the safety
measures to be taken when handling SF6 in quality as new and its decomposition products.

Applicable international standards

IEC60376 Specification of technical grade sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in electrical equipment.

IEC60480 Guidelines for the checking and treatment of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) taken from electrical
equipment and specification for its reuse.

IEC62271−301 High−voltage switchgear and controlgear − Part 303: Use and handling of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)

Figure1.71: SF6Molecule

1HDG518616A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.71

1.7.1 Properties
During normal operation the gas compartments of the GIS are filled with SF6 gas. SF6 is an unreactive and nearly
inert gas with a dielectric strength of approximately three times the one of air.

At identical pressures, SF6 has three to four times the arc quenching capability of air. In the meantime more than 30
years of operational experience with SF6gas insulated switchgear have been gathered worldwide.

Commercial SF6 is not a dangerous gas and is neither subject to the decree of dangerous goods nor to the techni
cal rules for dangerous goods (TRGS).

With enough rarefying with air SF6 can be breathed without any risk. The MAK value (max. workplace concentra
tion, valid for Germany) for SF6 is 1000 ppm or 6000mg/m3.

INFORMATION 1000 ppm (6000 mg/m3) is not the toxic limit. Because of its high density SF6 can
accumulate on the floor or in lower located rooms.

SF6 is:
− unreactive
− unpoisonous
− non flammable
− colorless
− odorless
− nearly inert

If SF6 reaches the atmosphere, it contributes to global warming. Thus the release of SF6 into the atmosphere must
be avoided whenever possible. The commercially available gas service and filtering devices allow full recycling of
SF6.

NOTICE Hazard If SF6 reaches the atmosphere, it contributes to global

warming.
Cause SF6 is a greenhouse gas.
Action Do not release any SF6 into the atmosphere.
SF6 shall be handled in a closed cycle with suitable SF6
service devices and by trained personnel only.

WARNING Hazard Risk of suffocation by lack of oxygen.

Cause Concentrations of SF6 in the air in excess of 35percent by

volume lead to oxygen starvation and possible suffocation.
Such high concentrations may occur in open, non venti
lated SF6 gas compartments, and occasionally at low
points of a building (e. g. in basements and cable ducts).
Action Before starting the work, care for sufficient ventilation, es
pecially before entering lower situated rooms. Evacuate
GIS compartments before working at inner parts of the en
closures and establish pressure equalization with atmo
sphere.

New SF6 will be delivered as liquefied gas in steel bottles. For testing and gas analysis of SF6 please refer to IEC
standard 60376.

1HDG518616A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.72

Table1.71: Technical data of commercial SF6

SF6

Gas density at 20 °C kg/m3 6,07

Specific weight at 20 °C g/ltr 6,07

Melting point C −63,7

Boiling point C −51

Water solubility per cm3 H2O cm3 0,0054

Color − colorless

Odor − odorless

1.7.2 SF6Inventory

NOTICE Hazard If SF6 reaches the atmosphere, it contributes to global

warming.
Cause SF6 is a greenhouse gas.
Action Do not release any SF6 into the atmosphere.
SF6 shall be handled in a closed cycle with suitable SF6
service devices and by trained personnel only.

INFORMATION The return of SF6 gas is contractually regulated with the original suppliers. If
requested by the customer, ABB will guarantee the return of the SF6 in strict
accordance with the respective regulations.

INFORMATION The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 have to be
documented in the site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680 in section
SF6Inventory.

Your local ABB Service will be happy to assist you with any problems related to reusing, cleaning or disposing of
SF6.

Maximum acceptable impurity levels for reuse of SF6 are given in IEC60480.

1HDG518616A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.73

1.7.3 Decomposition products
The switching of service currents and short circuit currents and internal arcing faults partially decomposes the SF6
into gaseous and/or solid decomposition products.

Gaseous decomposition products produce already in low concentrations the following warning signs that are ap
parent within seconds and just before causing any hazardous impact:
S Unpleasant pungent odor
S Irritation of the nose, the mouth and the eyes

These signs leave sufficient time for any personnel to leave the area before danger to health can arise.

CAUTION Hazard Irritation of the skin, the eyes and themucous membranes.

Cause Decomposition products of SF6 can cause irritation of the

skin, the eyes and themucous membranes!
Action Observe the safety information in chapter Gasinsulated
switchgear in section Gashandling.

1HDG518616A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|GasinsulatedSwitchgear| 1.74

2 Delivery 2

20
2.1 Transport 2.1
2.1.1 Packaging
Packaging requirements

The following factors must be taken into account when packaging equipment for shipping:
− stress occurring during multiple transshipments
− climatic conditions
− shipping routes
− duration of shipment (preservation, environmental factors)
− storage after shipment
− bottoms of containers must be designed to carry the full load of the package equipment
− packaging must be able to withstand stress caused by weight and by forces occurring during transporta
tion
− packaging must be geared to the intended type of transportation and designed to preclude any damage
to the equipment
− packaging / equipment may be provided with shock indicators

Types of packaging

Wooden support/skid and protective sheeting

− only for shipment by truck, by rail or by airway
− not suitable for storage
− not suitable for transportation by crane

Wooden box
− for shipment by truck, rail or ship
− suitable for storage

Container
− for shipment by truck, rail or ship
− suitable for storage

Requirements for container

− Container must have nailable wooden floors.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.11

Types of container
− within Europe: − Type HTT 6.254 (20’)
− overseas (to ISO standards) : − Type 20/8 and 20/8 ½
− 20’ steel dry cargo container
door height 2,26 − 2,28 m
door height 2,58 m
− If containers with any other designations are used, they must be equivalent
to those listed above

Container − general
− Containers holding dangerous goods must be CSCcertified
− Containers bearing the ACEP mark are approved for unrestricted use
− Containers must be checked for proper technical condition prior to shipment (Containers provided with the
ACEP mark have been inspected by the manufacturer)

Container data

Container data concerning weight and dimensions should be chosen to fit the requirements of the intended means
of transportation.

Environmental factors

Equipment may be shipped at temperatures in the range of −30°C to +60°C. The packaging must ensure that all
items of equipment are positively protected against any direct contact with water. The packing shall provided ade
quate protection against dirt, insects and other animals.

Preservation

The shipment within Europe, specifications concerning equipment preservation shall be included in the order. If no
preservative measures are specified, the freight will be packaged in the usual manner.

The preservation required depends on the method of transportation, the storage classification and the storage pe
riod.

Storage requirements and classifications are described in detail in chapter Delivery in document Storage.

In the case of ocean transport, preservation of the equipment is mandatory, since ELK04 components could be
damaged by the associated exposure to humidity.

Protection against condensation of humidity is provided for a transportation period of up to 12 months. If this period
is exceeded, adequate measures must be taken to prevent the formation of condensation water.

The packaging may be monitored by means of moisture indicators.

If the expiry date of equipment preservation falls within the period before or during shipment, or within the expected
storage period, persons responsible for shipment / storage shall be informed in due time so that appropriate mea
sures can be taken.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.12

Sealing of equipment

For transportation the equipment is filled with N2 to a absolute pressure of 150kPa (for ELK−04C: 120 kPa).

The gas pressure shall not drop below 110 kPa during shipment and storage.

All open flanges must be sealed with a shipping cover.

Packing and unpacking of equipment

Packing and unpacking of equipment shall always take a place in a dry (airconditioned) environment.

When unpacking switchgear components, check shock and moisture indicators on packaging/equipment, if pro
vided.

The circuit breaker shall be packed and shipped only in its upright (operating) position. An exception is ELK04H.
This type is designed for operation in horizontal position and shall be packed and shipped in horizontal position.

Securing of equipment

Freestanding parts shall be provided with appropriate support structures.

All loads shall be prevented from slipping by lashing and blocking. Means of securing equipment in place: chains,
lashes, ropes, square timber and wooden wedges.

Make sure that loads are evenly distributed.

The side walls of shipping containers shall not be subjected to any loads. Only container bottoms are designed to
withstand loading and possess sufficient stability.

Shipping marks

Markings provided on the packaging shall include fixing and hitching points for transportation and hoisting, total
weight, installation point of equipment components, and the packed unit’s center of gravity.

The place of delivery shall be marked on the packaging in accordance with the data provided in the order.

When dangerous goods are shipped, applicable regulations (of the countries of origin and destination as well as
transit countries) shall be complied with.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.13

2.1.2 Shipping
Loading and lifting facilities

To prevent equipment and parts from being damaged during loading and lifting operations, the facilities shall be
suitable for this purpose in terms of intended applications and loadcarrying capacities.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to slipping or tilting GIS bay.

Cause The bay support frame does not provide suspension points
for forklifts. The bay can slip and tilt over if lifted by a fork
lift.
Action Do not transport unpacked GIS bays with a forklift. Use a
crane.

When moving or lifting packed equipment, make sure that no other than the fixing and hitching points marked on
the packaging are used.

Switchbays and components which are not packed shall be lifted only at suitable hitching points.

The shipping units’ center of gravity markings shall be taken into account to prevent the units from tipping over.

Hitching points shall only be used for lifting equipment. Do not use hitching points for pulling or pushing the GIS.

Means of transportation

The means of transportation be selected so as to ensure that the shipping units will be subjected to the smallest
possible amount of vibration. Any damage to the equipment must be prevented by all means.

Forces and stresses in transportation

The forces are shown in Figure2.11:

FL
FQ

FV

direction

Figure2.11: Forces and stresses in transportation

Table2.11: Forces in g (g = Acceleration due to gravity)

FL FV FQ

Railway 4,0 g 0,5 g 0,4 g

Road 1,0 g 2,0 g 0,6 g

Ship 0,4 g 2,0 g 0,8 g

INFORMATION During loading and lifting operations higher values may occur.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.14

2.1.3 Inspections
Before shipment

Prior to closing the shipping containers, make sure that the equipment to be shipped is properly secured and with
out damage.

Check shipping containers for proper technical condition. This is particularly important in the case of freight contain
ers.

After shipment

Check shipping container for any damage before opening.

After opening a container, immediately check the equipment for external damage and completeness. Carry out a
receiving inspection. Record the results of the receiving inspection in document Receiving inspection.

Check the N2 gas pressure because a loss of gas pressure can indicate a transport damage. For gas compart
ments without a residual overpressure carry out a leakage test before the transportation unit is installed.

2.1.4 Irregularities
During shipment

Any damage occurring on the packaging in transit shall, as far as possible, be repaired immediately. If this cannot
be done, appropriate measures shall be taken at once to preclude any further damage to the cargo.

All irregularities occurring during shipment as well as any remedial action taken shall be documented and reported.

After shipment

In the event of any damage detected on the packaging or equipment, the insurance company shall be called in and
the damage shall be assessed and recorded by an authorized agent.

Photographs shall be taken of any damaged packaging to serve as evidence at a later time.

Any packaging which is damaged or soaked shall under no circumstances be used for prolonged storage of equip
ment.

Any corrective action taken with regard to packaging or equipment preservation shall be recorded in detail. Allma
terials used for these measure must have been tested and approved.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.15

2.1.5 Standards and regulations
The most important standards and regulations are:
− DIN55402 markings
− DINISO668 freight container

These standards also make reference to other pertinent standards which must be observed as well.

Additional regulations, guidelines and instruction sheets have been issued by the following organizations:
− German Lloyd (GLRegulations and codes of practice)
German Lloyd (GLVorschriften und Richtlinien)
− Association for Rationalization in Packaging/Packaging Consulting and Research Office (RGV/BFSV In
struction sheets)
Rationalisierungsgesellschaft Verpackung/Beratungs und Forschungsstelle Verpackung (RGV/BFSVBe
triebsblätter)
− Association of german Engineers (VDIRegulations and Guidelines)
Verein deutscher Ingenieure (VDIVorschriften und Richtlinien)

These regulations, guidelines, instruction sheets and the relevant standards must be equally observed.

Standards and regulations of the country of destination shall be considered, if applicable.

Applicable regulations and guidelines issued by ABB shall also be observed.

1HDG518621A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.16

2.2 Structural loading due to switching forces
Guide for preliminary floor design
2.2
2.2.1 General remarks
This document describes a procedure that enables dynamic switching forces of GIS ELK04 to be taken into con
sideration as static forces during the preliminary design of the switchgear floor. It is based on the relationship be
tween the floor’s period of natural oscillations and its deflection. It is designed to be an easytouse tool for prelimi
nary design of the switchgear floor. The method given in this document is not a substitute for a final and proper
analysis by a qualified engineer.

2.2.2 Load characteristics

The switching process of a switchgear unit is a dynamic load, which
− is a fading and harmonic oscillation,
− will occur at regular intervals over the life of the switchgear,
− will not occur frequently,
− occurs in the vertical direction for GIS ELK04,
− is effective at the load points a, b and − if present − c of an LPG as per Table 3.B2.
(See Fig. 3.B of the construction data drawings/loading and earthing plan.),
− can occur simultaneously on all switchgear units or in any combination.

1HDG518624Ben ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.21

 toscillation

Force Fk,z [kN]

Fmax

Fmax
+
Fmin

Time [ms]

Fmin

Fmax, Fmin: Peak values of the forcetimecurve during the switching process
as per table 3.B2 of the construction data drawings
tOscillation: Load oscillation period as per table 3.B2 of the construction data drawings
Figure2.21: Forcetime curve caused by switching process

1HDG518624Ben ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.22

2.2.3 Considerations at the dimensioning stage
Dynamic load factor 

When dimensioning the floor (i.e. the floor or base plate), the dynamic nature of the load from the switching process
must be taken into consideration.

ABB suggests using the dynamic load factor for this purpose (Figure2.22).

2,4

2,0

1,5

1,0

0,5

0
0,1 0,5

0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0

< 0,1 0, 1 < < 0,5 0, 5 < < 4,0 > 4,0

() 0,5 4,8  2,6 − 0,4  1,0

Figure2.22: Dynamic load factor 

The dynamic load factor  reflects the dynamic effect of a load in relation to its static effect. The dynamic behaviour
of the floor is taken into account by considering the dependent relationship between the oscillation periods as per
equation [1].
t oscillation
t+1@ [1]
2 T

T+ 2@p [2]
Ǹgńdg

 Relationship between the oscillation periods

toscillation [s] Load oscillation period of the forcetime curve arising from switching process
T [s] Period of natural oscillation of the floor
g [m] Deflection of floor at the load point due to all permanent loads:
Selfweight of floor, superimposed dead load (screed, tiling etc.), switchgear (GIS), other
loads
g [m/s2] Gravitational acceleration (9,81 m/s2)

1HDG518624Ben ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.23

Equivalent static load

The load factor can be used to convert the dynamic load of the switching process into an equivalent static load
Fswitch.
F switch + a(t) @ 1ń2 @ (F max ) F min) [3]

Fswitch Equivalent static load from the switching process

 Dynamic load factor as per Figure2.22
Fmax+Fmin Total of peak values as per Figure2.21 (Use absolute values of Fmax and Fmin)

Procedure
1. Design of the floor for all permanent loads
2. Calculation of the deflection g of the floor due to all permanent loads without safety factor load F
3. Calculation of period of natural oscillations T of the floor depending on g as per equation [2]
4. Calculation of relationship between the oscillation periods  as per equation [1]
5. Determine  from Figure2.22
6. Calculation of Fswitch as per equation [3]
7. Verification of floor for all loading cases which occur along with their combinations
ABB recommends for Fswitch:
− safety factor load F=1,1
(F is a safety factor used in construction engineering)
8. Repeat steps 1. bis 7. with modified floor design if necessary

Steps 2. bis 6. for determining Fswitch are to be carried out for all load points as per Table 3.B2 of the construction
data drawings with the corresponding values.

Sample calculations

Input data for project (example):

t oscillation + 0, 05s, d g + 0, 003175m, F max + 5kN, F min + −8kN

Entered into equation [2]:

T + 2 @ p + 0, 11
Ǹgńdg

Entered into equation [1]:

t oscillation
t + 1ń2 @ + 0, 227
T

From Figure2.22: =4,8·0,227=1,1

Entered into equation [3]:

F switch + a(t) @ 1ń2 @ (F max ) F min) + 1, 1 @ 1ń2 @ (|5| ) |−8|) + 7, 15 kN

1HDG518624Ben ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Delivery| 2.24

3 Installation 3

30
3.1 Installation of the GIS 3.1
These instructions refer to the installation of a GIS and to all work that requires opening a gas compartment.

WARNING Hazard Danger to life by high voltage, serious danger of personal

injury by operating mechanism for switching apparatuses.
Cause During work the compartment will be opened and a direct
access to the high voltage conductors is given. After re
moving the operating mechanism cover movable parts are
exposed.
Action Before execution of the measures described in this chapter
read and understand all notes, measures of precaution and
warnings of the product manual, specially in chapter Gas
insulated Switchgear in section Safety Informations.
Observe the instructions in chapter Installation in section
Installation of the GIS.

WARNING Hazard Risk of suffocation by lack of oxygen, hazard of health

damage caused by decomposition products of SF6, hazard
for environment by releasing the greenhouse gas SF6 into
into the atmosphere.
Cause SF6 is a greenhouse gas and harmful decomposition prod
ucts occur during switching.
Action Observe the work instructions in chapter Gasinsulated
Switchgear in section Gashandling.

It must be possible to clean the shoes before entering the immediate working area. The working clothes must be
made of nonfluffing material.

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.11

3.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area
Securing the installation area

The installation area must be secured against entry of unauthorized personnel.

Power supply

The following power supply outlets must be made available in the installation area:
− 1phase AC outlets (16A) and
− 3phase AC outlets (16A)

Walls and ceilings

− Walls and ceilings have to be in a condition, that neither dirt nor plaster might fall or rub off
− Formation of condensation water on the ceiling has to be prevented under any circumstance

Floor
− The floor in the installation area must have a firm surface
− It must be possible to keep the floor dustfree with a vacuum cleaner

Outdoor installation
− In case of an outdoor installation of the GIS or of GIS components, open gas compartments must be pro
tected from the entry of dust or humidity (e. g. by means of installation covers, tarpaulins etc.)

Room for repair works

A room must be provided for necessary repair works that is:

− weather protected
− lockable
− separated from the installation area

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.12

3.1.2 Cleaning

WARNING Hazard Failure of insulation (in worst case arcing fault).

Cause SF6 can loose its arc quenching and insulating properties
when contaminated.
Action All surfaces and components that will be in contact with
SF6 have been thoroughly cleaned in our factory and have
been installed under conditions of utmost cleanliness.
When working on open devices or gas compartments,
avoid the entry of or contact with dirt, sweat and humidity
at any time.

Water, acid contamination and oxygen (especially when simultaneously present) can cause corrosion that might
have a negative impact on the mechanical function of the GIS components.

Water, especially when combined with acid contamination, can reduce the dielectric strength of the GIS due to con
densation at low operating temperatures and high pressure. For this reason, the degree of contamination has to be
limited to a level that corrosion and/or condensation are of no significance.

Installation area

Prior to opening a gas compartment, thoroughly clean and vacuum clean the installation area, especially in the im
mediate vicinity of the flanges to be connected. Avoid dust disturbance in the installation area.

WARNING Hazard Failure of insulation (in worst case arcing fault).

Cause SF6 can loose its arc quenching and insulating properties
when contaminated.
Action Carry out a visual inspection of the interior of an open gas
compartment and ensure utmost cleanliness in the interior
of an open gas compartment. Rub the insulators and all
teflon parts with a cloth moistened with a suitable cleaning
agent. Cleaned insulators may only be touched wearing
disposable latex gloves.
Do not use water for cleaning under any circumstance!

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.13

Cleaning the GIS components

Immediately before assembly, clean all loose metal parts and subassemblies that have to be installed and all con
tacting and sealing surfaces.
Table3.11: Parts and cleaning agents

Parts Cleaning agent

Flange sealing surfaces and Orings

Contacting surfaces of the conductors
Connectors
Links
Isopropanol, 70 %
Screens
(GON598012P0005)
Insulators
Teflon parts
Painted conductors
Painted surfaces inside the enclosure

Painted surfaces outside the enclosure Pure water or soap suds (0,5%)

Silicon shielding of the bushing Wacker SiliconOilemulsion E 1044

Use a nonfluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent. Rub all parts with this cloth. Take note of
the following:
− Try to avoid touching the components inside the gas compartments
− Use disposable gloves for cleaning
− Use a spray bottle to prevent contamination of the cleaning agent
− Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the cleaning agent
− Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
− Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth

Cleaning the painted parts of the GIS

− Painted surfaces inside the enclosure, painted conductors:
These are only allowed to be cleaned with Isopropanol, 70 %.
− Painted surfaces outside the enclosure:
These are only allowed to be cleaned by means of pure water or soap suds (0,5%).

Cleaning the silicon bushings of the GIS

Use a nonfluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent Wacker SiliconOilemulsion E 1044. Rub all
the silicon shieldings with this cloth. Take note of the following:
− Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the cleaning agent
− Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
− Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.14

3.1.3 Flange connections
Once the transport covers have been removed, the installation of the flanges must be completed without interrup
tions.

If interruptions can not be avoided, open flanges must be covered with a clean plastic foil. This instruction must also
be observed if an insulator is mounted on the flange.

Sealing surfaces
− Check sealing surfaces for scratches or similar damages
− Even out any scratches with fine sand paper.
Admissible material is Scotch Brite WR−SH, carbon silicide, grade superfine, GZN220579P0015
− Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner
− Clean the sealing surfaces

Orings

Orings have to be cleaned before they are installed (3.1.2 Cleaning).

Do not install any orings that show damage or deformation.

Before closing a flange connection, clean the immediate vicinity and all accessible parts of the components to be
connected with a vacuum cleaner. Do not touch the active parts and the insulators with the vacuum cleaner’s
nozzle.

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.15

3.1.4 Tightening torque for bolts
The following tightening torques are valid for nongreased bolts in threads and holes. Any deviations from these va
lues are indicated in the assembly drawings.
Table3.12: Tightening torques for nongreased bolts

Tightening torque in Nm
Thread
Steel/8.8 *) Steel/A2−70 **) Aluminium ***)

M4 2,9 − 1,5

M5 6 5,2 3

M6 10 7,8 5,5

M8 25 19,5 14

M10 49 38,3 26

M12 86 67,2 45

M16 210 147,6 100

*) Extract from NB305080, tolerance "3%

**) Extract from GPDT049615, tolerance "3%
***) Extract from GPFA820006, tolerance +20% −0%, independent of the material of the bolts

3.1.5 Filling of gas compartments

WARNING Hazard Risk of suffocation by lack of oxygen, hazard of health

damage caused by decomposition products of SF6, hazard
for environment by releasing the greenhouse gas SF6 into
into the atmosphere.
Cause SF6 is a greenhouse gas and harmful decomposition prod
ucts occur during switching.
Action Observe the work instructions in chapter Gasinsulated
switchgear in section Gashandling.

1HDG518631A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.16

3.2 Conversion tables
Table3.21: Temperature
3.2
°C (Degree Celsius) °F (Degree Fahrenheit)* K (Kelvin) **

0° 32 ° 273,15

15 ° 59 ° 288,15

20 ° 68 ° 293,15

25 ° 77 ° 298,15

30 ° 86 ° 303,15

*n °C = ( 1,8 x n + 32) °F **n K= n − 273,15 °C

Table3.22: Tightening torques

Nm (Newtonmeter) lbf x ft kpm (Kilopondmeter)

(foot pound−force of torque)

1 0,7376 0,102

1,356 1 0,1383

9,807 7,233 1

Table3.23: Absolute pressures

kPa MPa psi (Pound per

bar Torr
(KiloPascal) (MegaPascal) Square Inch)*

0,133322 0,0001333 0,001333 0,01934 1

6,8948 0,0068948 0,068948 1 51,715

100 0,1 1 14,504 750,06

420 0,42 4,2 60,917 3150,25

440 0,44 4,4 63,817 3300,26

500 0,5 5 72,520 3750,3

600 0,6 6 87,024 4500,36

620 0,62 6,2 89,925 4650,37

700 0,7 7 101,528 5250,42

* psig = pound per square inch gauge (relative pressure, overpressure))

psi may also be expressed as lbf/in2

1HDG518630A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.21

Table3.24: Force

N (Newton) lbf (Pound)

1 0,22481

4,4482 1

Table3.25: Length

mm (Millimeter) in (Inches)

1 0,03937

25,4 1

Table3.26: Weight

kg t lbm US t
(Kilogramm) (Tons metric) (Pound) (2000 lbm)

1 0,001 2,20462 0,0011

1000 1 2204,62 1,1

0,4536 0,00045 1 0,0005

907,185 0,907 2000 1

Table3.27: Volume

gal (liquid) gal (dry) m3 ft3

l (Liter)
Gallons Gallons Cubicmeter Cubicfeet

1 0,26417 0,22702 0,001 0,03531

3,78541 1 0,85937 0,0037 0,13368

4,40489 1,16365 1 0,0044 0,15556

1000 264,17 227,02 1 35,31467

28,31685 7,48052 6,42851 0,02832 1

1HDG518630A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.22

3.3 Outdoor installation 3.3
3.3.1 Operating mechanisms and terminal boxes
Circuit breaker operating mechanism

Two anticondensation heaters (70 W and 15 W) are installed in the circuit breaker operating mechanism housing.

An additional metal cover is installed on top of the operating mechanism. Do not forget to re−install this cover after
maintenance work.

All elements which are connected to the circuit breaker operating mechanism box via a bolt hole (i.e. Camloc clo
sures) have to be sealed waterproof on the inside of the operating mechanism box with Hannokitt
GON598019P0106.

Disconnector/earthing switch operating mechanism

Anticondensation heaters (15 W) are installed in the disconnector/earthing switch operating mechanism housing.

An additional metal cover is installed on top of the operating mechanism. Do not forget to re−install this cover after
maintenance work.

All elements which are connected to the lower side of the operating mechanism box via a bolt hole (i.e.anticon
densation heating, auxiliary switches) have to be sealed waterproof on the lower side of the operating mechanism
box with Hannokitt GON598019P0106.

Operating mechanism of make−proof earthing switch

Anticondensation heaters (15 W) are installed in the operating mechanism housing.

An additional metal cover is installed over the operating mechanism. Do not forget to re−install this cover after main
tenance work.

All elements which are connected to the operating mechanism box via a bolt hole (i.e.Camloc closures) have to be
sealed waterproof on the inside of the operating mechanism box with Hannokitt GON598019P0106.

Current and voltage transformer

Anticondensation heaters (15 W) are installed in the terminal box.

All elements which are connected to the terminal box via a bolt hole (i.e.attachment of name plate) have to be
sealed waterproof on the inside of the operating mechanism box with Hannokitt GON598019P0106.

1HDG518632A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.31

3.3.2 Outdoor flange connections

NOTICE Hazard Danger of gas leakage due to corrosion.

Cause The wrong material of nuts, bolts and washers can result in
corrosion between steel and aluminium.
Action Use only specified, stainless nuts, bolts, washers and
spring washers for outdoor connections.

Treatment of the flange sealing surfaces:

A thin and even layer of fluor silicone grease FS 12 92 (no. GON598000P0008) has to be applied onto the complete
contacting surface of all metallic surfaces marked with in Table3.31 (contact and sealing surfaces). After
wards the flanges can be connected as previously described.

The gap in the area of the insertion piece marked in Table3.31 with has to be filled up with fluor silicone
grease FS 12 92 (no. GON598000P0008).

NOTICE Hazard Danger of damage to the insulator due to flashover.

Cause Grease within the area encircled by the inner diameter of

the sealing groove can disturb the field grading of the insu
lator. The grease can catch disturbing dirt particles.
A flashover can occur.
Action Do not apply grease to the insulator within the area which
is encircled by the inner diameter of the sealing groove.

INFORMATION All connections that do not have to be opened during the installation at site, have
been treated for outdoor installation in the factory prior to delivery. If such connec
tions have to be opened at site, the flanges have to be cleaned before they are
sealed again. The cleaning of the flanges is described in chapter Installation in
section Installation of the GIS.

1HDG518632A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.32

Table3.31: Greasing of flange connections

Type of flange Detail Application

Insulator/
enclosure

Enclosure/
enclosure

Insertion part

Fill gap
with grease

Outdoor
connection

Grease installed bursting disk outside Bursting disk

View port,
blind cover
gas valve

Apply thin film of grease Fill with grease

1HDG518632A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.33

3.4 Earthing 3.4
Earthing" is defined as the entirety of means and procedures associated with the earthing of equipment. Earthing"
means to connect a conductor via an earthing system to earth.

Earth" refers to both, the earth as a location and the earth as a substance such as humus, clay, sand, gravel and
rock. The earth is a conductor whose potential outside the influence of earthing systems is considered to be zero.
The Reference Earth" (neutral earth) is defined as a part of the earth, especially of its surface, outside the influence
of an earthing system in which between two random points no voltages deriving from the earth current can be mea
sured.

Earthing system" is defined as the entirety of electrically connected earths, metal parts acting similarly (e g. pole
bases, armatures, metal cable sheathing) and earthing leads.

Earthing electrode" is defined as a conductor, that is embedded in and electrically connected to the earth, or a
conductor that is embedded in concrete. In the latter case, the concrete is connected to the earth on a large area
(e. g. foundation earth).

Earthing conductor" is defined as an electrical conductor laid either outside the earth or insulated in the earth, that
connects a GIS part to be earthed with the earth.

Earthing of a GIS has different purposes depending on the earthing location within the GIS. Depending on the pur
pose the cross sections and geometry of the earthing conductors differ. So it is important to use strictly the cross
section and material defined in the earthing plan for the different earthing locations to fulfill the earthing requirements
at each location. The meaning of the different locations for earthing are:
− Enclosure of GIS:
In case of an earth fault within the gas compartment the earthing conductor carries the fault current and conducts
it into the earthing system of the substation. The earthing conductor is dimensioned to carry this fault current.
During the fault the earthing connection keeps touch voltages within the permissible limits. In normal operation
earthing of the enclosure provides the protection against contact with the high voltage conductors. For this reason
the earthing conductors must have sufficient cross section to conduct the fault current. For details see sections
3.4.1 and 3.4.2.
− Earthing of SF6 air bushing
The SF6 air bushing has its own earthing conductor. This earthing connection avoids problems if surges arrive at
the bushing and enter the GIS enclosure. Because the surges have high frequency characteristics this connection
must have a low impedance. For this reason two parallel conductors are used. For
details see section 3.4.4. If only a transformer is connected to the bushing this earthing connection is not neces-
sary.
− Earthing free standing control cubicles
Free standing control cubicles are positioned at a certain distance apart from the GIS. This results in longer con-
trol cables between control cubicles and GIS than usual. To keep a good signal quality on this connection an
earthing conductor is installed in parallel to the signal cables. For details see section 3.4.3.

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.41

 − Potential earthing
All parts which are not enclosures and so are not a source of fault currents get a potential earthing. A cross section
of 16 mm2 is sufficient. Due to equipotential bonding inadmissible touch voltages are avoided. Parts which have
metallic contact and do not have an electrical function do not need extra potential earthing. However, parts, which
have an electrical function (e.g. plugs, terminals, cap rails), require an extra potential earthing conductor.

A GIS installation with multiple bays has a busbar which is electrically connected through the complete length of the
switchgear and is capable to carry fault currents. Thus an extra earthing conductor throughout the complete length
of the switchgear is not necessary. The earthing of the GIS follows the concept of multiple point earthing. This
means that in defined distances the GIS enclosure is connected to the earthing system of the substation. The
earthing points are located on the bottom plates of the circuit−breakers. For installations with long busducts addi
tional earthing points may be provided. In this case refer to the earthing plan.

General rules for works related to earthing

DANGER Hazard Hazard due to high voltage. Danger of electric shock.

Improper earthing can result in severe injury or death.
Cause Incorrect earthing of the GIS can cause touch or step volt
ages in the installation which can result in electric shock.
Action During installation of the GIS connect the GIS enclosure
immediately to the substation’s earthing system strictly in
accordance to the projectspecific earthing plans. The
earthing plans and diagrams are part of the projectspe
cific documentation.
The operation of the GIS and the connection of the GIS en
closure to live substation sections without proper earthing
connections according to the earthing plans is strictly for
bidden.
During repair work make sure that all parts of the enclosure
stay permanently earthed with earthing conductors of suffi
cient cross section.

INFORMATION The earthing of the GIS shall be documented in the on site test protocol
Commissioning 1HDG518680.

− Install all electrical connections within the earthing system properly as defined in the earthing plan.
− Protect earthing conductors against mechanical damage.
− Keep the earthing conductors as short as possible.
− Install earthing conductors without loops.
− Inspect earthing system before commissioning.
− Do not interrupt the earthing system at any point. If parts of the busbar are dismantled make sure that the remain-
ing earthing connections have sufficient cross section to conduct the fault current into the earthing system of the
substation. Make sure that all remaining parts of the enclosure stay connected to the earthing system of the substa-
tion.
− For making the crimp connections follow the specifications of the manufacturer of the crimp cable lugs especially
concerning the adequate tools.
− Use the correct tightening torque for screws in aluminum and steel. Refer to chapter Installation section Installa-
tion of the GIS.

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.42

 − The contact resistances of a connection shall be sufficiently low, i.e. the connnections shall be free of dirt, corro-
sion and paint. The connections shall be greased with an adequate grease (e.g. Vaseline).
− The stacking of several crimp cable lugs is for contact reasons not admissible because when loosining screws only
one earthing connection is allowed to be opened.
− When making the connections make sure that both materials are suitable as far as the electrochemical series is
concerned. If this is not considered and electrolytes (e.g. water) are involved, the more ignoble metal partner
could corrode.
− The dimensioning of the earthing connection points to the earthing system and the dimensioning of the earthing
system of the substation itself is within the responsibility of the operator. The earthing connection points shall be
dimensioned in a way that the fault current of the GIS can be conducted safely. These earthing connection points
can be realized as e.g. Cu earthing bars, Cu earthing ropes, CadWeld connections or other typical variants. The
earthing connection points shall be designed in a way that the earthing material of the GIS manufacturer (crimp
cable lugs) can be connected easily. If the operator of the installation does not provide adequate earthing connec-
tion points, the operator of the installation is responsible for supplying the necessary material (e.g. adapters) and
for realizing the correct earthing connection to his earthing system.
− The operator of the installation is responsible for providing an earthing system with sufficient low resistance. He
has to ensure that the allowed values for step and touch voltages according to the relevant standards are not ex-
ceeded.
− The position of the earthing connection points required by the GIS in the earthing system of the operator, can be
taken from the GIS building drawing. These earthing connection points shall be positioned by the operator of the
installation in a way that the distance from the GIS (e.g. circuit−breaker bottomplate) to the provided earthing
connection points of the operator of the installation is less than 2.0 m.
− Information: The details and figures shown in the earthing plan are schematic representations and do not show
each part of a support structure or each connection point as in reality
− In general follow the rules concerning safety on work relevant for the country of erection and/or specified by the
operator during realizing the earthing. E.g. risk of stumbling or of injury shall be avoided by proper installation.
− When connecting the GIS earthing conductors to the earthing system belonging to the operator’s installation fol-
low always these principles:
1. The earthing connections which have their origin within the building shall be connected solely to the
earthing system belonging to the GIS building.
2. The earthing connections which have their origin outdoor shall be connected solely to the earthing
system of the outdoor substation.
If different earthing systems are connected, unwanted circulating currents could occur which could result
in a voltage rise of earthing conductors.
− Support structures, which stand directly on the base frame of a bay, need not an additional potential earthing.

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.43

3.4.1 Dimensioning

All material necessary for earthing of the GIS is delivered together with the equipment, if not specified differently in
the contract.

The dimensioning of the earthing conductors distinguishes GIS installations with several bays and single bay instal
lations. Installations of type ELK−04H (horizontal position of circuit−breaker) have to be treated as single bay installa
tions unless the circuit−breakers are connected by metal−enclosed ELK−04 enclosures and the dimensions are
smaller than 5 m.

Earthing
Cross section 1 Single bay Several bays

Copper rope (Cu) 2 x 120 mm2 120 mm2 every 5 m

at least 2 x 120 mm2

Potential earthing

Use 16 mm2 earthing conductors (copper rope) for potential earthing of the local control cabinets and other metallic
parts (e.g. support structure).

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.44

3.4.2 Installation of the GIS Earthing

Earthing

The individual GIS bays are interconnected through the busbar enclosures. This earthing between the bays is real
ized during bay coupling. For proper installation refer to chapter Installation section Bay coupling.

Multiple bay installation and single bays with dimensions larger than 5 m

Connect the circuit−breaker baseplate at least every 5 m (Figure3.41) with an earthing conductor 1 x 120 mm2
(cupper rope) to the building’s earthing system. Screw cable lug (3) to earthing point (2) in circuit−breaker baseplate
(1). The maximum distance between two earthing points shall be 5 m.

Single bay with dimensions smaller than 5 m

Connect the circuit−breaker baseplate (Figure3.41) with two earthing conductors, 120 mm2 (copper rope) each, to
the building’s earthing system. Screw cable lug (3) to both earthing points (2) in circuit−breaker baseplate (1). Alter
natively two conductors can be connected with a double−wire cable lug (5).

If only one GIS bay is to be installed, attach 2 x 120 mm2 (copper rope) to the circuit−breaker base plate
(Figure3.41). In case of single bays whose size exceeds 5 m additional earthing points may be defined. In this
case refer to the earthing plan.

2
5
1

13 − Circuit−breaker baseplate 16 − Cable lug with 1x16 mm2

14 − Earthing points 17 − Double wire cable lug with 2x120 mm2
15 − Cable lug with 1x120 mm2
Figure 3.4-1: Position of earthing terminals at the circuit breaker base plate

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.45

3.4.3 Local control cubicles

Earthing

The protective conductor bar of the integrated control cubicle is connected at its rear to the GIS enclosure through
one M12 earthing connection bolt and an earthing conductor (16 mm2 copper rope) in the factory. Check this con
nection during commissioning.

Potential earthing for separate local control cubicles

1. Install the conductor for potential earthing (16 mm2 copper rope) in parallel to the control cables
2. Connect the protective conductor bar inside the control cubicle with the circuit−breaker baseplate
3. In addition, connect the protective conductor bar for potential earthing with the building’s earthing system at two
points (16 mm2 copper rope)

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.46

3.4.4 SF6 air bushings

SF6 air bushings are connected to the steel reinforcements (5) in the floor underneath the GIS and to the ring earth
electrode (2). The sleeve bearings (4), if installed, shall be bridged using the shortest possible path with a minimum
of 16mm2copper rope (3, Figure3.42) in the contact areas of the GIS busducts.

For long busduct connections, the GIS enclosure has to be connected with all metal parts of the GIS that are being
passed in close proximity.

Connect all parts of the GIS installed outdoors to the external ring earth electrode (2) using the shortest possible
path (1,Figure3.42). In order to protect the following GIS components sufficiently against the intrusion of electro
magnetic waves, copper rope of 2x120 mm2 laid in parallel with a distance of approximately 100 mm shall be used
for such connections. This ensures a sufficiently low impedance of the connection.

Detail X
X

5 2

Figure 3.4-2: Earthing of SF6 air bushing

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.47

3.4.5 Surge arresters

Conventional surge arresters, that are directly linked to the SF6air bushings, must be connected to the external ring
earth electrode using the shortest possible route. Use a conductor with a cross−section specified by the supplier of
the surge arrester. If the specification of the supplier of the surge arrester is not available, a cross section of
120mm2 (copper rope) is assumed to be sufficient.

SF6insulated surge arresters are bolted to the GIS bay. In the base plate of the surge arrester are several tapped
holes M12 or M16 for the earthing connection. The base plate of the surge arrester shall be connected with theGIS
earthing by the shortest distance . Use a copper rope 1x 120 mm2.

3.4.6 Cable terminations

The cable terminations are the interface between GIS and cable system. The GIS provides only earthing points for
earthing of the metal part of the cable plug or the metal housing of an IEC cable termination. The earthing points
mentioned in this section are not capable to earth the cable sheaths. The cable sheaths shall be connected directly
to the earthing system of the substation. The earthing of power cables terminated on the GIS is projectspecific and
is provided and carried out by the cable supplier. The material must be provided by the cable supplier.

!HDG518633B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.48

3.5 Bay coupling 3.5
WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

INFORMATION The tightening torque for ungreased bolts is listed in chapter Installation in section
Installation of the GIS.

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.51

Each bay is mounted on a base frame in the factory. Depending on the size of the lineup and the type of floor,
there are two different methods of fixing the GIS:
− The circuit−breaker base plate is connected to the base frame by means of eight adjustment screws
− The circuit−breaker base plate is directly bolted to the base frame and leveled in the factory by means of fill plates

Before starting the installation check the levelness of the floor. Check the position and dimensions of the wall and
floor openings.

Position the first bay according to the layout drawing of the installation.

3.5.1 Fixing the base frame by means of adjustment screws

Align the first bay using a spirit level across the busbar flanges.

Adjust the first bay with the adjustment screws of the circuit breaker in a way that the maximum permissible floor
unevenness can be leveled out when installing the remaining feeder bays, and that perfect coupling of all bays is
possible.

3.5.2 Fixing the base frame by means of fill plates

If floor evenness is guaranteed (e. g. spacer bars), the leveled bays can be bolted directly to the base frame.

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.52

3.5.3 Coupling of bays

Preparation of the transversal installation unit between the bays to be coupled

The bays are filled with the transport gas N2 in the factory and closed with transport covers.
1. Release the transport gas N2
2. Loosen screws (2) of transport covers
3. Remove screws (2) and washers (3). They are not needed anymore
4. Keep washer (4) and sleeve (5) for later re−installation of the transversal installation unit
5. Remove transport cover (1)

3 4 5

2, 3

1 − Transport cover 4 − Washer

2 − Screw 5 − Sleeve
3 − Washer
Figure 3.5-1: Removal of transport cover

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.53

 6. Hold compensation unit (3) to prevent from falling
7. Loosen nut (5) and keep together with washer for later re−installation
8. Screw bolt (4) out of housing of compensation unit (3) and keep bolt for later re−installation
9. Remove assembly of compensation unit (3), counter nut (2) and long nut (1) and keep for later
re−installation
10. Loosen screw (9) slightly and move both parts of earthing bridge (8) together so that both parts remain together
11. Hold earthing bridge (8) to prevent from falling
12. Unscrew screw (7) and keep together with nut (6) for later re−installation
13. Remove earthing bridge (8) and keep for later re−installation

NOTICE Hazard Gas leakage.

Cause Gas leakage can occur if sealing surface of transversal

installation enclosure is damaged.
Action Remove high frequency contact ring before moving the
transversal installation enclosure.

14. Remove high frequency contact ring

15. Move the transversal installation enclosure (10) carefully into the busbar enclosure (11)

1 2 3

11

10

6
7
9 8

1 − Long nut 5 − Nut with washer 9 − Screw with nut and washer
2 − Counter nut 6 − Nut with washer 10 − Transversal installation
3 − Compensation unit 7 − Screw with washer enclosure
4 − Bolt 8 − Earthing bridge 11 − Busbar enclosure
Figure 3.5-2: Preparation of the transversal installation unit

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.54

Coupling of the bay
1. Position the bay to be connected in a distance 1000 mm + approx. 100 mm
2. Make sure that the busbar flanges to be connected are:
− parallel and levelled
− within the prescribed tolerances (see primary drawings)
3. Make sure that the axis of the conductors (2) and contacts (1) are centered
4. Insert o−ring into groove of insulator (3)
5. Move the bay to be connected to its final position. The correct bay width of 1000 mm is reached if the dimension
348 mm " 5 mm is adjusted. For details concerning that dimension refer to detail drawing Figure 3.5-4

1 2

348 mm 5 mm

1 − Contact
2 − Conductor
3 − Insulator
Figure 3.5-3: Positioning the new bay

348 mm 5 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 − Insulator 4 − Ring
2 − Transversal installation enclosure 5 − Ring
3 − Ring (optional for outdoor application) 6 − Flange of busbar enclosure
Figure 3.5-4: Detail drawing

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.55

Closing the transversal installation unit

The transversal installation unit can connect a flange distance between the adjacent bays of 348 mm " 5 mm.

NOTICE Hazard Gas leakage.

Cause Gas leakage can occur if sealing surface of transversal

installation enclosure is damaged. If the high frequency
contact ring is installed before moving the transversal in
sertion enclosure the sealing surface can be scratched.
Action Close transversal installation enclosure carefully before
installing the high frequency contact ring.

NOTICE Hazard Discharges during switching with fast transients.

Cause If high frequency contact ring is installed improperly dis

charges can occur during switching of disconnector due to
fast transients.
Action Install high frequency contact ring properly.

1. Close the transversal installation enclosure (1) to its final position. Take care that o−ring (10) is not damaged
(Figure 3.5-5)
2. Move ring (6) into its final position
3. Install high frequency contact ring (9) thoroughly into groove of ring (5)
4. Move ring (5) into its final position
In case of outdoor variant:
5. Move ring (4) carefully together with o−ring (8) into their final position
6. Check that dimension 348 mm " 5 mm is fulfilled (refer to detail drawing Figure 3.5-4)
7. Fix the transversal installation enclosure (1) temporarily to flange (3) at four points (2) with a nut
The temporary fixation (2) should be distributed evenly over the circumference. Two points are on the back
of the assembly and are not shown in the figure.
The flange of the transversal installation enclosure (2) and the flange (3) must be fixed in their final position
before the compensation units are re−installed. After the compensation units are re−installed the transversal
installation enclosure does not move anymore. If there was a gap between transversal installation enclo
sure(2) and flange (3) this gap could not be closed anymore. Any attempts to close the gap would dam
age the transversal installation enclosure.

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.56

 1 4 5 6 7

8 9 10
2

3 1
2

348 mm 5 mm

1 − Transversal installation enclosure 6 − Ring

2 − Temporary fixation 7 − Flange
3 − Flange 8 − O−ring (outdoor variant only)
4 − Ring (outdoor variant only) 9 − High frequency contact ring
5 − Ring 10 − O−ring
Figure 3.5-5: Closing the transversal installation enclosure

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.57

Fixing the compensations units (6) with bolt (8), washer (9) and nut (10) to the flange tightens the gas compartment
by pressing ring (7) onto the o−ring between transversal installation enclosure and the busbar enclosure. Work care
fully to avoid later leakage.

Install the compensation units (2) and earthing bridges (1) in the pattern shown in Figure3.56. Align the compensa
tion units in a way that the opening (3) of each compensation unit shows towards the floor to avoid the accumula
tion of liquids and dirt.

1 − Earthing bridge
2 − Compensation unit
3 − Opening of compensation unit
Figure 3.5-6: Position of compensation units and earthing bridges

1. Put washer (1) onto bolt (3)

2. Put sleeve (2) onto bolt (3)
3. Hold assembly of long nut (4), counter nut (5) and compensation unit (6) to its final position
4. Screw bolt (8) through the flange hole into compensation unit (6). Make sure that the bolt protrudes approxi-
mately 1 mm out of the thread in the compensation unit housing. Make sure that the bolt also protrudes suffi-
ciently on side of the nut. The protrusion there should be at least 2 mm
5. Put washer (9) onto bolt (8)
6. Tighten nut (10) at specified torque

6 1 mm 8  2 mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 − Washer 5 − Counter nut 8 − Bolt

2 − Sleeve 6 − Compensation unit 9 − Washer
3 − Bolt 7 − Ring 10 − Nut
4 − Long nut
Figure 3.5-7: Installation of compensation units

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.58

 7. Tighten long nut (1) at specified torque
8. Tighten counter nut (2) at specified torque

1 2

1 − Long nut
2 − Counter nut
Figure 3.5-8: Tightening long nut

9. Fix earthing bridge (3) to busbar enclosure flange

10. Tighten screw (5) with washer and nut (6) with washer at specified torque
11. Adjust length of earthing bridge (3)
12. Fix earthing bridge (3) to flange of new bay. Make sure that the parts of the earthing bridge are aligned in a way
that the two parts can be finally fixed without mechanical tension
13. Tighten nut (1) with washer at specified torque to bolt (2) of insulator
14. Tighten screw with washer and nut with washer (4) at specified torque

1 2 3 4 3 5 6

1 − Nut, washer 3 − Earthing bridge 5 − Screw, washer

2 − Bolt 4 − Screw, washers, nut 6 − Nut , washer
Figure 3.5-9: Installation of earthing bridge

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.59

Final work

Up to now all bays are coupled and their compensation units are blocked with blocking nut (1). The following work
steps are necessary to allow the compensation units compensating thermal dilatation.

NOTICE Hazard Mechanical overload of components within the busbar.

Cause If the blocking nut (1) is loosened without SF6 filling at fill
ing pressure the complete coordination of spring forces
within the compensation units fails resulting in mechanical
overload of components.
Action Do not loosen the blocking nuts (1) before the bays have
been filled with SF6 at filling pressure.

1. Fix the support structure of all bays to the building floor

a) Weld the steel support structure to the steel profiles in the floor
b) Cold galvanize the weld joints with zinc spray
...or
a) Drill holes in the floor and install injection anchors
b) Fix the bays to the injection anchors
2. Connect switchgear to the earthing grid of the building according to the earthing plan
3. Fill all bays with SF6 at filling pressure
4. Loosen blocking nuts (1) from all compensation units (3) within the installation
After loosening the blocking nut washer (2) is free. The washer can cause irritating noise when the bay is
energized.
5. Fix washer (2) at every compensation unit with a cable strap to prevent movement

1 2 3

1 − Blocking nut
2 − Washer
3 − Compensation unit
Figure 3.5-10: Loosening the blocking nut

1HDG518634B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Installation| 3.510

4 Commissioning 4

40
4.1 Tests prior to commissioning 4.1
This document describes the basic procedures for testing of the GIS at site prior to commissioning. These proce
dures are based on the following:
− IEC 62271203
− IEEE C37.122
− Experience from more than 10000 installed GIS bays
− Technical, commercial and practical aspects of the tests at site prior to commissioning

In most cases the shipping units delivered to site consist of complete bays or large assemblies. These shipping
units are subject to a complete factory test prior to delivery.

The purpose of the tests at site prior to commissioning is:

− To detect any rare possible damage or anomaly that may occur during transport
− To test the complete GIS installation after final assembly at site
− To ensure uninterrupted operation in service

The sequence of tests described in the following subclauses represents our standard sequence. For special condi
tions prevailing at site or practical reason this sequence may be modified by agreement between manufacturer and
user.

1HDG518640B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.11

 WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

INFORMATION The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 have to be
documented in the site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680 in section
SF6inventory.

INFORMATION All documents required for the tests prior to commissioning are listed in the site test
protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680.

4.1.1 Tools for on−site tests

In addition to the test equipment recommended in Table4.11 (extract), a standard tool set is required.
Table4.11: Recommended test equipment

Test Test tool Manufacturer

Voltage drop MicroOhmmeter, range 0 − 600 A Programma

Gas tightness Leakage Detector ISM

Dew point Hygrometer MBW Elektronik AG

Gas density relays Gas density relay tester DILO

Devices Metrahit Gossen Metrawatt

Test adapter ABB

Resonancetest set of variable frequency

Type WRV 1.5/460 A
Highvoltage test of the Test voltage 460 kV HIGHVOLT
main current path Frequency range 50 − 250 Hz (can be ordered through ABB:
Rated current 1.5AKB15min 1HDS112203R0001
1.0AKB60min WZNr. 37/77)
Rated inductivity appr. 720 H
Capacitive load range 0.6 − 14 nF

INFORMATION Suitable test devices that are not listed above may be used alternatively.

1HDG518640B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.12

4.1.2 Inspection after transport
Check the GIS for completeness, obvious transport damage etc. well before starting the installation.

INFORMATION A form for the transport inspection is included in chapter Delivery in section Re
ceiving inspection.

4.1.3 Measurement of voltage drop

All contact connections assembled at site are subject to a measurement of the voltage drop.

The measurement of the voltage drop is performed on two different locations with q100 A supplied from a suitable
battery or DC supply source. Both test locations are connected to the test device. The actual measurement is
effective on the connecting lead (not on the connection to the measuring location).

The resistance is calculated using the following formula:

R+U
I with: R =resistance
U =voltage drop
I =current

In case of a new installation, the voltage drop is measured on complete shipping units. The values of the shipping
units can be found in the supplied routine test protocols. If these are not available the default values are specified in
chapter Modules for each module in its specific section.

The measuring points shall be as close as possible to the castin contacts of the insulators for all measurements.

4.1.4 Check of gas density monitors / gas density sensors

The gas density monitors/sensors are checked before their installation on the GIS.

INFORMATION The test of the gas density monitors/sensors is to be documented in the site test
protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680 in section Gas density monitor resp. Gas
density sensor.

4.1.5 Check of gas tightness

The following components shall be subjected to a gas tightness test:
− All flange connections assembled at site
− All gas couplings and connections assembled at site

All other components are tested in the factory prior to delivery.

INFORMATION The test for gas tightness at site prior to commissioning shall be documented in the
site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680.

1HDG518640B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.13

4.1.6 Dew point measurement
The moisture content of the gas is measured in all gas compartments.

The dew point measurement is performed once the gas compartments have been filled and pressurized with SF6.
In order to allow an equalization between the residual moisture of the GIS enclosure material and the dry SF6 filling,
this measurement should not be carried out immediately after the filling. The permissible values and the procedures
associated with the dew point measurement are listed in chapter Gas−insulated switchgear in section Gas
handling and in section Sulphur hexafluoride.

INFORMATION The dew point measurement prior to commissioning shall be documented in the
site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680.

4.1.7 Visual inspection

INFORMATION Check the consistency between the name plates on the equipment and the circuit
diagram and the respective gas scheme drawings. Details are included in the site
test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680:

− Earthing
− Voltage Transformer
− Current Transformer
− Surge Arrester
− Amount of filled SF6

INFORMATION The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 shall be do
cumented in the site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680 in section
SF6inventory.

1HDG518640B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.14

4.1.8 Mechanical functional tests of the switching devices
All switching devices shall be subjected to a final mechanical functional test at site. Details are included in the on
site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680:
− Circuit−breaker
− Disconnector/earthing switch
− Make−proof earthing switch

NOTICE Hazard Damage to the interrupting chamber.

Cause If pressure in gas compartment is below minimum func

tional pressure, the mechanical damping of the interrupting
chamber might be insufficient.
Action Fill the gas compartment at least at minimum functional
pressure before executing a switching operation

4.1.9 On−site test of the local control cubicle

INFORMATION The test of the local control cubicle prior to commissioning is described in site test
protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680; the test shall be documented in the men
tioned protocol.

1HDG518640B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.15

4.2 High voltage test of the main circuits 4.2
Prior to commissioning the GIS is subject to a high voltage test. The test is performed with a resonance test set
with variable frequency. The aim of this test is to detect any dielectric irregularities. Such irregularities can have their
origin in incorrect assembly, transport damage, particles etc.

This test of one minute duration has been proven over many years of practical application. The subsequent suc
cessful energizations of the tested GIS show that this test guarantees a safe and reliable operation of the GIS.

The high voltage test of the GIS is usually performed before the installation of the power cables. In case the power
cables have already been installed prior to the high voltage test, they have to be disconnected for the duration of
the test. The cables can be disconnected from the GIS by opening the line disconnector.

Once the power cables have been installed and connected to the GIS, they are high voltage tested; usually this test
is performed by the cable manufacturer.

4.2.1 Performance of the test

Safety information

The work described in this chapter requires special skills to avoid injury to people and to avoid damage to the
equipment. Only personnel which received the authorization from ABB shall carry out the described work.

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.21

 WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

INFORMATION The tightening torque for ungreased bolts is listed in chapter Installation in section
Installation of the GIS.

Test voltages

The high voltage test of the main circuits will be performed after all installation work has been completed. If a break
down occurs, the test has to be repeated.

The AC test voltages are listed in Table4.21. The table contains the consolidated values of IEC and ANSI.

INFORMATION The test shall be performed at filling pressure.

The high voltage commissioning test shall be documented in the on site test proto
col Commissioning 1HDG518680.

Perform the test in the following sequence:

1. Raise the test voltage at approximately 1 kV/s up to the test voltage listed in Table4.21 and apply for one
minute
2. Lower the test voltage at approximately 1 kV/s to zero

Table4.21: Test voltages

Rated values 72,5 kV 100 kV 123 kV 145 kV

Power frequency voltage used for factory test

140 kV 185 kV 230 kV 275 kV
(Duration of application: 1 min)

Power frequency voltage used for on−site test

112 kV 148 kV 184 kV 220 kV
(Duration of application: 1 min)

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.22

Test capacitances

The size of the GIS section which can be put under test at the same time is determined by the total capacitance of
the GIS section. The total capacitance of a GIS section can be estimated by adding the capacitance values of com
plete GIS bays and of long busducts. The result obtained is the capacitance load per phase with the other two
phases being earthed through their connection to the GIS enclosure.

A GIS bay contributes a capacitance of approximately 700 pF to the total capacitance. Longer busduct modules
can be calculated with a capacitance value of 30 pF/m.

The required power of a test transformer depends on the capacitance of the GIS modules. Test transformers are
available within the range of 45 kVA to 1300 kVA.
The test burden can be determined using the following formula:
Q=U2 x  x Cges
Q=test burden (power)
U=test voltage

w + 2·p·f
1000
f=frequency
Cges=sum of all the modules’ capacitances incl. insulators

The test burden is determined as an equation in units with:

f = 50 Hz:Q [VA] = U2 [kV] x 0,31 x Cges [nF]
f = 60 Hz:Q [VA] = U2 [kV] x 0,38 x Cges [nF]

If the test is performed with a resonance test set with variable frequency, the selected frequency of the resonance
test set has to be used in the equation above.

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.23

High−voltage test at partly energized installations

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to internal arc.

Cause The test voltage and the power system voltage may not be
in phase so that the voltage difference across the discon
nector gap may excess the rated values. Applying test volt
age to one side of a disconnector with the other side ener
gized to the power system can result in a flashover with
subsequent internal arc.
Action Do not apply test voltage to a switchgear section which is
separated from the energized part only by one disconnec
tor. Both sections shall be separated by two disconnectors
with the section between earthed.

Take the following precautions (see Figure4.21) if a voltage test is performed at installations which contain ener
gized sections:
1. To avoid a flashover between the section under high−voltage test (2) and the section energized to the
power system(4) two disconnectors (6) and (7) shall separate the two sections
2. The section between the disconnectors shall be earthed (3)

If a flashover in disconnector gap (6) to earth (3) occured the energized part of the installation (4) would not be af
fected because it is separated by the additional disconnector (7).

2 3 4 5

6 7

1 − Test voltage source 5 − Power system

2 − Switchgear section under high−voltage test 6 − Disconnector
3 − Earthed section between disconnectors 7 − Disconnector
4 − Switchgear section energized to power system
Figure4.21: High−voltage test at partly energized installation

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.24

4.2.2 Connection of the test set
Connection to busbar end for high voltage test of GIS

Usually a portable high voltage resonance test set is used (Figure4.22). The test reactor (5) and test capacitor (6) is
connected to the phases to be tested by a test adapter (3, 4) and a flange adapter (2). The phase to be tested can
be selected on the test adapter with switch (3), while the other two phases are earthed.

The installation of the test set−up to the busbar module is the best position to perform a high−voltage test on site.
The complete busbar as well as the disconnector gaps and the main current path of the bays can be tested from
this position.

3
1

3
5, 6
2

4
5

1 − Busbar module 3 − Test adapter with switches 5 − Reactor

2 − Adapter 735/520 module 4 − Test adapter 6 − Capacitor
Figure4.22: Encapsulated high voltage resonance test set connected to end of busbar

1. De−energize and earth complete switchgear section

2. Reduce gas pressure in busbar module (1) to maintenance pressure
3. Remove covers from busbar module (1)
4. Install adapter 735/520 module (2) to busbar module (1)
5. Install test adapter with switches (3) and test adapter (4)
6. Install reactor (5) and capacitor (6)
7. Evacuate gas compartments of test adapters, which are filled with atmospheric air, and fill with SF6 at fill
ing pressure
8. Fill gas compartments with reduced gas pressure with SF6 at filling pressure
9. Carry out high−voltage test

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.25

Alternatively a test bushing can be connected to the busbar end (Figure4.23). In case of restricted space the test
bushing can be positioned in different directions. The test voltage is fed through the test bushing.

5 3
1

2
4
1
5

1 − Busbar module 3 − Test adapter with switches 5 − Test bushing

2 − Adapter 735/520 module 4 − Test adapter
Figure4.23: Test bushing connected to end of busbar

1. De−energize and earth complete switchgear section

2. Reduce gas pressure in busbar module (1) to maintenance pressure
3. Remove covers from busbar module (1)
4. Install adapter 735/520 module (2) to busbar module (1)
5. Install test adapter with switches (3) and test adapter (4)
6. Install test bushing (5)
7. Evacuate gas compartments of test adapters, which are filled with atmospheric air, and fill with SF6 at fill
ing pressure
8. Fill gas compartments with reduced gas pressure with SF6 at filling pressure
9. Install test voltage source to test bushing
10. Carry out high−voltage test

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.26

High voltage cable test

For testing of the cable it is strongly recommended to use a resonance test setup. The test voltage is fed into the
GIS via a test bushing (Figure4.24).

In case the cable test is planned with a DC voltage source, the combined exit disconnector/earthing switch (5) shall
be in position earthing switch CLOSED. A DC cable test is only admissible in this way if the exit disconnector/earth
ing switch module (5) and the cable termination (6) are the only modules installed at the exit. If additional modules
exist, which would be put under DC voltage, contact the GIS manufacturer before testing. This will prevent any
damage because the GIS is not designed to withstand DC voltages in general.

For cable testing a test−adapter (2, 3) with test bushing (1) can be installed at the exit disconnector/earthing switch
module (5). The adapter 735/520 module (4) is installed between test adapter and exit disconnector/earthing switch
module to fit the flange patterns.

The test voltage can be fed into the high−voltage cable (6) through the test bushing (1). The combined exit discon
nector/earthing switch with earthing switch in position CLOSED prevents any effects of the test voltage on the rest
of the bay. In case of restricted space the orientation of the test bushing can be changed by using additional 90
degree modules.

1 3
5

5
6

1 − Test bushing 4 − Adapter 735/520 module 6 − Cable termination

2 − Test adapter 5 − Exit disconnector/earthing
3 − Test adapter with switches switch module
Figure4.24: Test of high voltage cable

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.27

 1. De−energize and earth complete bay
2. Do necessary gas handling in exit disconnector/earthing switch module (5)
If a barrier insulator remains at the flange of the exit disconnector/earthing switch module:
− Reduce gas pressure to maintenance pressure
If the exit disconnector/earthing switch module has to be opened:
− Evacuate exit disconnector/earthing switch module and let atmospheric air in
3. Remove covers from exit disconnector/earthing switch module (5)
If a voltage transformer or surge arrester is installed on that place dismount this component instead.
4. Install phase adapter module (4) to exit disconnector/earthing switch module (5)
5. Install test adapter with switches (3) and test adapter (2)
6. Install test bushing (1)
7. Evacuate gas compartments, which are filled with air at atmospheric pressure, and fill with SF6 at filling
pressure
8. Fill gas compartments with reduced gas pressure with SF6 at filling pressure
9. Install test voltage source to test bushing
10. Carry out high−voltage test

1HDG518641 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Commissioning| 4.28

5 Maintenance 5

50
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS
Inspection
5.1
Functional and visual inspections are carried out at 8year intervals. The gas compartments are not opened for such
inspections.

Maintenance

The individual switchgears have to be controlled after a certian number of operations, and their contacts are to be
overhauled depending on the current loads imposed. Such an overhaul requires opening the respective gas com
partment. For the duration of the maintenance the installation has to be partly taken out of service.

We recommend calling in ABB service for all work involving the interior parts of the switchgear.

INFORMATION Please find our contact address in the product manual in chapter Gasinsulated
switchgear in section Contact.

INFORMATION Specific information about maintenance can be found in the chapter Modules.

1HDG518650A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.11

Regulations for overhaul and maintenance

INFORMATION Orings

All Orings which have been removed during maintenance work shall be replaced
by new ones.

INFORMATION Adsorber pack

All adsorber packs which have been removed during maintenance work shall be
replaced by new ones.

INFORMATION Tightening torques for screws

The tightening torques for nongreased bolts in threads and holes are listed in
chapter Installation in section Installation of the GIS in table Tightening torques
for nongreased bolts.

INFORMATION Tightening torques for gas valves

The tightening torque for the coupling nut at the gas valve 1HDG111031
(mounting a gas density monitor, a tightening nut or an adapter) are 50 Nm.
Thecoupling nuts (M30x2) are not greased.

1HDG518650A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.12

5.2 Adsorber pack (size 114) 5.2
WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the pressure relief device. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS in table Tightening torques for non−greased screws.

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.21

5.2.1 Functional description
The SF6 gas adsorber pack is placed in the pressure relief opening of the enclosure. It fits into the opening of the
pressure relief device flange and is hold there in its position.

For replacement of the adsorber pack the gas compartment must be opened. So the gas compartment must be
evacuated first. Then the pressure must be equalized with atmosphere. After dismounting the bursting disk the ad
sorber pack can be replaced.

The working procedures differ depending on the variant of the pressure relief device. The following variants have to
be considered:
− Pressure relief device for indoor GIS (Figure5.21)
− Pressure relief device for outdoor GIS (Figure5.22)

Take the following precautions when dismounting the bursting disk and replacing the adsorber pack:

Bursting disk
− Treat carefully
− Scratches on and damage of the bursting disk are not permissible

Adsorber pack
− Take care that adsorber material is dry when inserting a new adsorber pack
− Check the humidity indicator (accompanies the adsorber material)
− Observe the maximum installation time (2h) until the gas compartment must be filled with N2 or SF6
− This is valid for all climatic conditions except rain or fog when the adsorber material can get in contact to
water

NOTICE Hazard Loss of the insulating properties of SF6.

Cause If adsorber pack is replaced in rainy or foggy environment

the moisture content of the SF6 can exceed the specifica
tion.
Action Replace the adsorber pack in a dry environment.

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.22

5.2.2 Replacement of the adsorber pack (indoor variant)
Removing the old adsorber pack
1. De−energize and earth relevant module
2. Evacuate the module and equalize pressure with atmosphere
3. Unscrew screws (11) and keep together with the washers for re−installation
4. Remove holder strip (9) and cover (8) and keep for re−installation
5. Keep nameplate (10) and washers (7) for re−installation
6. Unscrew screws (6) and keep together with the washers for re−installation
7. Remove pressing ring (5) and keep for re−installation
8. Remove bursting disk (4) carefully and store in a safe location for re−installation
9. Remove o−ring (3) and dispose off
10. Remove adsorber pack (2) and dispose off

11
10

1 − Pressure relief device flange 5 − Pressing ring 9 − Holder strip

2 − Adsorber pack 6 − Screws with washers 10 − Nameplate
3 − O−ring 7 − Washers 11 − Screws with washers
4 − Bursting disk 8 − Cover
Figure5.21: Adsorber pack with pressure relief device (indoor)

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.23

Installation of new adsorber pack
1. Insert new adsorber pack (2) centrically into flange (1)
2. Insert new o−ring (3)
3. Check bursting disk for damage and replace bursting disk if necessary
4. Insert bursting disk (4) carefully
5. Put pressing ring (5) on top of flange (1)
6. Fix pressing ring (5) with screws and washers (6). Fasten the screws in a crosslike manner at specified
torque
7. Put washers (7) around boreholes for screws (11)
8. Put cover (8) onto washers (7)
9. Put holder strip (9) onto cover
10. Fix holder strip (9) with screws and washers (11).
Fix the nameplate (10) of the bursting disk underneath one screw.
11. Tighten screws (11) at specified torque
12. Do necessary gas handling and gas leakage test
13. Re−energize module

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.24

5.2.3 Replacement of the adsorber pack (outdoor variant)
Removing the old adsorber pack
1. De−energize and earth relevant module
2. Evacuate the module and equalize pressure with atmosphere
3. Unscrew screws (7) and keep together with the washers for re−installation
4. Remove pressing ring with outdoor cover (6) and keep for re−installation
5. Keep nameplate (8) for re−installation
6. Remove o−ring (5) and dispose off
7. Remove bursting disk (4) carefully and store in a safe location for re−installation
8. Remove o−ring (3) and dispose off
9. Remove adsorber pack (2) and dispose off

1 − Pressure relief device flange 5 − O−ring 7 − Screws with washers

2 − Adsorber pack 6 − Pressing ring with outdoor 8 − Nameplate
3 − O−ring cover
4 − Bursting disk
Figure5.22: Adsorber pack with pressure relief device (outdoor)

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.25

Installation of new adsorber pack
1. Insert new adsorber pack (2) centrically into flange (1)
2. Insert new o−ring (3)
3. Check bursting disk for damage and replace bursting disk if necessary
4. Insert bursting disk (4) carefully
5. Insert new o−ring (5)
6. Put pressing ring with outdoor cover (6) on top of flange (1)
7. Fix nameplate (8) of the bursting disk underneath one screw (7)
8. Fix pressing ring with outdoor cover (6) with screws and washers (7). Fasten the screws in a crosslike
manner at specified torque
9. Do necessary gas handling and gas leakage test
10. Re−energize module

1HDG518654B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.26

5.3 Disposal of GIS components 5.3
5.3.1 General

GIS is environmentalfriendly. After end of life of a GIS (estimated to 30 − 50 years) the GIS components shall be
disposed. Contact your local ABBservice department because regulations for disposal can differ depending on the
country. The local ABB service department will propose a suitable disposal concept for your GIS components.

5.3.2 Information on disposal

All GIS components can be disposed of in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations and in an environ
mentally friendly way. The disposed component parts can be utilized as mixed or pure scrap. The scrap contains
the following material, which can all be considered as nonhazardous:
− Metals (aluminium, ferrous and non-ferrous metals)
− Porcelain and ceramics
− Plastics (PA / PTFE / silicon)
− Cast resin
− Filter material (AL2O3)
− Electronic components
− Oil and grease
− Acrylic varnish

1HDG518655 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.31

The SF6 gas has to be removed with the appropriate equipment (e .g. DILO) and can be recycled after filtering and
drying. Open gas compartments might contain solid SF6 decomposition products generated during switching op
erations. All gaseous decomposition products are bound in the filtering material.

CAUTION Hazard Irritation of skin, eyes or mucous membranes.

Cause GIS is using SF6 as an insulating and arc quenching

medium. During operation of the GIS SF6 can generate
decomposition products which are bound in the filter
material. These decomposition products can irritate skin,
eyes or mucous membranes.
Action Observe the safety measures specified in chapter Gas−in
sulated switchgear in sections Gashandling and Sulphur
hexafluoride. Make sure to comply with all relevant local
regulations.

INFORMATION The return of SF6 is contractually regulated with the SF6 suppliers. ABB will guaran
tee the return of SF6 gas in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Prior to disposal of the components, the hydraulic oil contained in the operating mechanism of the circuit breaker
has to be removed and disposed of separately. Observe the local regulations with respect to hydraulic oil.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to sudden release of the disk
spring column tension.
Cause The disk spring column of the circuit−breaker operating
mechanism is mechanically precharged with high tension
forces. Special tools and skills are needed to release the
tension of the disk spring column safely.
Action Do not disassemble the circuit−breaker operating mecha
nism. Only authorized personnel is allowed to disassemble
the disk spring column of the circuit−breaker operating
mechanism according to ABB procedure and safety regula
tions. Contact the local ABB service representative.

5.3.3 Information about material content of GIS components

The material content of each GIS component is listed in chapter Modules in the section for each module as part of
the technical data.

1HDG518655 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Maintenance| 5.32

6 ControlCubicle 6

60
6.1 Description 6.1
6.1.1 General
Control cubicles are available as integrated cubicles which are installed to the busbar of the bay or as separate cu
bicles. The control cubicles are available for indoor and outdoor application.

Painting

The control cubicles are dependant from supplier varnished wet or coated with powder. If they are coated with
powder, the desired color can be applied with another wet varnishing. To every wet varnish a fungicide is added. All
indoor control cubicles are completely galvanised.
− Thickness of dry film 80 m
− Adhesive strength acc. to DINENISO2409 <= Gt 1
− Degree of hardness acc. to ISO2815
− Temperature resistance 150 °C permanent load
− Degree of brilliance satinfrosted <60° 1530%
− Standard colors: RAL 5010 gentianblue

Dimensional accuracy
− According to DIN ISO 2768 T1, T2 medium

Stability
− Complete cubicle:
After mounting on site, alignment and fixing of the cubicles the sawtooth curve of the top edge of the
door exceeds not more than 3 mm.
− Doors:
Designed for an additional load of 100 kg in the center of gravity of the door
− Swing frame:
Designed for an additional load of 200 kg

Seismic withstand capability acc. to IEC 6006833

This standard includes strength specifications acc. to class AG5 with 5 m/s2 resp. in the application class III with
15m/s2 for the acceleration of decks.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.11

Protective earthing cubicle parts

All parts of the control cubicle are connected in a conductive way with each other. Varnished parts are earthed on
the screwing with a minimum of two diametral placed contact washers.

The doors are connected to the cubicle with two flexible CUstrips top and bottom with a minimum of 4 mm2.

The swing frame ist connected to the cubicle with two flexible CUstrips top and bottom with a minimum of
16mm2.

Protective earthing cubicle

From the earthing bar to the earthing of the building.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.12

6.1.2 Integrated control cubicle
Cubicle variants

The following cubicle variants are available:

Table6.11: Variants of integrated control cubicles

Cubicle variant Height a in mm Width b in mm Depth c in mm

For installation to ELK04, 145 kV 1000 995 700

For installation to ELK04, 170 kV 2000 800 600

Figure6.11: Integrated control cubicle for installation to ELK04, 145 kV

Control panel Glas insert

Figure6.12: Integrated control cubicle for ELK04, 170 kV

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.13

Cubicle

Steel body, visible surfaces painted, side and rear walls can be removed from outside, removable lifting eyes, frame
design, galvanised frame not painted

Cubicle fixation

With clamps at rear U or L profiles

Door

Door with glass insert or control panel, door opening 170°

Swift frame (option)

for application of 19" devices, opening angle 170°, usually fixation opposite to door fixation, fixable at 170°,
18height units (HU) for cubicle height 1000mm, 39HU for cubicle height 2000mm, locking with swifting handle

Completion

Door fixation left is standard, right as option, Tiefen profiles right and left for fixation of vertical terminal blocks

Cable fixation profile on left side with protective earth bar above, completion with wiring frame

Protective earthing bar, cable fixation profiles in cubicles at 520mm busbar only left, in cubicles at 735mm busbar
right and left

Fixation of swift frame in cubicles at 520mm busbar right only

Bottom opening in cubicle at 520mm busbar left only, in cubicle at 735mm on both sides

11 openings for plugs at maximum

Bottom plate

External cables are feed through openings with canted edges in bottom plate, can be closed with sliding canted
plate. Sliding with 5 cm, sealing usually with mounting foam on site

Openings for plugs and cable glands in rear wall (busbar 520mm), in top and side wall (busbar 735mm)

Fixed bottom plate with cable glands as option

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.14

6.1.3 Separate control cubicle
Cubicle variants

The following cubicle variants are available:

Table6.12: Variants of separate control cubicles

Cubicle variants Height a in mm Width b in mm Depth c in mm

2000 800 600

2000 800 800

Separate 2000 1000 600

control cubicle
2000 1000 800

2000 1200 600

2000 1200 800

Separate
control cubicle 1850 800 600
outdoor application

Control panel Glass insert

Control panel Glass insert

Figure6.13: Typical variants separate control cubicles

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.15

Figure6.14: Separate control cubicle (Outdoor application)

Fixation points

Four screw connections to floor

Cubicle

Door with glass insert or control panel, removable lifting eyes, frame design, galvanised, not painted, side and rear
walls removable from outside, visible surfaces painted

Erection

Usually opposite of GIS, cubicle width corresponds to GIS bay width, adjacent cubicles with inner side walls as
partition with openings for ring wiring cable duct

Door

Door with glass insert or control panel, door opening angle 170°

Swift frame (option)

for application of 19" devices, opening angle 170° fixation usually opposite of door, opening fixation at 170°,
39heigth units (HU), closing with swiftable handle

Variant for outdoor application

With base frame 300 mm

With swift frame only

Fixation points: Two screwing connection to floor

External cable through bottom plate, througth three openings arranged left, in the middle and right with canted
edges, can be closed with sliding canted plateds, sliding range 5 cm, sealing with mounting foam on site. Alterna
tively fixed bottom plate with cable glands unless for system cables with heavy plugs.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.16

6.1.4 Variant for indoor application
Material, protection against corrosion
− Cubicle frame of separate cubicles:
sendzimir galvanisation, material thickness 2 mm
− Outer plates:
painted, material thickness 2 mm
− Inner partition plates of separate cubicles:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, material thickness 2 mm
− Inner plated, bottom plates etc.:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, material thickness 2 mm
− Swift frame:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, steel sheet
− Hinges, lock, screws etc.:
protection against corrosion

Galvanisation
− Galvanisation:
Outer layer thickness: Min. 12 m,
Inner layer thickness: Min. 8 m.
− Sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating:
Layer thickness on both sides: Min. 12 m.

Cold galvanisation only on cutting edges and for repair purposes.

Degree of protection according to IEC 60529

− IP41, design allows degrees of protection up to IP54

6.1.5 Variant for outdoor application

Material, protection against corrosion

Stainless steel

Degree of protection according to IEC 60529

− IP54 − (with roof)

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.17

6.1.6 Wiring system
General

For having enough mounting space with integrated control cubicles for all required devices a special mounting and
wiring system is used.

Mounting

The wiring system consists of prefabricated parts which are mounted to a wiring frame. The frame mainly is made
of vertical bearing rail on the sides, horizontal mounting bars, mounting straps and wiring profiles. Thisframe re
places the backside mounting plate. The mounting bars on the front side are elaborated according to the DIN
mounting plates. Here are the single devices snapped on. Single vertical positioned mounting bars on the side of
the cubicle are provided for mounting of terminal bars. In the wiring frame distributed on the height some single hor
izontal covers intentionally are carried out a bit larger for being able to grip behind the frame.

Wiring

For this wiring system the wiring is established in the back area. The wiring is totally accessible from the front.

Advantages
− Because of the establishment of wiring in the back area, cable channels are not required. With this technic
it’s possible to reduce the volume of the control cubicle compared to a free standing type about approx.
45 %.
− Because of the loose distribution of the wiring over the complete back side of the control cubicle and divi
sion of wiring and device area the air ciculation is improved, a good heat emission is given. Special hot
spots as it happens in filledup cable channels are avoided.
− A fast and uncomplicated accessibility is given for refinished wiring or changes. There is always enough
space in the wiring area for additional wiring.
− In case of a faulty device the device may be changed immediately and servicefriendly because the single
wirings for the device connections are passed from behind to front via special supporting cams. The con
necting wires stay because of the cams in position and make any confusion impossible.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.18

6.1.7 Power demand
The power demand per bay is subject to the type of control technology and switchgear.

Table6.13 shows the consumption values to be considered for a typical bay (double busbar with circuit breaker,
makeproof earthing switch and three disconnector / earthing switches).

It has to be distinguished between the following types of consumers respectively loads:

Permanent loads

AC
− Cubicle lighting (with open cubicle door)
− Heater for control cubicle
− Heater for operating mechanisms (depends on the control voltage:
from 60 VAC to 125 VAC / up to 250 VAC optional)
− MCBs for ACcircuits

DC
− Alarm annunciators (max. at lamp test)
− Position indicators
− Auxiliary relays
− Contactors CB control
− Bay control unit REF54x/REC6xx
− MCBs for DCcircuits

Short time load, 30 sec.  1 sec.

DC
− Hydraulic pump CB, 24 sec.
− Motors for disconnector / earthing switch, 1 sec.
− Interlocking solenoid disconnector / earthing switch, 1 sec.

For the max. power demand sum only one drive and interlocking solenoid together with the hydraulic pump func
tion is relevant at the same time.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.19

Dynamic peak load, < 1 sec.
− DC
Switchon peak trip / close coils circuit breaker, 20 ms

Starting current
− Hydraulic pump , 50 ms
− Operating mechanism motors for disconnector / earthing switch, 50 ms

For the max. power demand sum only the hydraulic pump and one operating mechanism motor is relevant at the
same time.

Temporarely load
− AC
Panel socket outlet

Simultaneity

For the calculation of simultaneityfactors it has to be considered, that

− a busbar protection can trip all circuit breakers simultaneously.
− the hydraulic pump of circuit breaker will start to run only after an ONcommand or subject to the position
of the spring travel monitoring level to avoid simultaneous start of all circuit breaker pumps and hereby
high loads.
− under normal conditions only one operating mechanism motor will run at a certain time in one bay (double
command blocking)

Protection relays

The power demand of possibly built in protection relays strongly depends on the type and make of the relay and
may vary considerably. Therefore this demand is not taken under consideration in the table for the typical power
demand.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.110

Table6.13: Power demand control cubicle

Conventional SCADA systems SCADA systems

control without monitoring with monitoring

Lighting 40 W 40 W 40 W

Cubicle heating 75 W 75 W 75 W

Operating mechanism heating 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W

MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W

Sum AC
286 W / 306 W 286 W / 306 W 286 W / 306 W
Permanent load

Alarm annunciator 10 W − −

Position indicators 8W − −

Auxiliary relais 15 W − −

Contactors circuit breaker control 21 W 21 W 21 W

Monitoring − − 50 W

Bay control unit − 60 W 60 W

MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W

Sum DC
56 W 83 W 133 W
Permanent load

Hydraulic pump 660 W 660 W 660 W

Operating mechanism motor 200 W 200 W 200 W

Interlocking solenoid 30 W 30 W 30 W

Sum DC
890 W 890 W 890 W
Short time load

Trip coil I circuit breaker,

300 W 300 W 300 W
L/R = 40ms

Trip coil II circuit breaker,

300 W 300 W 300 W
L/R = 40ms

Hydraulic pump,
660 W 660 W 660 W
IA/IN=4

Operating mechanism motor,

300 W 300 W 300 W
IA/IN=7

Sum DC
1560 W 1560 W 1560 W
Starting load

Socket outlet 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W

Sum AC
2300 W 2300 W 2300 W
Time to time load

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.111

6.1.8 Heat balance
Installed power losses

The total power consumption of a local control cubicle includes supplying different cubicleexternal components,
which are not to be considered for a rating. Furthermore single consumers don’t have any influence to the heat
emission during permanent operation.

Therefore the following positions of electrical power may be excluded for the calculation of the installed heating
power in the control cubicle:

AC
− Light: Only at open door
− Anticondensation heaters of the local control cabinet:
Controlled by thermostat (standard) and hygrostat (optional)
− Anticondensation heaters of the operating mechanisms: External load
− Socket: External load

DC
− Relays circuit breaker supervision: External load
− All shorttime and peak loads: External load

With this the maximum heating efficiency in worst case is calculated (under the assumption electric power equals
heating efficiency) from the components micro circuit breaker and computing assembly (Table6.14).

With this a sum of 38 W as installed power loss results for a control cubicle with one computing assembly of the
type REC650, for REC670 a sum of 63W is calculated and 33 W with a combined control and protection unit type
REF542plus.

For further computing assemblies corresponding power losses have to be added, a fan is not needed.

The internal consumption of eventually buildin protection relays is dependant of the type of relay used and may
differ extremely. For this reason this is not mentioned in the typical overview.
Table6.14: Power loss

Conventional SCADA systems

control
REF542plus REC650 REC670

MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W 1W

Sum AC permanent load 1W 1W 1W 1W

Alarm annunciator 10 W − − −

Position indicators 8W − − −

Auxiliary relais 15 W − − −

Bay control unit − 30 W 35 W 60 W

MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W 2W

Sum DC permanent load 35 W 32 W 37 W 62 W

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.112

Radiating power loss

For a local control cubicle in steel plate design the power loss via the radiation on the surface is determined in
dependance of different agreements.

Determining factors are the ambient temperature and the maximum permissible inner temperature for the cubicle.

Depending on the cubicle variant the power loss via radioation differs. The following values apply:
Table6.15: Radiating power loss

Power loss via radiation in W

Cubicle variant Width in mm
Calculated Design value

Integrated control cubicle (ELK04/735) 800 430 350

Integrated control cubicle(ELK04/520) up to 995 260 200

Separate control cubicle 1200 460 400

Separate control cubicle up to 1000 340 280

Separate control cubicle (outdoor) 800 not known not known

Air conditioning measures

The natural power dissipation via the surface is sufficient for one installed bay control unit plus one protection relais.

In case additional devices are implemented forced cooling might become necessary.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.113

6.1.9 Delivery
Inspection of delivered equipment

When the equipment arrives at the construction site, please check whether your equipment is complete and
whether it has been damaged during shipping. If damage is found, determine the extent and cause of damage and
the person responsible and compile a damage report.

Intermediate storage

If the control cubicles are not mounted immediately after they have been delivered to the construction site, they
must be stored temporarily in a dry, dustfree place.

Permissible temperature range for storage site:

− Dry air conditions (max. 40 %) : −40 °C to +55 °C
− Damp air conditions −25 °C to +40 °C

Packaging which has been opened for check purpose of the delivered equipment must then be carefully resealed.

NOTICE Hazard Danger of buildup of condensation water.

Cause If the control cubicles are unpacked without switching on

the cubicle heating, condensation water can buildup.
Action When the control cubicles are unpacked, the cubicle heat
ing must be switched on without delay in order to prevent
the buildup of condensation water.

NOTICE Hazard Damage of painted surface.

Cause By means of adhesives or by removing adhesive strips the

painted surface can be damaged.
Action Do not affix labels to the painted surfaces of control cubi
cles.

Condition of switchgear building

Before mounting work begins, the switchgear building in which the control cubicles are to be mounted must be
completed to such an extent that no further damage resulting from damp or dirt can arise.

Requirements for the GIS building

− Windows and doors must be fitted
− Walls and ceilings must be cleaned, painted and dry
− Subframes, cable ducts and floor openings must be provided in accordance with the constructional draw
ings and designed with the correct dimensions
− No further work which creates dust and dirt shall be carried out once the control cubicles have been
mounted

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.114

6.1.10 Mounting
Installation of bayintegrated control cubicles

The bayintegrated control cubicle is generally preassembled to the bay. The back side of the cubicle is locked in
the transportation position by four clamps and has to be set up if necessary into its final position. The following
steps must be observed:

Installation of control cubicle in front of busbars

INFORMATION The control cubicle is in elevated transport position and has to be lowered to its
final position.

1. Put a jacklift under the control cubicle, raise the forks (place squared beams underneath as required) and
take up the load without lifting the control cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the back side of the control cubicle
3. Lower the control cubicle to a final height of 80 mm (specify optimum height, guard of density sensor)
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution: In doing so, always retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the control cubicle has been lowered, tighten the four clamps and remove the jacklift
5. Connect optical waveguides: The mounting of the optical waveguides is described in chapter 6.1.11
6. Switch on control cubicle heating

Installation of control cubicle on top of busbars (only ELK04/520)

1. Attach control cubicle with four ring bolts on crane ropes, raise the crane hook centered and take up the
load without lifting the control cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the reverse side of the control cubicle
3. Adjust the control cubicle
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution: In so doing, alway retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the control cubicle has been adjusted, tighten the four clamps and remove crane ropes and lifting
bracket
5. Connect optical waveguides: The mounting of the optical waveguides is described in 6.1.11
6. Switch on control cubicle heating

Dismounting of integrated control cubicles

1. Disconnect the control cubicle from power supply
2. Disconnect cable connections from other control cubicles (see orderspecific drawings)
3. Disconnect connector cables and bay wiring
4. Remove optical waveguides: The dismounting of the optical waveguides is described in chapter 6.1.11
5. Remove the control cubicle from the bay

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.115

6.1.11 Fiber optic cable
The fiber optic cable serves for unidirectional data transmission to and from the control cubicle. One fiber is
needed per each goandreturn line. Fiber optic cables are completely resistant to electromagnetic disturbances.

Transport and storage

The fibers, single and bundle cores shall be protected during transport and storage against damage and humidity.
The cable ends shall be protected during transport and storage against infiltration of moisture. Coils with windup
cables shall be rolled only in direction of the arrows placed on the coil flanges and with horizontal positioned coil
axis. Collisions shall be avoided.

Maintenance

We recommand to contact our service for all work which requires to open the inner of the apparatuses.

INFORMATION Please find our contact address in the product manual in chapter Gasinsulated
Switchgear in section Contact.

Precautions

INFORMATION For all work the actual safety and accident prevention regulations shall be obser
ved. The measures for protection of the installation parts against dirt, dust or rain
and condensation, respectively, are documented in chapter Installation in section
Installation of the GIS.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.116

Installation

When unwinding fibres and cores from coils or rings, ensure that they are not kinked or twisted. End caps and,
where applicable, corrosion protection at the cable ends shall not be damaged during installation. If damage occurs
in spite of the above precautions, deficiencies shall be rectified immediately. During installation, ensure that the mini
mum permissible bending radius of the optical waveguide cable is observed. The minimum permissible bending
radius can be obtained from the data sheet and/or from the following documentation (Figure6.15).

The mechanical properties of the cables are temperaturedependent (depending on type). When installing and re
winding optical waveguide cables, ensure that you observe the permissible temperature ranges in accordance with
the data sheet. The specified temperature conditions can only be described as fulfilled if the affected cables have
not been exposed to temperatures outside the permissible range during the 12 hours before installation or rewind
ing.

The optical waveguides are sensitive to mechanical loads and cold conditions: Do not bend, kink, or pull on
waveguide! Do not install waveguides at temperatures under 5°C. Particular attention must be paid to positions
marked (8) in Figure6.15.

Do not dirty the optical waveguide plug or allow it to hang freely (protective cap). To prevent damaging connectors
when carrying out installation or disassembly work, tools such as pliers shall not be used.

7 6 5
4
Bending radius > 10fold diameter

2
8

1 − Screwed cable gland with strain relief 5 − ST connector with bayonet lock
2 − Diameter 6 − Ferrule
3 − Jacket of breakout cable 7 − Protective cap
4 − Conductor 8 − Particularly kinksensitive position
Figure6.15: Optical waveguide (breakout cable) with screwed cable gland

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.117

Installation and disassembling of optical waveguide

The optical waveguides are prefabricated complete with plugs and screwed cable glands (Figure6.15). Thewave
guides must be correctly installed before the screwed cable glands are tightened. When disassembling, first release
and remove the screwed cable glands and then pull out the waveguide.

When pulling through a tube, it may be necessary to secure the transmission wire at the breakout cable
(Figure6.15) and cover the waveguide with adhesive tape.

INFORMATION Pull only at the breakout cable jacket (Figure6.15) and never at the waveguide or
plug.

Function check

The best method of testing an optical waveguide is with an attenuation measuring device. A simple, optical light
check (e. g. torch) is not sufficient. For this purpose, ABB Service can provide you with a complete portable test set.

1HDG518681A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.118

6.2 Conventional control 6.2
6.2.1 Equipment and functional description
The bay control of a switchbay contains all those functions, which are necessary for a secure operation of such a
bay in a switchgear. The necessary equipment is located in the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes
of the high voltageapparatus (HVapparatus). The splittingup is made in that way, that the contactors for the mo
tors and, for the circuit breaker, the auxiliary contactors and relays are directly located in the operating mechanism
housings.

6.2.1.1Function list

Basic functions

The following basic functions of the electric control are unrenouncable contained in a conventional bay control:
− HVapparatus control with pushbuttons
− HVapparatus position indication with semaphore
− Alarm indication
− Antipumping control of circuit breaker
− Blocking or autotrip of circuit breaker at too low gas density level in the circuit breakerhousing
− Blocking or autotrip of circuit breaker at too low operating mechanism force level
− Synchronized pole unit operation check for circuit breaker with 1pole autoreclosing (AR)
− Circuit breaker operation counting
− Circuit breaker hydraulic pump startup counting
− Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump
− SF6gas density supervision
− Bay interlocking
− Protection of disconnector and earthingswitches against switching under load
− Intermediate position interlocking of the circuit breaker
− Double command lockout on bay level
− Electric handcrank interlocking
− Handcrank hole interlocking
− Endposition interlocking
− Protection of the different voltage control circuits

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.21

Additional standard functions

In addition to the basic functions the following functions are included as standard:
− Microcircuit breakers (MCBs) for protection of the low voltage circuits of voltage transformer
− Off/local/remote switch
− Station interlocking
− Interlocking bypass switch
− Interface remote control
− Cubicle lighting

Optional functions

As an option the following functions can be added on request:

− Operational metering
− Energy counter
− Socket
− Control cubicle anticondensation heating
− Operating mechanism anticondensation heating
− Transducers
− Interposing relay
− Auxiliary switch contact reproduction
− Busbar voltage replication
− Protection systems
− Remote control systems
− Numeric interlocking systems
− Trip circuit supervision
− Synchrocheck
− Parallel switching arrangement
− Arc detection

Optional applications

As an option the following applications can be added on request:

− Additional spare terminals (10% spare are included as standard)
− Customer defined terminal types
− Ferrule markers
− Special wiring / cabling (colored, halogen free, heatresistant)

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.22

6.2.1.2Functional description

Circuit protection

In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers mini circuit breakers are used to
distribute them onto several independent circuits.

AC
− Anticondensation heating and cubicle lighting

DC
− Circuit breaker control and TRIP I, disconnector/earthing switch control
− TRIP II
− Disconnector/earthing switch motors
− Hydraulic pump motor
− Interlocking
− Position indications
− Alarm signals

Cubicle lighting

Via a door contact switch a incandescent bulb is switched. Because of the preferential integrated mounting of the
control cubicle to the switch bay and because of the impact of the circuit breaker operation a layout resistant to
shock is chosen.

Anticondensation heating (optional)

The heating of the control cubicle is controlled with a regulator dependant of hygroscopic moisture and tempera
ture.

HVapparatus position indication

The positions of the highvoltage switching devices are displayed by semaphore position indicators in the mimic
diagram of the control cubicle. They are controlled by the auxiliary switches of the high voltage switching devices.

Alarm indication

Up to 16 single alarms are visualized per bay via an alarm indication combination. This alarm indication combination
consists of a switch board housing 96x96mm.

The indication display is realized with 5 mm LED’s. The respective label strips are to be inserted in transparency foil
(in double rows with up to 21 mm text length and 10mm heigth per channel).

The indication combination is provided with buttons for LEDtest and acknowledge.

The indication voltage may rise up to DC 250 V. There is a seperated potential from the supply voltage.

The contacts of the relays for eventual remote signalling are potentialfree and layed out as standard as normally
open contact.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.23

Off / local / remotechangeover switch

The operating status is selected via a control switch on bay level:

− Off
No switching operations are possible, alarms and indications remain active
− Local
The bay can be operated only locally
− Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level or from load distribution

Protection of disconnector and earthing switches against switching under load

The interlocking prevents the disconnector and earthing switches from switching during the circuit breaker being
closed.

Intermediate position interlocking of the circuit breaker

The circuitbreaker can be closed only if the disconnectors are in a defined ON or OFF position.

Electric handcrank interlocking

With the handcrank inserted the control voltage to the drive contactors will be interrupted by limit switches.

Electric handcrank hole interlocking

The insertion hole for the hand crank on disconnector and earthing switches is closed by a sliding plate. If the inter
locking requirements for the switching mechanism are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of an electri
cally controled solenoid.

End position interlocking

Disconnector and earthing switches are lockable in the end position. A limit switch causes the interlocking chain of
the switching mechanism to be blocked, so that activation is not possible.

Interlocking bypass

The complete interlocking except the endposition and the handcrank interlocking can be bypassed by using a
keyoperated switch.

Antipumping control of circuit breaker

Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit breaker with acontinuous ON pulse and a
simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching (ON/OFF) is permissible. Manual switching ON is possible
when an OFF pulse is applied.

OFFBlocking of Circuit Breaker

OFFBlocking occurs, if the drive energy for a TRIP or if the SF6 gas density in the circuit breaker housing is too low.

ONBlocking of circuit breaker

ONBlocking occurs, if the drive energy for a CLOSE/TRIPcycle or if the SF6 gas density in the circuit breaker
housing is too low.

Synchronized pole unit operation check for circuit breaker with 1pole autoreclosing (AR)

For circuit breakers with single pole operating mechanism the synchronous operation of the three poles is super
vised. This causes an automatic trip of all threepoles of the circuit breaker if, after a delay of 2 seconds, not all
poles are inthesame switch position.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.24

Circuit breaker operation counting

The operation counter P202, which records all the making operations of the circuit breaker, is connected in parallel
to the making coil.

Hydraulic pump startup counting

The startup counter P201, in parallel to the hydraulic pump motor, registers all starting operations of the hydraulic
pump.

Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump

Control: The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following preconditions:
− Circuitbreaker switched ON
Motor ON travel stroke switch closed
− Circuitbreaker switched OFF
CO Blocking travel stroke switch closed

Depending on the switch position a different reserve of energy is stored in the operating mechanism. During con
nected (ON) position a OCOcycle of the circuit breaker is possible, during opened (OFF) position the energy store
ranges from OCO (shortly charged) and COcycle.

This causes after switching off the circuit breaker, that the hydraulic pump will not start pumping immediately, which
is important to the battery of the system, specially at a trip of the busbar protection.

The control starts the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit breaker. Inbetween approx. 10 seconds the en
ergy is available for switching an OCOcycle.

A time characteristic of the starting hydraulic pump motors results from this control. In the event of a fault a time
delay relay sets a time limit for pumping.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.25

6.2.1.3Cubicle layout for conventional control

Assembly

The control cubicle contains all devices which are required for controlling and supervising a switch bay. The oper
ation and indication elements are positioned at the front. With opened door of the control cubicle the access to the
devices and terminal strips installed at the back and side walls is given. All devices and terminals are protected
against electric shock, this means safe for fingers in the operation area, in the inner cubicle at least backofhand
proof.

Operation panel

In the cubicle front is an operation panel with a circuit diagram of the switch bay, therein positioned semaphore
position indicators for position indication of the HVapparatus. Beneath the position indicators are the pushbuttons
for switching onor off the HVapparatus. Beneath the position indicator of the circuit breaker are addionally two
impulse counters, one for counting of the switching cycles, the other for counting the pump startups of the circuit
breaker. On top of the circuit diagram analarm indicator and a digital multimeter are located. Below this, the
Off/Local/Remote switch is placed, below the single line diagram the key switch for switching without locking is
placed.

Cubicle layout

In the inner cubicle besides the cubicle lighting and evtl. cubicle heating also the microcircuit breakers (MCBs) for
the different potential circuits, relays for interlocking double operation and interlocking, and also terminal straps are
placed. The terminal straps are grouped in afunctional way.

The supervision of the circuit breaker and the drive contactors of the HVapparatus are not placed in the control
cubicle but directly mounted in the drive housings.

Wiring

All wiring of the single devices to each other is realized with homogeneous black switching wire, preferably with 1.0
mm2 profile.

Designation of wire

If designations of wire are situated they are designed as labeled straps or in form of closed jackets (i. E. undetach
ably labelled clips).

Cabling

The connection between the operating mechanism and the control cubicle is realized with system cables with 50or
64 core leads. Gas density monitor, current and if necessary voltagetransformer as well as additionally heating
cables are inserted in the cubicle by cable glands.

The cabling from the station side is inserted through the cubicle bottom. There is a slidable bottom plate with cham
fered egdes which leads to a variable gap for the inserted cables. Remaining gaps are filled on the construction site
with mounting foam.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.26

Table6.21: Standard equipment

Designation Usage

MCBs with auxiliary switch Fuse protection

Door contact switch Switching on the light

Incandescent bulb (shockresistant) Light

Thermostat / Hygrostat Regulation of anticondensation heating

Anticondensation heating Heating for control cubicle

Control switch 3 positions, locking possible Choice of control level Off/Local/Remote

Control switch key operated with release Interlocking bypass

Pushbutton red Switching on HVapparatus

Pushbutton green Switching off HVapparatus

Position indicator SUS01.Q Position indicator circuit breaker

Position indicator SUS01 Position indicator disconnector / earthing switch

Alarm indicator FSB16 Alarm indicator

Plugin relais DC with socket Interlocking, double operation blocking

Plugin relais AC with socket Voltage supervision

Impulse counter Circuit breaker operation counting,

hydraulic pump startup counting

Terminal PT 2,5Quattro Internal alarm indication, remote control, heating,

reserve contacts of HVapparatus, internal control,
interlocking, synchronization

Terminal UT 2,5MT External alarm indication

Terminal UT 6 Ring conduit AC, DC

Terminal UT 2,5 Circuit breaker test terminals,protective signals

Terminal UTME 6 Current transformer

Terminal UT 6MT Voltage transformer

Terminal UT 2,5Quattro High voltage apparatus reserve contacts

Terminal PT 2,5Quattro Potential distribution

Terminal UT 6PE Protector ground

Terminal AZK35 Cubicle ground

Pushbutton white (only for 2step control) Selection of switching device

Digital multimeter Metering of voltage and current and the subsequent values
calculated

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.27

6.2.2 Control panel
singlestage

OFF ON OFF ON
1
3
OFF ON OFF ON 2

4 OFF ON

OFF ON

9
OFF ON

6 OFF ON

7
doublestage

Q1 Q2

3
Q51 Q52
10

4 Q0

Q53

9
Q9

6 Q8

ON OFF

7 8

1 − Pushbutton ON 7 − Circuit breaker operation counter

2 − Pushbutton OFF 8 − Pump start counter
3 − Alarm annunciator 9 − Position indicators
4 − Digital multimeter 10 − Pushbutton for selecting the switching devices
5 − Keyoperated switch INTERL/RELEASE (only doublestage)
6 − Switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE
Figure6.21: Control panel (schematic diagram)

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.28

 3
4

1,2

9
7

8
5

1 − Pushbutton ON 6 − Switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE

2 − Pushbutton OFF 7 − Circuit breaker operation counter
3 − Alarm annunciator 8 − Pump start counter
4 − Digital multimeter 9 − Position indicators
5 − Keyoperated switch INTERL/RELEASE
Figure6.22: Control panel (schematic diagram) with rotary switches

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.29

6.2.3 Operating elements

6.2.3.1Selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE

The OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch (6) has three positions (Figure6.21, Figure6.22):
− REMOTE (permitting remote control only)
− LOCAL (permitting local control only)
− OFF (remote and local control blocked)

6.2.3.2Digital multimeter

The display shows four values at once (Figure6.21, Figure6.22).

Metered parameters:
− Phase and threephase current voltage
− Phasetophase voltages
− Phase and threephase currents
− Neutral current
− Phase and threephase current energy factors
− Phase and threephase current active energy
− Phase and threephase current reactive energy
− Phase and threephase current apparent energy
− Frequency
− Temperature
− Active energy in threephase current
− Reactive energy in threephase current
− Apparent energy in threephase current
− Hour meter

6.2.3.3Average and peak values (maximum specifications)

− Maximum phase voltage
− Maximum phase energy
− Maximum neutral currents
− Maximum threephase energy
− Maximum average phase energy (maximum demand)
− Maximum average neutral current (maximum demand)
− Maximum average threephase energy (maximum demand)
− Average phase energy
− Average neutral current
− Average threephase energy

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.210

6.2.3.4Pushbuttons and switches

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause In position RELEASE all electrical interlocking is deacti
vated. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

INFORMATION An operating mechanism shall only be operated again after a complete stop of the
motor.

6.2.3.4.1Standard control

Pushbuttons ON/OFF (Figure6.21)

The high voltage devices are closed (switched ON) with the pushbutton ON (1). With the pushbutton OFF (2) the
associated highvoltage apparatus are opened (switched OFF).

The pushbuttons ON/OFF are only activated if the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in the LOCAL position.
The operating command is executed only if the electrical interlocking permits it.

A device shall NOT be operated while the associated operating mechanism is still running.

Keyoperated switch INTERL/RELEASE (Figure6.21)

For emergency operation the electrical interlocking can be deactivated manually using the keyoperated switch IN
TERL/RELEASE (5).

For safety reasons, switching operations with deactivated interlocking requires both hands and shall be performed
by authorized personnel only:
− Hand 1: Turn the keyoperated switch into position RELEASE and hold it
− Hand 2: Press pushbutton ON respectively OFF

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.211

6.2.3.4.2Doublestage control

Pushbutton selection of switching device (Figure6.21)

− With the respective push button (10) the desired switching device is selected.
− Afterwards, the high voltage devices can be closed via the associated pushbutton ON (1).
− The high voltage devices can be opened via the respective pushbutton OFF (2).

The push buttons ON/OFF are only activated if the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in the LOCAL position.
The operating command is executed only if the electrical interlocking permits it.

A device shall NOT be operated while the associated operating mechanism is still running.

Keyoperated switch INTERL/RELEASE (Figure6.21)

For emergency operation the electrical interlocking can be deactivated manually using the keyoperated switch IN
TERL/RELEASE (5).

For safety reasons, switching operations with deactivated interlocking shall be performed by authorized personnel
only:
− Turn keyoperated switch into position RELEASE
− Selection of switching device
− Press pushbutton ON respectively OFF

6.2.3.4.3Control with rotary switches

Control switches ON/OFF (Figure6.22)

The high voltage devices are closed (switched ON) with the control switch ON (1). With the control switch OFF (2)
the associated highvoltage apparatus are opened (switched OFF).

The control switches ON/OFF are only activated if the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in the LOCAL posi
tion. The operating command is executed only if the electrical interlocking permits it.

A device shall NOT be operated while the associated operating mechanism is still running.

Keyoperated switch INTERL/RELEASE (Figure6.22)

For emergency operation the electrical interlocking can be deactivated manually using the keyoperated switch IN
TERL/RELEASE (5).

For safety reasons, switching operations with deactivated interlocking requires both hands and shall be performed
by authorized personnel only:
− Hand 1: Turn the keyoperated switch into position RELEASE and hold it
− Hand 2: Press pushbutton ON respectively OFF

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.212

6.2.4 Display elements
The display elements are always active, regardless of the position of the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE.

6.2.4.1Position indicators

The position indicators ((12), Figure6.21 and Figure6.22) have two positions (Figure6.23):

SUS - 01 SUS - 01 - Q

Figure6.23: Position indicaton

INFORMATION No LED is controlled in the intermediate position.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.213

6.2.4.2Alarm annunciator

Figure6.24: Alarm annunciator

The alarm annunciator (3), Figure6.21 and Figure6.22) shows the following alarm signals (Figure6.24):

General
− Microcircuit breaker (M.C.B.) trip
− Collected alarm SF6 pressure stage 2

Circuit breaker
− Circuit breaker SF6 pressure stage 1
− Circuit breaker ON blocking
− Circuit breaker hydraulic pump fault
− Circuit breaker OFF blocking

Busbar disconnector
− Disconnector SF6 pressure stage 1

Feeder
− Feeder SF6 pressure stage 1

Voltage transformer
− Voltage transformer SF6 pressure stage 1
− Voltage transformer microcircuit breaker trip

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.214

6.2.5 Counter
Pump start counter

The hydraulicpump startup counter (8) increments with each start of the hydraulic pump (Figure6.21,
Figure6.22). The counter cannot be reset manually. An unusually high number of pump starts indicates internal
leakages in the hydraulic system.

INFORMATION The number of the pump starts without operating the circuit breaker is described in
detail in chapter Modules in section Circuit breaker operating mechanism HMB.

Operation counter

The circuit breaker operation counter (7) increments with each making operation of the circuit breaker (Figure6.21,
Figure6.22). The counter cannot be reset manually. The number of circuit breaker operations is important for main
tenance purposes.

6.2.6 Normal operation

6.2.6.1Electrical control (OFF)

If the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in position OFF, electrical operation from local and remote is blocked.
The OFF position does not have any impact on trip commands from the protection (Figure6.25).

OFF

LOCAL

REMOTE

Selector switch
OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE

Figure6.25: Electrical Control (OFF)

6.2.6.2Electrical control (REMOTE)

If the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in position REMOTE, local electrical operation is blocked. TheRE
MOTE position does not have any impact on trip commands from the protection (Figure6.26).

OFF

LOCAL
Remote command ON
Remote command OFF
REMOTE

Selector switch
OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE

Figure6.26: Electrical Control (REMOTE)

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.215

6.2.6.3Electrical control (LOCAL)

If the selector switch OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE is in position LOCAL, electrical operation from REMOTE is blocked. The
LOCAL position does not have any impact on trip commands from the protection (Figure6.27, Figure6.28 and
Figure6.29).

OFF

LOCAL ON

OFF
REMOTE

Selector switch Pushbutton

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE ON/OFF

Figure6.27: Standard

OFF

LOCAL ON
Qn
OFF
REMOTE

Selector switch Push button selection Pushbutton

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE of switching devices ON/OFF

Figure6.28: Double stage control

OFF
LOCAL
ON OFF

REMOTE

Selector switch Control switch

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE ON/OFF

Figure6.29: Control with rotary switches

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.216

6.2.7 Emergency operation

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause During switching without observing of blocking or inter
locking conditions incorrect switching operations are poss
ible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

6.2.7.1Electrical control (LOCAL), standard

OFF INTERL

LOCAL RELEASE ON

OFF
REMOTE

Selector switch Key-operated Pushbutton

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE switch ON/OFF
INTERL/RELEASE

Operation requires both hands

Figure6.210: Standard

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause All electrical interlocking of apparatuses is deactivated in
position RELEASE. Incorrect switching operations are
possible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

Switching operations with deactivated interlocking requires both hands (Figure6.210):

− Hand 1: Turn keyoperated switch into position RELEASE and hold it
− Hand 2: Press pushbutton ON respectively OFF

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.217

6.2.7.2Electrical control (LOCAL), double stage

OFF INTERL

LOCAL RELEASE
ON

Qn
REMOTE
OFF

Selector switch Key-operated Selection of Pushbutton

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE switch switching device ON/OFF
INTERL/RELEASE

Figure6.211: Double stage

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause In position RELEASE all electrical interlocking is deacti
vated. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

Switching operations with deactivated interlocking shall be performed by authorized personnel only (Figure6.211):
− Turn keyoperated switch into position RELEASE
− Selection of switching device
− Press pushbutton ON respectively OFF

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.218

6.2.7.3Electrical control (LOCAL), rotary switch

OFF INTERL
LOCAL RELEASE ON OFF

REMOTE

Selector switch Key-operated Control switch

OFF/LOCAL/REMOTE switch ON/OFF
INTERL/RELEASE

Operation requires both hands

Figure6.212: Rotary switch

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause In position RELEASE all electrical interlocking is deacti
vated. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

Switching operations with deactivated interlocking requires both hands (Figure6.212):

− Hand 1: Turn keyoperated switch into position RELEASE and hold it
− Hand 2: Select with control switch position ON respectively OFF

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.219

6.2.7.4Manual control (circuit breaker)

In emergencies the circuit breaker can be operated manually directly on the device by actuating the control valves.

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause During signal Circuit breaker OFF blocking the circuit
breaker shall only be switched with manual control if the
respective feeder is deenergized.
During signal Circuit breaker ON blocking the circuit
breaker shall only be switched with manual control if the
respective feeder is deenergized.
Action Deenergize feeder before starting manual control of circuit
breaker.

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause In position RELEASE all electrical interlocking is deacti
vated. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Observe imperatively the safety informations in chapter
Gasinsulated Switchgear in section Safety Informations.
According to IEC62271100 manual triggering shall be
used only for maintenance and emergency operation on a
dead circuit.

6.2.7.5Manual control (disconnector / earthing switch)

In emergencies the disconnector/earthing switch can be operated manually directly on the device by means of a
handcrank. As soon as the handcrank is inserted into the drive mechanism, the circuit for motor operation is auto
matically interrupted.

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by incorrect switching operations.
Cause In position RELEASE all electrical interlocking is deacti
vated. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Only persons with authorization for switching in position
RELEASE shall execute switching in position RELEASE.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.220

6.2.8 Alarm signalling
If an alarm is active the associated LED on the alarm annunciator starts flashing (3) (Figure6.21, Figure6.22). All
freshly acquired alarms are indicated by a rapid flashing of the LED. Alarms that are no longer active, but not yet
acknowledged, are indicated by flashing in the opposite phase.

When the pushbutton for acknowledgment is pressed:

− The LED stops flashing and turns into steady light if the alarm is still active
− The LED extinguishes if the alarm has been cleared

General
− M.C.B. trip (Microcircuit breaker trip)
Control, signalling and motor circuits are no longer operational once the m.c.b. has tripped. Operation is
possible with some restrictions:
− Check the circuits for shortcircuits
− Check the motors if the circuits are faultfree
− Collected alarm SF6 pressure stage 2
− Refill with SF6

WARNING Hazard Danger of personal injury and damage to property caused

by inner fault.
Cause Sufficient insulation for rated operation is no longer guar
anteed. Incorrect switching operations are possible.
Action Refill as fast as possible with SF6 if hazard signal appears.

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.221

6.2.8.1Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker SF6 pressure stage 1

The normal operation is not yet restricted:

− Refill with SF6

Circuit breaker ON blocking

The energy stored in the operating mechanism is sufficient for switching off:
− Check circuit breaker operating mechanism

Circuit breaker hydraulic pump fault

The energy stored in the operating mechanism is sufficient for stored operations only:
− Check hydraulic pump

Circuit breaker OFF blocking SF6 pressure stage 2

The circuit breaker can not be operated anymore:

− Switch off the opposite feeder
− Manually switch off the circuit breaker in emergency mode (refer to emergency operation)

WARNING Hazard Circuit breaker cannot be operated anymore.

Cause Protection trips are no longer operational.

Action Refill as fast as possible with SF6 if hazard signal appears.

6.2.8.2Busbar disconnector

Disconnector SF6 pressure stage 1

Sufficient insulation for rated operation is still guaranteed, including busbar section SSx:
− Refill with SF6

6.2.8.3Feeder

Feeder SF6 pressure stage 1

Sufficient insulation for rated operation is still guaranteed:

− Refill with SF6

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.222

6.2.8.4Voltage transformer

Voltage transformer SF6 pressure stage 1

Sufficient insulation for rated operation is still guaranteed:

− Refill with SF6

Voltage transformer M.C.B. tripped

(Voltage transformer microcircuit breaker tripped)

All connected protective and measuring circuits are no longer operational:

− Check protective and measuring circuits and the voltage transformer for shortcircuits

1HDG518682A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.223

6.3 Interlocking 6.3
6.3.1 General
Interlocking is a most essential function to ensure safe and reliable operation of HV switching devices such as circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches. Interlocking prevents inadvertant or unpermissable switching thus
avoiding damage to material at the one hand and providing a high degree of personnel safety on the other hand.

For each individual feeder an interlocking matrix is provided as part of the schematic diagrams. In the following the
standard (mandatory) interlocking conditions are given together with an instruction how to read the matrix.

6.3.2 Structure
The left hand side of the interlocking table shows all HVapparatus of the respective feeder. On top of it there are all
relevant HVapparatus or devices the feeder is interlocked to; internally within the feeder itself and externally to
couplers, busbar earthing switches or devices of another high voltage level or remote end switchgear.

The interlocking conditions result of the entries in the crosspoints of a column and a line. For the release for oper
ation of a HVapparatus all conditions of the respective line have to be fulfilled. For HVapparatus with more than
one line the conditions of one line have to be fulfilled.

Abbreviations of interlocking conditions

The following abbreviations are used for the interlocking table entries:

C HVapparatus closed
O HVapparatus open
I Disconnector is not in intermediate position
H&E Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BBCO Busbar changeover (only applicable with double busbar systems)
BC Bus coupler closed, means both bus coupler disconnectors in closed position
X1 Circuit breaker or disconnector of another high voltage level or remote end switchgear
X2 Earthing switch of another high voltage level or remote end switchgear

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.31

Example: Interlocking of switching device Qn
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 ...

HV apparatus Qm Qn Qr Qs ...

Qn O H&E C ...

Condition 1: Qn is interlocked to Qm, this means, Qm has to be in open position for Qn beeing released for opera
tion.

Condition 2: Qn is interlocked to Qn, this means, that at the switching device Qn the hand crank must not be in
serted and any end position interlocking must not be active, for Qn beeing released for operation.

Condition 3: Qn is not interlocked to Qr.

Condition 4: Qn is interlocked to Qs, this means, Qs has to be in closed position for Qn beeing released for opera
tion.

Qn is switchable if conditions 1, 2, 4 are fulfilled.

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.32

6.3.3 Single busbar, line
Table6.31: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with outgoing feeder bay

Interlocking conditions for BB1

single busbar with Q1
outgoing feeder bay
Q51
Q0

Q9 Q53

T5 Q8

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q9 Q53 Q8 T5 ES1 X1 X2

Q0 (closed/ON) I I

Q1 O H&E O O O
ease

Q51 O H&E O
Relea

Q9 O O H&E O O O

Q53 O O H&E

Q8 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by voltage trasformer (VT))
ES1 Busbar earthing switch BB1
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.33

6.3.4 Single busbar, transformer
Table6.32: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with transformer feeder bay

Interlocking conditions for BB1

single busbar with Q1
transformer feeder bay
Q51
Q0

T5
Q8

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q8 T5 ES1 X1 X2

Q0 (closed / ON) I

Q1 O H&E O O O O
elease
se

Q51 O H&E <U O

Re

O H&E C

Q8 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
ES1 Busbar earthing switch BB1
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.34

6.3.5 Single busbar, longitudinal coupling
Table6.33: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with longitudinal coupling

Interlocking conditions for Q1 Q0 Q10

single busbar with section BB1 BB2
coupling
Q51 Q54

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q10 Q54 ES1 ES2

Q0 (closed / ON) I I

Q1 O H&E O O O
elease
se

Q51 O H&E O
Re

Q10 O O H&E O O

Q54 O O H&E

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
ES1: Busbar earthing switch BB1
ES2: Busbar earthing switch BB2

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.35

6.3.6 Single busbar, earthing
Table6.34: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with busbar earthing switch

Interlocking conditions
for single busbar with
busbar earthing switch Q15

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders
HV apparatus Q15
1...n: Q1

Release Q15 H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
n: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.36

6.3.7 Single busbar, single longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing
Table6.35: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with single longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing

Interlocking conditions BB1 BB2

for single busbar with Q11
single longitudinal sectio
Q15 Q16
nalising and busbar eart
hing
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders Feeders
HV apparatus Q11 Q15 Q16 1...m n...z
(BB1): Q1 (BB2): Q1

Q11 H&E O O O

H&E O O O
Release
Q15 O H&E O

Q16 O H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
m,n,z: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.37

6.3.8 Single busbar, double longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing
Table6.36: Interlocking conditions for single busbar with double longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing

Interlocking conditions for BB1 BB2

single busbar with Q11 Q12
double longitudinal
Q15 Q54 Q55 Q16
sectionalising and busbar
earthing
Position

Bay Interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders Feeders
HV apparatus Q11 Q54 Q12 Q55 Q15 Q16 1...m n...z
(BB1): Q1 (BB2): Q1

Q11 H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O

Q54 O H&E O
R ease

Q12 O O H&E O O
Relea

O H&E O O O

O H&E O O O

Q55 O O H&E

Q15 O H&E O

Q16 O H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
m,n,z: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.38

6.3.9 Double busbar, line
Table6.37: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with outgoing feeder bay

Interlocking conditions for BB1

double busbar with outgo BB2
ing feeder bay Q1 Q2
Q51 Q52
Q0

Q9 Q53

T5
Q8

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q2 Q52 Q9 Q53 Q8 T5 ES1 ES2 BC X1 X2

Q0 (closed / ON) I I I

Q1 O H&E O O O O O

Q1 (BBCO) H&E O C O O O C

Q51 O H&E O O
R ease

Q2 O O O H&E O O O
Relea

Q2 (BBCO) C O H&E O O O C

Q52 O O H&E O

Q9 O O O H&E O O O

Q53 O O O H&E

Q8 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Bus coupler closed, means both bus coupler disconnectors in closed position
BBCO:Busbar change over
ES1 Busbar earthing switch BB1
ES2 Busbar earthing switch BB2
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.39

6.3.10 Double busbar, transformer
Table6.38: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with transformer feeder bay

Interlocking conditions for BB1

double busbar with trans BB2
former feeder bay Q1 Q2
Q51 Q52
Q0

T5
Q8

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q2 Q52 Q8 T5 ES1 ES2 BC X1 X2

Q0 (closed / ON) I I

Q1 O H&E O O O O O O

Q1 (BBCO) H&E O C O O O C

Q51 O H&E O <U O

R ease

O H&E O C
Relea

Q2 O O O H&E O O O O

Q2 (BBCO) C O H&E O O O C

Q52 O O H&E <U O

O O H&E C

Q8 O O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Bus coupler closed, means both bus coupler disconnectors in closed position
BBCO:Busbar change over
ES1 Busbar earthing switch BB1
ES2 Busbar earthing switch BB2
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.310

6.3.11 Double busbar, coupling
Table6.39: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with coupling

Interlocking conditions for BB1

double busbar with cou BB2
pling Q1 Q2
Q51 Q52

Q0
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders
HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q2 Q52 1...n: ES1 ES2
Q1 + Q2

Q0 (closed / ON) I I

Q0 (Offen / Aus) KA
ease

Q1 O H&E O O O
Relea

Q51 O H&E O

Q2 O O H&E O O

Q52 O O H&E

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
n: Number of feeders
ES1 Busbar earthing switch BB1
ES2 Busbar earthing switch BB2
KA: Blocking of Coupler during busbar changeover:
Q1 and Q2 of minimum one feeder (except coupler) are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.311

6.3.12 Double busbar, earthing
Table6.310: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with busbar earthing switch

Interlocking conditions for BB1

double busbar with busbar BB2
earthing switch
Q15 Q25

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders Feeders
HV apparatus Q15 Q25
1...n: Q1 1...n: Q2

Q15 H&E O
ease
Relea

Q25 H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
n: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.312

6.3.13 Double busbar, single longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing
Table6.311: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with single longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing

Interlocking condi Q15 Q11 Q16

tions for double BB11 BB12
busbar with single BB21 BB22
longitudinal sec
Q21
tionalising and bus
bar earthing
Q25 Q26
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Fee Fee Fee Fee

ders ders ders ders
HV apparatus Q11 Q21 Q15 Q16 Q25 Q26 1... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
(BB11): (BB12): (BB21): (BB22):
Q1 Q1 Q2 Q2

Q11 H&E O O O

H&E O O O

Q15 O H&E O
R ease

Q16 O H&E O
Relea

Q21 H&E O O O

H&E O O O

Q25 O H&E O

Q26 O H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
m,n,z: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.313

6.3.14 Double busbar, double longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing
Table6.312: Interlocking conditions for double busbar with double longitudinal sectionalising and busbar earthing

Interlocking Q15 Q11 Q54 Q55 Q12 Q16

conditions BB11 BB12
for double BB21 BB22
busbar with Q21 Q22
double
longitudinal
sectionalis Q25 Q56 Q57 Q26
ing and bus
bus
bar earthing Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q11 Q21 Q54 Q56 Q12 Q22 Q55 Q57 Q15 Q16 Q25 Q26 Fee Fee Fee Fee
appara ders ders ders ders
tus 1... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
(BB11): (BB12): (BB21): (BB22):
Q1 Q1 Q2 Q2
Q11 H&E O O O O
H&E O O O O
H&E O O O O
Q54 O H&E O
Q12 O O H&E O O
O H&E O O O
O H&E O O O
Q55 O O H&E
Q15 O H&E O
R easee

Q16 O H&E O
Relea

Q21 H&E O O O O
H&E O O O O
H&E O O O O
Q56 O H&E O
Q22 O O H&E O O
O H&E O O O
O H&E O O O
Q57 O O H&E
Q25 O H&E O
Q26 O H&E O
Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
m,n,z: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.314

6.3.15 Double busbar, double longitudinal sectionalising, busbar coupler and
busbar earthing
Table6.313: Interlocking conditions for double busbar, double longitudinal sectionalising, busbar coupler and busbar earthing

Interlock Q15 Q11 BB12 Q16 Q12 Q17

ing condi BB11 BB13
tions for BB21 BB23
BB22
double Q21 Q1 Q2 Q22
busbar,
double Q51 Q52
longitudi Q25 Q26 Q27
nal sec
tionalis Q0
ing, bus
bus
bar cou
Position
p
pler and
busbar
earthing Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q BC Fee Fee Fee Fee Fee

appa 0 1 51 2 52 11 21 12 22 15 16 25 26 17 27 ders ders ders ders ders
ratus 1... n : 1 ... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
Q1+Q (BB11) (BB13) (BB21) (BB23)
2 : Q1 : Q1 : Q2 : Q2
Q0 I I I I I I
(ON)

Q0 KA
(OFF)
Re ase
Releas

Q1 O H&E O O O
Q51 O H&E O
Q2 O O H&E O O
Q52 O O H&E

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Buscoupler
m,n,z: Number of feeders
KA: Blocking of coupler during busbar changeover: Q1 and Q2 of a feeder (except coupler)
are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.315

Interlock Q15 Q11 BB12 Q16 Q12 Q17
ing condi BB11 BB13
tions for BB21 BB23
BB22
double Q21 Q1 Q2 Q22
busbar,
double Q51 Q52
longitudi Q25 Q26 Q27
nal sec
tionalis Q0
ing, bus
bar cou
Position
pler and
busbar
earthing Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q BC Fee Fee Fee Fee Fee

appa 0 1 51 2 52 11 21 12 22 15 16 25 26 17 27 ders ders ders ders ders
ratus 1... n : 1 ... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
Q1+Q (BB11) (BB13) (BB21) (BB23)
2 : Q1 : Q1 : Q2 : Q2
Q11 H&E O O O O
H&E O O O
H&E O O O O
H&E O O O O O
H&E O O O O O
elease
se

H&E O O O O O
Re

H&E O O O O O
H&E O O O O O
H&E O O O O O
H&E O O O O O
H&E O O O O O
Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Buscoupler
m,n,z: Number of feeders
KA: Blocking of coupler during busbar changeover: Q1 and Q2 of a feeder (except coupler)
are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.316

Interlock Q15 Q11 BB12 Q16 Q12 Q17
ing condi BB11 BB13
tions for BB21 BB23
BB22
double Q21 Q1 Q2 Q22
busbar,
double Q51 Q52
longitudi Q25 Q26 Q27
nal sec
tionalis Q0
ing, bus
bar cou
Position
pler and
busbar
earthing Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q BC Fee Fee Fee Fee Fee

appa 0 1 51 2 52 11 21 12 22 15 16 25 26 17 27 ders ders ders ders ders
ratus 1... n : 1 ... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
Q1+Q (BB11) (BB13) (BB21) (BB23)
2 : Q1 : Q1 : Q2 : Q2
Q12 O H&E O O O

H&E O O O O

H&E O O O

O O H&E O O O

O H&E O O O O
elease
se

O O H&E O O O
Re

O H&E O O O O

O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O

O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O
Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Buscoupler
m,n,z: Number of feeders
KA: Blocking of coupler during busbar changeover: Q1 and Q2 of a feeder (except coupler)
are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.317

Interlock Q15 Q11 BB12 Q16 Q12 Q17
ing condi BB11 BB13
tions for BB21 BB23
BB22
double Q21 Q1 Q2 Q22
busbar,
double Q51 Q52
longitudi Q25 Q26 Q27
nal sec
tionalis Q0
ing, bus
bar cou
Position
pler and
busbar
earthing Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q BC Fee Fee Fee Fee Fee

appa 0 1 51 2 52 11 21 12 22 15 16 25 26 17 27 ders ders ders ders ders
ratus 1... n : 1 ... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
Q1+Q (BB11) (BB13) (BB21) (BB23)
2 : Q1 : Q1 : Q2 : Q2
Q21 H&E O O O O

H&E O O O

H&E O O O O

O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O
elease
se

O H&E O O O O
Re

H&E O O O O O
O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O

O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O
Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Buscoupler
m,n,z: Number of feeders
KA: Blocking of coupler during busbar changeover: Q1 and Q2 of a feeder (except coupler)
are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.318

Interlock Q15 Q11 BB12 Q16 Q12 Q17
ing condi BB11 BB13
tions for BB21 BB23
BB22
double Q21 Q1 Q2 Q22
busbar,
double Q51 Q52
longitudi Q25 Q26 Q27
nal sec
tionalis Q0
ing, bus
bar cou
Position
pler and
busbar
earthing Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q BC Fee Fee Fee Fee Fee

appa 0 1 51 2 52 11 21 12 22 15 16 25 26 17 27 ders ders ders ders ders
ratus 1... n : 1 ... m n ... z 1 ... m n ... z
Q1+Q (BB11) (BB13) (BB21) (BB23)
2 : Q1 : Q1 : Q2 : Q2
Q22 O H&E O O O

H&E O O O O

H&E O O O

O O O H&E O O

O O H&E O O O
O O H&E O O O
O H&E O O O O
O O H&E O O O
e
elease

O H&E O O O O
Rel

O H&E O O O O

H&E O O O O O

Q15 O H&E O

Q25 O H&E O

Q16 O O O H&E

Q26 O O O H&E

Q17 O H&E O

Q27 O H&E O
Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
BC: Buscoupler
m,n,z: Number of feeders
KA: Blocking of coupler during busbar changeover: Q1 and Q2 of a feeder (except coupler)
are closed at the same time

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.319

6.3.16 Single bay, in and out
Table6.314: Interlocking conditions for single bay with in and out

Interlocking Line
conditions for single bay
with in and out T5
Q8
Q1

Q51
Q0

Q81

Transformer
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q8 Q81 T5 X1 X2 X1 X2

Lei Trafo
tung

lineside transformerside

Q0 (closed/ON) I

Q1 O H&E O O O O O
elease
se

Q51 O H&E O
Re

Q8 O H&E <U O

Q81 O H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.320

6.3.17 Ring feeder
Table6.315: Interlocking conditions for ring feeder

Interlocking conditions for F−1 F+1

ring feeder
Q9 Q53
Q1 Q2

Q51 Q52 T5 Q8
Q0

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q0 Q1 Q51 Q2 Q52 Q9 Q53 Q8 T5 F+1, F+1, F1, F1, X1 X2

Q1 Q0 Q9 Q53

Q0 (closed/ON) I I I I

Q1 O H&E O O O

Q51 O H&E O
R ease

Q2 O O H&E O O
Relea

Q52 O O H&E

Q9 O H&E O O O O

Q53 O O H&E O

Q8 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
F+1 Adjacent ring feeder, connecting to Q2
F−1 Adjacent ring feeder, connecting to Q1
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.321

6.3.18 1½ Circuit breaker, upper feeder
Table6.316: Interlocking conditions for 1½ circuit breaker with upper feeder

Interlocking conditions for BB1

1½ circuit breaker with
upper feeder Q1

Q51
Q01
T51
Q55
Q61

Q91
Q53 Q81
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q01 Q1 Q51 Q61 Q55 Q91 Q53 Q81 Q02 Q62 Q15 T51 X1 X2

Q01 (closed/ON) I I I

Q1 O H&E O O O

Q51 O H&E O
R ease

Q61 O O H&E O O
Relea

Q55 O O H&E

Q91 O H&E O O O O

Q53 O O H&E O

Q81 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
Q1 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q01 Circuit breaker upper feeder
Q02 Tie circuit breaker
Q15 Busbar earthing switch BB1
Q51 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q53 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q55 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q61 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q62 Tie disconnector
Q81 Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
Q91 Combined disconnector earthing switch
T51 Voltage transformer
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.322

6.3.19 1½ Circuit breaker, coupling
Table6.317: Interlocking conditions for 1½ circuit breaker with coupling

Interlocking conditions for

1½ circuit breaker with cou
pling

Q62

Q56
Q02

Q57
Q63

Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q02 Q62 Q56 Q63 Q57 Q91 Q92 Q53 Q54

Q02 (closed/ON) I I I I

Q62 O H&E O O O
elease
se

Q56 O H&E O
Re

Q63 O O H&E O O

Q57 O O H&E

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
Q02 Circuit breaker
Q53 Earthing switch upper feeder
Q54 Earthing switch lower feeder
Q56 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q57 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q62 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q63 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q91 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q92 Combined disconnector earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.323

6.3.20 1½ Circuit breaker, lower feeder
Table6.318: Interlocking conditions for 1½ circuit breaker with lower feeder

Interlocking conditions for T52

1½ circuit breaker with lo
wer feeder
Q54 Q82

Q64 Q92

Q03 Q58

Q2 Q52

BB2
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

HV apparatus Q03 Q2 Q52 Q64 Q58 Q92 Q54 Q82 Q02 Q63 Q25 T52 X1 X2

Q03 (closed/ON) I I I

Q2 O H&E O O O

Q52 O H&E O
R ease

Q64 O O H&E O O
Relea

Q58 O O H&E

Q92 O H&E O O O O

Q54 O O H&E O

Q82 O H&E <U O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
I: Disconnectors are not in intermediate position
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
<U: No voltage on the feeder, (VTMCB and voltage detection by VT)
Q02 Tie circuit breaker
Q03 Circuit breaker lower feeder
Q2 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q25 Busbar earthing switch BB2
Q52 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q54 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q58 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q63 Tie disconnector
Q64 Combined disconnector earthing switch
Q82 Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
Q92 Combined disconnector earthing switch
T52 Voltage transformer
X1: Opposite circuit breaker resp. Disconnector
X2: Opposite earthing switch

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.324

6.3.21 1½ Circuit breaker, earthing
Table6.319: Interlocking conditions for 1½ circuit breaker with busbar earthing switch

Interlocking conditions for BB1

1½ circuit breaker with X X X X
busbar earthing switch Q15

X X X X

X X X X
BB2

Q25
Position

Bay interlocking Station interlocking

Feeders Feeders
HV apparatus Q15 Q25
1...n: Q1 1...n: Q2

Q15 H&E O
ease
Relea

Q25 H&E O

Legend
C: HV equipment closed
O: HV equipment open
H&E: Hand crank is not inserted and end position interlocking is not activated
n: Number of feeders

1HDG518685A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Control cubicle| 6.325

7 Modules 7

70
7.1 Circuit breaker 7.1

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.11

7.1.1 Functional description
3
4
7

5
1
10

11

13

12

9 1
8
2

2
1

1 − Barrier insulator 8 − Current transformer cores

2 − Conductor 9 − Terminal box current transformer
3 − Circuit−breaker operating mechanism 10 − Pressure relief device
4 − Operating rod 11 − Circuit−breaker cover
5 − Enclosure with rotary feedthrough 12 − Gas density relay
6 − Interrupting chambers 13 − Circuit−breaker enclosure
7 − Position indicator
Figure 7.1-1: Circuit−breaker with operating mechanism, example: variant with double busbar

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.12

7.1.1.1 Design of the circuit-breaker

The current transformers (8) are integrated into the gas compartment of the circuitbreaker. The gas compartment
of the circuitbreaker is separated with insulators (1) from the rest of the switchgear. The interrupting chambers (6)
are arranged in a row and are fixed to the barrier insulators (1) with conductors (2). In switching position OFF the
conductors of the busbars are separated from the exit conductors by the insulator of the interrupting chamber
(Figure7.11).

The energy of the operating mechanism (3) is transferred by a shaft through the rotary feedthrough (5) to the inter
rupting chambers (6) (Figure7.11).

For maintenance purposes the operating mechanism (3) and circuit−breaker cover (11) are removed. The interrupt
ing chambers (6) are replaced through the opening in the top of the circuit−breaker enclosure (13) (Figure7.11).

7.1.1.2 Function of the interrupting chamber

Closing operation

During a closing operation the circuit breaker operating mechanism moves the operating rod (1). This operating rod
(1) in turn moves parts of the interrupting chamber (the insulating nozzle (8), the auxiliary nozzle (6) and the blast
piston (2)) towards the fixed contact (9). The preignition takes place on the arcing contacts (5), so that the main
current contacts (4) close practically without current (Figure7.12).

Opening operation

An opening operation works in the opposite sequence with the main contacts (4) being separated first, followed by
the arcing contacts (5). By this the current commutates to the arcing contacts (5) (Figure7.12).

The thermal energy of the arc increases the pressure in the heatup volume (3). When the arcing contacts open, a
gas flow through the auxiliary (6) and the insulating nozzle (8) is generated. This gas flow cools the arc by intensive
radial blowing and leads to its extinction in the natural current zero (Figure7.12).

9 5 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 − Operating rod 6 − Auxiliary nozzle

2 − Blasting piston 7 − Chamber insulator
3 − Heat−up chamber 8 − Isolating nozzle
4 − Main contacts 9 − Fixed contact
5 − Arcing contacts
Figure 7.1-2: Interrupting chamber (position OFF)

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.13

7.1.2 Commissioning

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

7.1.3 Operation

Operate the circuitbreaker only from the elements arranged in the local control cubicle or via the SCADA system.
For details consult the documentation in chapter Control cubicle, if the control system has been supplied by the GIS
manufacturer. If the control system has not been delivered by the GIS manufacturer, consult the documentation
supplied by the manufacturer of the control system.

DANGER Hazard Manual switching directly at the circuitbreaker mechanism

can result in switching errors including the failure of the
circuitbreaker if the circuitbreaker is energized. A pos
sible internal arc can result in severe injury or death.
Cause During manual switching directly at the circuitbreaker op
erating mechanism all interlocking against switching errors
are ineffective. Especially the blocking of the circuit
breaker in case of low gas pressure is ineffective. Switch
ing of the circuitbreaker results in immediate failure of the
circuitbreaker.
Action Operate the energized circuitbreaker only with the control
elements in the local control cubicle or via the SCADA sys
tem.

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.14

7.1.4 Maintenance

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the pressure relief device. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

SF6 gas−insulated switchgear requires only a minimum of maintenance as indicated in Table7.11.

Table 7.1-1: Maintenance Schedule

Component Service work to be performed after

8 years 5 000 CO 20 short−circuit breakings

under operating conditions
at rated breaking current

Interrupting chamber − Replace Replace

Circuit−breaker operating Inspection Inspection −

mechanism

SF6 gas adsorber − Replace Replace

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.15

Orings

INFORMATION Replace all Orings that have been removed during maintenance by new ones prior
to reassembly.

SF6 gas adsorber

INFORMATION The replacement of the SF6 gas moisture filters is described in chapter Service.

Tightening torques for screws

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS in table Tightening torques for non−greased screws.

Circuit breaker operating mechanism

INFORMATION All work concerning the circut−breaker operating mechanism is described in chap
ter Operating mechanism HMB−1 or Operating mechanism HMB−1s.

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.16

7.1.5 Inspection of the circuit-breaker

NOTICE Hazard Damage to the interrupting chamber

Cause If the gas compartment is filled at a pressure below the

minimum functional pressure the interrupting chamber
could be damaged due to insufficient mechanical damping.
Action For switching operations fill the circuit−breaker gas
compartment at least at minimum functional pressure.

INFORMATION The maintenance work is started with operating the circuit−breaker. Make sure that
the position of the switches in the substation are in a way that switching without
load is possible.

Inspection

For a routine inspection after 8 years of operation the following steps a) to e) have to be carried out. After replace
ment of the interrupting chambers the additional steps f) to i) have to be performed.
a) Check the number of operations
b) Check the number of pump starts

c) Inspection of the carbon brushes (height q11 mm)

d) Inspection of the drive elements: rotary feedthroughs
e) Inspection of the drive elements: auxiliary switch position indicator
f) Functional test OPEN coil 1:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 1 to contact separation)
g) Functional test OPEN coil 2:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 2 to contact separation)
h) Functional test CLOSE coil:
(Time measurement: pulse output CLOSE coil to contact touching)
i) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation

INFORMATION The operating diagrams and the technical data are listed in detail in chapter Techni
cal data.

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.17

7.1.6 Replacement of the interrupting chamber

Once the specified maximum numbers of current interruptions respectively operations has been reached, the inter
rupting chambers need to be replaced (see Table7.11). The replacement of the interrupting chambers requires
accessing the circuit breaker gas compartment.

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause During the work the enclosure is opened. The installation

work includes active parts which are under high voltage
during operation.
Action Before starting the work, de−energize the circuit−breaker,
check for absence of voltage, secure against re−connection
and earth circuit−breaker on both sides.

Dismounting the interrupting chambers

The following sequence refers to the flange connections of a double busbar feeder and might be transferred to
other flange arrangements. Take the following steps when dismounting the interrupting chamber:
1. De−energize the circuit−breaker and earth on both sides
2. Evacuate SF6 from circuit−breaker and let air in
3. Disconnect the secondary connections (3) (Figure 7.1-3)
4. Loosen the connection to the anti−condensation heater
5. Open fasteners (1) (Figure 7.1-3)
6. Remove the cover of the operating mechanism housing (2) (Figure 7.1-3)

1
3
2

1 1

1 − Fasteners
2 − Cover of operating mechanism housing
3 − Plug connection auxiliary circuits (bottom of housing)
Figure 7.1-3: Preparations for removing the circuit−breaker operating mechanism

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.18

 7. Loosen linkage (1) between joining rod and auxiliary contacts (2) (Figure 7.1-4)
8. Dismount auxiliary contacts (2) including the support of the auxiliary contacts (Figure 7.1-4)
9. Remove coupling bolt (3) between joining rod and outer lever (Figure 7.1-4)
10. Loosen screws (5) and dismount operating mechanism (4) (Figure 7.1-4)
11. Loosen screws (6) and dismount operating mechanism housing, if necessary loosen also the screws of secondary
equipment (Figure 7.1-4)

6
8

1 − Linkage auxiliary contacts 5 − Screws operating mechanism

2 − Auxiliary contacts 6 − Screws housing (partly not visible)
3 − Coupling bolt 7 − Housing
4 − Operating mechanism 8 − Cover enclosure rotary feedthrough
Figure 7.1-4: Removal of operating mechanism and housing

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.19

 12. Loosen screws (1) and remove cover (2) of rotary feedthrough enclosure (3) (Figure 7.1-5)
13. Repeat step for all three rotary feedthrough enclosures
14. Remove o−ring between cover and enclosure and dispose of
15. Unscrew both parts of coupling bolt (6) and remove from space between inner lever (4) and operating
rod (5) (Figure 7.1-5)
16. Repeat for the remaining two operating rods
Now the connection between operating rods and cover of the circuit−breaker has been separated.

6 5

1 − Screws 4 − Inner lever

2 − Cover 5 − Operating rod
3 − Rotary shaft enclosure 6 − Coupling bolt
Figure 7.1-5: Remove coupling bolt between operating rod and inner lever

17. Loosen head cap screws (1) and hexagon cap screws (2) and dismount circuit−breaker cover (3) from circuit−
breaker enclosure (4). Remove o−ring and dispose of (Figure 7.1-6)

1 − Head cap screw 3 − Circuit−breaker cover

2 − Hexagon head screw 4 − Circuit−breaker enclosure
Figure 7.1-6: Remove circuit−breaker cover

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.110

 18. Before loosening the conductors (5, 6) fix the interrupting chamber (2) at eye bolt (1) of operating rod to the
crane hook (Figure 7.1-7)
19. Pull interrupting chamber (2) at the eye bolt (1) carefully into position OFF till mechanical stop (Figure 7.1-7)
20. Loosen screws (3 and 4) (Figure 7.1-7)

5
1

1 − Eye bolt interrupting chamber 4 − Screw connection

2 − Interrupting chamber 5 − Conductor
3 − Screw connection 6 − Conductor
Figure 7.1-7: Dismounting of interrupting chambers

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.111

 21. Lift interrupting chamber (1) with conductors (3) out of enclosure. Make sure that the conductors neither touch
the conductors nor the interrupting chambers which remain in the enclosure (2), and that they do not touch the
enclosure itself (Figure 7.1-8)
22. Loosen screws (4) and dismount conductors (3) from interrupting chamber (1) (Figure 7.1-8)
23. Clean conductors

3
4

1 − Interrupting chamber
2 − Circuit−breaker enclosure
3 − Conductor
4 − Screws
Figure 7.1-8: Dismounting the interrupting chamber

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.112

Installation of the interrupting chambers
1. Install conductors (2) to interrupting chamber (Figure 7.1-9)
(tightening torque 75 Nm)
2. Pull operating rod (4) at the interrupting chamber (1) carefully into direction OFF until mechanical stop
(Figure 7.1-9)
3. Fix interrupting chamber (1) at eye bolt (6) of the operating rod to a crane (Figure 7.1-9)
4. Lower interrupting chamber (1) carefully into the circuit−breaker enclosure without touching any parts
(Figure 7.1-8)
5. Fix conductors with screw connection (3) to straight conductors in flange (Figure 7.1-7)
(tightening torque 75 Nm)
6. Move operating rod (4) at interrupting chamber into position ON (Figure 7.1-9)
(for this use an adjustment gauge or adjust to dimension A (Figure 7.1-9) between end of operating rod and top of
interrupting chamber)
7. For all additional work steps make sure, that the moving direction of the operating rod (4) is in line with the direc-
tion of the threaded boreholes of the conductors (7) (Figure 7.1-9) − if this is not the case, move the operating rod
(4) with slightly countered fit screws (6) at the moving side of the interrupting chamber into the necessary direc-
tion!

3
3

2
1 7

4
Moving direction
to be checked

2
5 6
3 Dimension A: 265 mm + 1 mm

1 − Interrupting chamber 5 − Nut

2 − Conductors 6 − Eye bolt
3 − Screw with washer 7 − Threaded boreholes of conductors
4 − Operating rod
Figure 7.1-9: Interrupting chamber in position ON (CLOSED)

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.113

 8. Adjust length of eye bolt to top edge of circuit−breaker enclosure to dimension B (Figure 7.1-10),
Attach Loctite no. 241 to screw connection and screw with tightening torque 100 Nm+10%
9. Pull operating rod (8) with adjusted fit screw carefully into position OFF (Figure 7.1-10)
10. Insert new o−ring (12) between circuit−breaker enclosure (11) and circuit−breaker cover (10) (Figure 7.1-10)
11. Install circuit−breaker cover (10) with head cap screws and washers (13) and hexagon head screws with washers
(14). Tighten screws at specified torque (Figure 7.1-10)
12. Install operating mechanism housing (7) with screws and washers (6). Tighten screws at specified torque
(Figure 7.1-4)
13. Install operating mechanism (4) with screws and washers (5). Tighten screws at specified torque (Figure 7.1-4)
14. Couple fit screw (9) with coupling bolt to inner lever (5). Tighten both parts of the coupling bolt at the specified
torque (Figure 7.1-10)
15. Move the interrupting chambers into position ON (Figure 7.1-10): Dimension C
(Dimension between top edge of rotary feedthrough enclosure to top edge of round part of fit screw)

7 6 1
2

13 Dimension C:
151 mm
Tolerance: +0,5 mm

−1,5 mm

Dimension B:
10 70,5 mm
±0,5 mm
12
14 4
11

5 9 8 3

1 − Upper edge fitting bolt 8 − Operating rod

2 − Upper edge housing for bell crank 9 − Fit screw
3 − Middle of coupling bolt 10 − Circuit−breaker cover
4 − Upper edge circuit breaker gas compartment 11 − Circuit−breaker enclosure
5 − Inner lever 12 − O−ring
6 − Outer lever 13 − Head−cap srews and washers
7 − Lock nut 14 − Hexagon head screws and washers
Figure 7.1-10: Adjustment of interrupting chambers

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.114

Coupling to operating mechanism

In order to couple the operating mechanism it has to be in the ON (CLOSE) position. The interrupting chambers
have to be in the ON (CLOSE) position, as well (dimension C, Figure7.110). Adjust the lock nut (7) so that the eye
bolt can be coupled with coupling bolts to the outer lever (6). During the coupling the blow cylinder and the operat
ing mechanism must not be moved out of their ON (CLOSE) positions. The position of the inner lever (5) with cou
pled operating rod shall not be moved.

Checking of interrupting chamber stroke

After mounting and coupling of the interrupting chambers check the chamber stroke:

For this purpose move the interrupting chamber in position OFF (OPEN) by moving the operating mechanism skid.
The dimension of the upper edge of the housing for the bell crank (2) to the upper edge of the eye bolt(1) has to be
41mm (tolerance: +0.5 mm −1.5 mm) instead of 151 mm (Figure7.110).

The result of this is an interrupting chamber stroke of 110 mm (tolerance: ±2 mm).

7.1.7 Commissioning after overhaul

Fill gas compartments with SF6.

After conclusion of all works associated with the overhaul a shortened commissioning test has to be performed.
See chapter 7.1.5 Inspection of the circuit breaker operating mechanism steps f) to i).

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.115

7.1.8 Technical data
Table 7.1-2: Circuit−breaker

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Power−frequency withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 140 230 275

Frequency Hz 50/ 60

3150 A (50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 A (60 Hz)

Peak current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80/100

Short−time withstand current kA 31,5/40

Duration of short−circuit s 3

Opening speed (VAUS) (1) m/s 4,8 − 5,8

Opening time (tAUS) (1) ms 22 − 38

Breaking time (tAUS + tLIBO max.) ms 43 − 59

Closing speed (VEIN) (1) m/s 2,8 − 3,6

Closing time (tEIN) (1) ms 43 − 65

Operating sequence  O−0,3 sec− CO−3 min− CO

Power−frequency withstand voltage auxiliary circuits kV 2

SF6 minimum functional pressure/filling pressure (at 20°C) kPa 600/700

SF6 weight kg 37*

Weight including operating mechanism

kg 886**
(without integrated current transformer and SF6)

1) Definition acc. to IEC 62 271100

Values within the tolerance zone are valid for all operating conditions:
− from minimum supply voltage and minimum spring pressure
to maximum supply voltage and maximum spring pressure
− SF6gas pressure on blocking limit acc. to switching performance test
(minimum functional pressure 600 kPaabs)
− traveltime diagram see Figure7.111
− determination of velocity results in range of stroke between
CLOSE: 70mm − 56mm
OPEN: 70mm − 34mm

* The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the number of flanges and on the number of integrated current transformer cores.
Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only approximate values. The exact values can be found on the nameplates of
the installation.
** The weight of the circuit−breaker depends number of flanges and the specification of the integrated current transformers
cores which are project−specific data. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only approximate values.

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.116

Guaranteed values according to IEC
Table 7.1-3: Guaranteed values according to IEC 62271-100 for rated voltage Un=145 kV and Ik=40 kA

Test I RRRV Uc t2/(t3)

kA KV/ms kV ms

Terminal fault, test duty:

− T 10 4 6,0 272 45
− T 30 12 5,0 266 225
− T 60 24 3,0 266 88
− T 100s 40 2,0 249 267
− T 100a 40 2,0 249 267

Out of phase condition (OoP) 10 1,67 370 534

Short−line fault L75 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)

− source side 30 2,0 166 177
− line side 6,0

Short−line fault L90 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)

− source side 36 2,0 166 177
− line side 7,2

Capacitive currents
− overhead line 50 A
− cable 160 A

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.117

Operating diagram circuit breaker

The given tolerances for the switching times are valid for all operating conditions as far as supply voltages and
spring charging status of the operating mechanism are concerned (Figure7.111).
The maximum permissible operating time difference between the three poles is tCLOSE and tOPEN v 3 ms.

INFORMATION For COoperation with a continuously active OPEN command a minimum stroke of
the chamber of 105mm is permissible.

OPEN CLOSE Pulse on

CLOSE
solenoid

Contact making
(arcing contact)

tCLOSE
Pulse on
OPEN
solenoid

tOPEN
t10−19
Contact separation
(arcing contact)

Chamber stroke (mm)

OPEN Timing of auxiliary switch contacts CLOSE

Operating angle 105

Contacts 01 − 182
10±5°*
Contacts 83 − 184
95±5°
Contacts 05 − 06
20±5°
Contacts 10 − 19
20±5° 20±5°
Main contact

* The contact making of the contacts 01 − 182 is adjusted to 10 5 for circuit breaker end position CLOSE
Figure 7.1-11: Operating diagram with 3pole operating mechanism

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.118

Resistance values of the main current path

 45 

 26 

 45 

Figure 7.1-12: Circuit−breaker, double busbar

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.119

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.1-4: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material
Total weight

NF metal *

Oil, grease
Al metal *

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Circuit breaker 886 37 F f f f f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals

1HDG518712C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.120

7.2 Circuit Breaker (145H) 7.2

1HDG518714B 7.21
R58:
7.2.101.07.2015
Functional description
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
2
13 9 3
10 12
11 6 14
1

15
7
8
4

1 − Interrupting chamber 6 − Shaft 11 − Linkage

2 − Barrier insulator 7 − Operating mechanism 12 − Gas connection
3 − Switching rod 8 − Cover 13 − Control cubicle
4 − Shaft enclosure 9 − Inner lever 14 − Enclosure
5 − Cover 10 − Outer lever 15 − Position indication
Figure7.21: Circuit breaker with operating mechanism

The circuit breaker (Figure7.21) has a horizontal position. The circuit breaker is attached at enclosure (2) and cover
(5) to the support structure. The position of the operating mechanism (7) is in the control cubicle (13). The switching
position can be read at the position indication (15) through a window in the door of the control cubicle. The circuit
breaker operating mechanism is an independent unit. For service it can be easily separated from the interrupter.
After reinstallation adjustment work is not necessary.

The interrupting chambers (1) are attached directly to the barrier insulators (2) with their conductors. The linear
movement of the linkage (11) is converted to a circular movement of shaft (6). The inner lever (9) makes a linear
movement of switching rod (3). The position of the inner levers are in the shaft enclosure (4). Through cover (8) you
get acces to the coupling point between inner lever and switching rod.

For maintenance of the interrupting chambers the switching rod is decoupled from the inner shaft within the shaft
enclosure. Cover (5) is loosened from the circuit breaker encapsulation and removed completely including control
cubicle (13) and operating mechanism (7). At the gas connection (12) usual a gas density monitor is attached.

Functional description of interrupting chamber

The circuit breaker is largely maintenancefree. It is of the singlepressure, selfextinguishing type with one inter
rupter for each pole. During the opening operation, the pressure increase occurring in the heat chamber produces
the gas flow needed for arc extinction and dielectric recovery.

1HDG518714B 7.22
 9 01.07.2015
R58: 5 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)

1 − Operating rod 4 − Main contacts 7 − Chamber insulator

2 − Blast piston 5 − Arcing contacts 8 − Insulating nozzle
3 − Heatup chamber 6 − Auxiliary nozzle 9 − Fixed contact
Figure7.22: Interrupting Chamber (in OFF position)

Closing operation

During a closing operation the circuit breaker operating mechanism moves the operating rod (1). This operating rod
(1) in turn moves parts of the interrupting chamber (the insulating nozzle (8), the auxiliary nozzle (6) and the blast
piston (2)) towards the fixed contact (9). The preignition takes place on the arcing contacts (5), so that the main
current contacts (4) close practically without current (Figure7.22).

Opening operation

An opening operation works in the opposite sequence with the main contacts (4) being separated first, followed by
the arcing contacts (5) (Figure7.22).

The thermal energy of the arc increases the pressure in the heatup volume (3). When the arcing contacts open, a
gas flow through the auxiliary (6) and the insulating nozzle (8) is generated. This gas flow cools the arc by intensive
radial blowing and leads to its extinction in the natural current zero (Figure7.22).

1HDG518714B 7.23
R58:
7.2.201.07.2015
Service
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
All actions described in this chapter may only be executed if all notes, cautions
WARNING and warnings of the product documentation, especially the safety instructions
in chapter Gasinsulated Switchgear in document Safety Instructions have been
read and were understood and that all given conditions are fulfilled.
Otherwise, the manufacturer will not take any responsibility due to damages
caused by improperly handling.

All works related to SF6 are described in chapter Gasinsulated Switchgear in do-
WARNING cument Gashandling and have to be followed strictly!

SF6 gasinsulated switchgear is low maintenance equipment. Only the work listed in Table7.21 have to be carried
out.
Table7.21: Maintenance Schedule

Service work to be performed after

Component 20 short circuit breakings

8 years 5 000 CO under operating conditions at
rated breaking current

Interrupting chamber − Replace Replace

Operating mechanism Inspection Inspection −

SF6 gas moisture filter − Replace Replace

Contactors Inspection − −

Follow all instructions in chapter Installation in document Installation of GIS.

WARNING
Replace all O-rings that have been removed during maintenance by new ones
NOTICE prior to reassembly.

The replacement of the SF6 gas moisture filters is described in chapter Service
NOTICE in document SF6 gas moisture filter.

The tightening torques for non−greased bolts in threads and holes are listed
NOTICE in chapter Installation in document Installation of the GIS in table Tightening Tor-
ques for non-greased Bolts.

All works associated with the handling of the operating mechanism of the cir-
NOTICE cuit breaker are described in detail in chapter Modules.

1HDG518714B 7.24
R58: 01.07.2015
7.2.2.1Inspection of the circuit breaker operating mechanism
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
All maintenance work involves the operation of the circuit breaker. For this re-
WARNING ason, the system has to be set up to allow for operation of the isolated circuit
breaker.

The circuit breaker shall only be operated when filled with SF6 at least to the mi-
NOTICE nimum functional pressure!

Inspection

For a routine inspection after 8 years of operation the following steps a) through f) have to be carried out. After over
hauling the conducting path the additional steps g) through j) have to be performed.
a) Check the number of operations
b) Check the number of pump starts
c) Inspection of the carbon brushes (min. height: 11 mm)
d) Inspection of the linkage elements: shaft bushings
e) Inspection of the linkage elements: auxiliary switch position indicator
f) Inspection of contactors
g) Functional test OPEN coil 1:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN  coil 1  contact seperation= 20 − 35 ms, but at max.  3 ms
deviation refering to measurment during commissioning)
h) Functional test OPEN coil 2:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN  coil 2  contact seperation= 20−5 ms, but at max.  3 ms
deviation refering to measurment during commissioning)
i) Functional test CLOSE coil:
(Time measurement: pulse output CLOSE  coil  contact= 40−65 ms, but at max.  3 ms deviation re
fering to measurment during commissioning)
j) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation

The operating diagrams and the technical data are listed in detail in chapter 7.2.3.

1HDG518714B 7.25
R58: 01.07.2015
7.2.2.2Replacement of interrupting chambers
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
Once the specified maximum numbers of current interruptions respectively operations has been reached, the inter
rupting chamber path needs to be changed. The exchange of the interrupting chamber requires accessing the cir
cuit breaker gas compartment.

DANGER Danger High voltage. Electrical hazard.

Cause During the work the enclosure has to be opened. For the
work the high voltage conductors have to be touched di
rectly.
Solution Deenergize circuit breaker with disconnectors on both
sides. Verify that circuit breaker is dead. Earth circuit
breaker on both sides. Secure against reconnection. Pro
vide protection against adjacent live parts.

Dismounting of the interrupting chambers

The assemble procedure is identiacal for 3pole and 1pole operating mechanisms because the operating mecha
nism is removed completely including cover and control cubicle. In the figure the 3pole operating mechanism is
shown
1. Deenergize circuit breaker on both sides with disconnectors, verify that circuit breaker is dead, earth cir
cuit breaker on both sides, secure against reconnection. Provide protection against adjacent live parts
2. Loosen six screws (1) from cover (2)
3. Remove cover (2)
4. Loosen nut (4) from coupling bolt (3)
5. Remove coupling bolt

Switching rod (6) is disconnected from inner lever (5).

6. Repeat work desribed in items 2. to 5. for other two poles

1HDG518714B 7.26
R58: 01.07.2015 1 5 3 4
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H) 2
6

1 − Screws (6 parts) 3 − Coupling bolt 5 − Inner lever

2 − Cover 4 − Nut 6 − Switching rod
Figure7.23: Remove coupling between interrupting chamber and operating mechanism

1HDG518714B 7.27
R58: 7.
01.07.2015
Attach control cubicle (1) using lifting accessories with sufficient capacity to crane. Adjust tension of the
Modules− lifting
Circuitaccessories in a way that after loosening the screws the crane carries the weight of the control cu
Breaker (145H)
bicle without movement
8. Make sure that support (4) has been attached. This support carries the weight of the assembly after the
screws have been loosened
9. Loosen four screws (5).
Two screws are not shown in the picture because the are on the opposite side of the enclosure
10. Loosen 18 screws (3)
11. Remove cover (2) together with control cubicle (1) from circuit breaker

1 − Control cubicle 3 − Screws (18 parts)

2 − Cover 4 − Screws (4 parts)
Figure7.24: Removal of control cubicle with cover

1HDG518714B 7.28
R58: 12.
01.07.2015
Loosen four screws (1)
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
13. Remove field grading ring (2)
14. Attach lifting tool instead of the field grading ring
15. Attach lifting tool to crane
16. Attach balancing weight to lifting tool at such a position, so that it is in balance to the interrupting chamber
17. Loosen conductors between interrupting chamber and barrier insulators
18. Pull interrupting chamber carefully out of the enclosure

1 − Screw (4 parts) 2 − Field grading ring 3 − Interrupting chamber

Table7.22: Removal of interrupting chamber

1HDG518714B 7.29
R58: 01.07.2015
Installation of interrupting chambers
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
1. Install conductors (2) to interrupting chamber (Figure7.25)
(torque 75Nm)
2. Pull opering rod (4) carefully out of interrupting chamber (1) into direction OFF until block (Figure7.25)
3. Install lifting tool instead of the field grading ring (8)
4. Fix lifting tool with interrupting chamber to crane
5. Put interrupting chamber into circuit breaker enclosure
6. Fix bolts to straight conductors belongin to flanges (torque 75Nm)
7. Remove lifting tool
8. Install field grading ring (8) to interrupting chamber
9. Move operating rod (4) of interrupting chamber into position ON (Figure7.25)
(use adjusting gauge or adjust dimension A (Figure7.25) between end of operating rod and end of inter
rupting chamber
10. During the following procedure make sure that the direction of movement of operating rod (4) is in line with
the alignment of the threaded holes for the conductors (7) (Figure7.25) − if this is not the case, move the
operating rod (4) with slighly countered eye bolt (6) into the adequate direction!

3
3

2
1 8

4
DIrection of move
ment to be checked

2
5 6
3 Dimension A: 265 mm + 1 mm

1 − Interrupting chamber 4 − Opering rod 7 − Threaded holes for conductors

2 − Conductor 5 − Nut 8 − Field grading ring
3 − Bolt with washer 6 − Eye bolt
Figure7.25: Interrupting chamber in position ON (CLOSED)

1HDG518714B 7.210
R58: 11.
01.07.2015
Adjust length of eye bolt with reference to upper edge of circuit breaker enclosure at dimension B
Modules− (Figure7.26)
Circuit Breakeror(145H)
use installation tool,
Attach Loctite Nr. 241 to bolt and fix at torque 100 Nm+10%
12. Pull operating rod (8) carefully with adjusted eye bolt into direction OFF (Figure7.26)
13. Put new oring between circuit breaker enclosure and circuit breaker cover
14. Install circuit breaker cover with control cubicle. Tighten bolts at specified torque
15. Loosen spanner nut (7)
With 1pole operating mechanism loosen three spannuer nuts
16. Attach eye bolt (9) with coupling bolt to inner lever (5). Tighten both parts of the coupling bolt at specified
torque (Figure7.26). With 1pole operating mechanism repeat for each pole
17. Move interrupting chambers into position ON (Figure7.26): Dimension C
(Dimension between upper edge of shaft enclosure and upper edge of eye bolt).
With 1pole operating mechanism repeat for each pole

2
6

1
3 4

Dimension B:

80,5 mm
±0,5 mm

Dimension C:
151 mm
Tolerance: +0,5 mm
−1,5 mm
1 − Upper edge eye bolt 5 − Inner lever 9 − Eye bolt
2 − Upper edge shaft enclosure 6 − Outer lever
3 − Center coupling bolt 7 − Spanner nut
4 − Upper edge circuit breaker en 8 − Operating rot
closure
Figure7.26: Adjustment of interrupting chamber

1HDG518714B 7.211
R58: 01.07.2015
Coupling with operating mechanism
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
The operating must be in position ON (CLOSED) for coupling of operating mechanism. Interrupting chambers must
also be in position ON (CLOSED) (Dimension C, Figure7.26). Adjust spanner nut (7) so that eye bolt can be
coupled with coupling bolt to outer lever (6). Do not move blasting cylinder and operating mechanism out of posi
tion ON (CLOSED). Do not move inner lever (5) with coupled operating rot. With 1pole operating mechanism repeat
for each pole.

Check of interrupting chamber stroke

After installation of interrupting chambers check the interrupting chamber stroke:

For this switch the interrupting chamber by moving the slider of the operating mechanism manually into position
OFF (OPEN). The dimension between upper edge of shaft enclosure (2) and upper edge of eye bolt (1) is 41mm
(Tolerance: +0,5 mm − 1,5 mm) instead of 151 mm (Figure7.26).

Thus an interrupting chamber stroke of 110 mm results (Tolerance: ±2 mm).

1HDG518714B 7.212
R58: 01.07.2015
7.2.2.3Commissioning after overhaul
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
Fill gas compartments with SF6.

After conclusion of all works associated with the overhaul a shortened commissioning test has to be performed.:
a) Functional test OPEN coil 1:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN  coil 1  contact seperation= 20 − 35 ms, but at max.  3 ms
deviation refering to measurment during commissioning)
b) Functional test OPEN coil 2:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN  coil 2  contact seperation= 20−5 ms, but at max.  3 ms
deviation refering to measurment during commissioning)
c) Functional test CLOSE coil:
(Time measurement: pulse output CLOSE  coil  contact= 40−65 ms, but at max.  3 ms deviation re
fering to measurment during commissioning)
d) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation

The circuit breaker shall only be operated when filled with SF6 at least to the mi-
NOTICE nimum functional pressure!

1HDG518714B 7.213
R58:
7.2.301.07.2015
Technical data
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
Table7.23: Technical data

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/123 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase - earth) kV 350 550 650

Power frequency withstand voltage (phase - earth) kV 175 230 275

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

Normal current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150

Peak current / Short-circuit making current kA 80 (at 31,5 kA) and 100 (at 40 kA)

Short time current kA 31,5 / 40

Duration of short circuit s 3

Breaking speed (VOFF) (1) m/s 4,8 − 5,8

Breaking time (tOFF) (1) ms 22 − 38

Total breaking time (tOFF + tarc max.) ms 43 − 59

Making speed (VON) 3-pole operating mechanism (1) m/s 3,5

Making speed (VON) 1-pole operating mechanism (1) m/s 3,6

Making time (tON) (1) ms 40 − 65

Operating sequence - O − 0,3 sec − CO − 3 min − CO

Power frequency withstand voltage auxiliary circuits kV 2

SF6 minimum functional pressure / Filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600 / 700

SF6 filling weight kg 37

Weight with operating mechanism and support structure kg approx. 1450

1) Definition according to IEC 62 271100
Values within the tolerance range are for all operating conditions:
− from minimum supply voltage and minimum spring tension
to maximum supply voltage and maximum spring tension
− SF6 gas pressure at blocking limit as during making and breaking tests (*blocking pressure 600 kPaabs)
− Travel time diagram see Figure7.27
− Determination of speed is between travel range limits:
ON: 70mm − 56mm
OFF: 70mm − 34mm

1HDG518714B 7.214
R58: 01.07.2015
Guaranteed values according to IEC 62271100
Modules− Circuit
Table 7.2-4: Breakervalues
Guaranteed (145H)according to IEC 62271-100

Test I RRRV Uc t2/(t3)

kA KV/ms kV ms

Terminal fault, test duty:

− T 10 4 6,0 272 45
− T 30 12 5,0 266 225
− T 60 24 3,0 266 88
− T 100s 40 2,0 249 267
− T 100a 40 2,0 249 267

Out of phase condition (OoP) 10 1,67 370 534

Shortline fault L75 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)

− source side 30 2,0 166 177
− line side 6,0

Shortline fault L90 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)

− source side 36 2,0 166 177
− line side 7,2

Capacitive currents
− overhead line 50 A
− cable 160 A

1HDG518714B 7.215
R58: 01.07.2015
Operating diagram circuit breaker
Modules− Circuit Breaker (145H)
Tolerance ranges of making and breaking times are for all operating conditions of supply voltage and spring tension
of operating mechanism (Figure7.27).
Admissible differences of making and breaking times of 3 poles tON and tOFF v 3 ms.

INFORMATION For COoperation with a continuously active OPEN command a minimum stroke of
the chamber of 105mm is permissible.

OPEN CLOSE Pulse on

CLOSE so
lenoid

Contact making
(arcing contact)

tCLOSE
Pulse on
OPEN so
lenoid

tOPEN
t10−19
Contact separation
(arcing contact)

Chamber stroke (mm)

OPEN Timing of auxiliary switch contacts CLOSE

Operating angle 105°

Contacts 01 − 182
10±5°
Contacts 83 − 184
95±5°
Contacts 05 − 06
20±5°
Contacts 10 − 19
20±5° 20±5°
Main contact

* The contact making of the contacts 01 − 182 is adjusted to 10±5° for circuit breaker
end position CLOSE
Figure7.27: Operating diagram circuit breaker

1HDG518714B 7.216
R58: 01.07.2015
Information on materials for disposal
Modules−
Table7.25:Circuit Breaker
Material of GIS (145H)
parts

GIS parts Weight Material

Non-ferrous metal

Electronic parts
Filter material
Ferrous metal

Porcellaine/
Total weight

Oil, grease
Cast resin
Ceramics
Al metal

Plastics
SF6
Persentage refering to total weight in % per weight:
kg kg
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = Depending on type

Circuit breaker (145H) 1450 37 F F f F F f f

* Al metal = Aluminum

1HDG518714B 7.217
7.3 Circuit−breaker operating mechanism HMB−1 7.3

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.31

7.3.1 Functional description
The circuit−breaker operating mechanism (6) is installed on top of the circuit−breaker enclosure (3) in its own hous
ing(2). The operating mechanism can be accessed by opening cover (1). The cover is fixed with several fasten
ers(4). The fasteners have a lug to attach a padlock. The switching position of the circuit−breaker is indicated by
position indicator (5).

4
6
4
1
4

4
4

2
4

5
3

1 − Cover 4 − Fasteners
2 − Housing 5 − Position indicator
3 − Circuit−breaker enclosure 6 − Circuit−breaker operating mechanism
Figure7.31: Circuit−breaker operating mechanism

Accessing the circuit−breaker operating mechanism

WARNING Hazard Crushing hands due to fast moving parts of the circuit−
breaker operating−mechanism.
Cause When cover (1) is opened fast moving parts of the circuit−
breaker are accessible. Tripping the circuit−breaker can
occur automatically without warning.
Action Before starting any work put the operating mechanism out
of service.

For accessing the operating mechanism loosen fasteners (4). Take cover (1) off carefully.

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.32

Modules of operating mechanism components

The modular design and the main components of the operating mechanism type HMB:

The modules are:

− Charging module
− Storage module
− Working module
− Control module
− Monitoring module

The technical concept of the circuit breaker operating mechanism achieves a compact design by combining the
mechanical energy storage in disc springs and the hydromechanical operating and control principles.

The force of the disc spring assembly acts on a storage piston. On the storage piston, the mechanical energy of
spring force and spring travel are converted to pressure and volume. The power transmission (oil column) between
the highpressure store and the operating cylinders serves as a quickly switching changeover variator for the
CLOSE and OPENoperation and besides it enables a simple setting of the switching speeds by means of the
throttle screws.

The operating mechanism control and the energy transmission are based on the fieldproven structural elements of
the hydromechanical operating technology such as the highpressure pump, storage piston, changeover valves as
well as an operating piston with an integrated end position damping.

For the HMB circuitbreaker operating mechanism, an easytoinstall and servicefriendly,modulardesign has been
chosen, integrating the control and operating functions in aluminium modules. The circuit breaker operating mecha
nism do not have any pipework. All modules are interconnected by means of flanges in a modular design.

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.33

 3

1
4

11

15

5
14
12
13
7

6 2

8
10

1 − Operating piston (working module) 9 − High pressure connector (metering connection)

2 − Pump motor 10 − Oil drain screw
3 − Storage unit (storage module) 11 − Low pressure tank
4 − Disk spring assembly 12 − Oil gauge glass
5 − Low pressure connector 13 − Change over valve (control module)
6 − Spring tension indicator 14 − Spring travel switch (monitoring module)
7 − Pressure release lever 15 − Close position interlock (optional)
8 − Pump unit (charging module)
Figure7.32: Modular design and main components

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.34

7.3.2 Commissioning
The commissioning protocols of the circuitbreaker concerning the operating mechanism shall be observed. Prior to
the commissioning, visual checks according to the commissioning protocols shall be performed.

NOTICE Hazard Damage of the pump motor.

Cause The pump motor of the operating mechanism is not suit

able for continuous operation and can overheat.
Action Charge operating mechanism only with 20 CO−operations
per hour at maximum.

NOTICE Hazard Damage of interrupting chambers or operating mechanism

during switching with insufficient SF6 filling pressure.
Cause During switching without SF6 no sufficient counterpressure
(which interacts with the operating mechanism force) is
built up in the switching chamber.
Action Ensure before switching that the circuit breaker is filled
with SF6 at least at minimum functional pressure.

INFORMATION The on−site test protocols of the circuitbreaker concerning the operating mecha
nism shall be observed.

All adjustments are already made and fixed in the factory. Readjustments need not to be done during the commis
sioning.

Functional tests shall be performed after the completion of the commissioning work and immediately before the
start of the regular operation and after maintenance work as well. Functional tests may only be performed when the
circuitbreaker is disconnected from the high voltage system, there is at least blocking pressure of the SF6 gas and
the disc springs are tensioned.

Functional tests may only be performed when the circuitbreaker is disconnected from the high voltage system,
there is at least minimum functional pressure in the circuit−breaker gas compartment and the disk springs are ten
sioned.
1. Prior to the commissioning, perform visual checks according to the commissioning protocols
2. Tension the disk spring assembly of the operating mechanism
3. Switch on and off manually several times the operating mechanism coupled with the circuitbreaker
4. Check the monitoring functions of the spring travel switch and the auxiliary switch

Prior to switching on the pump motor, the changeover valve shall be switched to the OPEN position. For this press
the rubber cap of the OPENsolenoid with your thumb. Thereby it is prevented that the changeover valve stands in
an intermediate position while the operating mechanism is unpressurized and the disk spring assembly cannot be
tensioned (pressure cannot be built up).

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.35

Manually operating the operating mechanism (slow switching operations)

Slow switching operations do not represent any inservice operations. If nevertheless slow switching operations
must be performed, they shall only be performed by personnel authorized for this.

WARNING Hazard Danger to life caused by incorrect switching operations.

Cause During manual operation of the operating mechanism on

the changeover valve all electrical interlocks are cancelled.
Action The circuit breaker must be disconnected and earthed be
fore any manual operation of the operating mechanism.
Observe imperatively the safety informations in chapter
Gasinsulated Switchgear in section Safety Informations.
According to IEC62271100 manual triggering shall be
used only for maintenance and emergency operation on a
dead circuit.

It is possible to trigger the circuitbreaker by hand via the hand plungers of the changeover valve (Figure7.33).
A manual triggering serves only to check the reliability performance in case of servicing or maintenance work and
does not represent any normal operational case. The circuit breaker shall only be operated if the disk spring assem
bly is tensioned and the SF6 gas compartment of the circuit breaker is filled with SF6 at least with blocking pressure.

1 − CLOSE coil
2 − OPEN coil
Figure7.33: Changeover valve

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.36

Adjusting the operating speeds

The operating speeds of the operating mechanism are preset already in the factory. A resetting or readjustment is
only necessary in exceptional cases.

The operating speeds for the CLOSE and OPENoperation can be adjusted independently of each other with the
throttle screws available on the operating mechanism.

The operating speeds may only be adjusted when the disc spring assembly is untensioned. For this release the
pressure release screw and untension the disc spring assembly slowly by lowering the system pressure.

Loosen the locknut (2) of the throttle screw (1) and adjust the operating speed by turning the throttle screw
(Figure7.34). The operating speed diminishes when the throttle screw (1) is turned right and increases when it is
turned left.

After the adjustment retighten the locknut (2).

1 − Throttle screw
2 − Locknut
Figure7.34: Throttle scews

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.37

7.3.3 Operation
The chapter below contains instructions for the triggering and the operation of the circuit breaker operating
mechanism.

Pump starts and checks for internal tightness

The gaskets and valves used provide maximum technical tightness. Minimum leakages on metallic sealing seats
may cause minimum losses of spring tension, which are compensated by automatic pump starts.

Different operating mechanism − even from one delivery − may show statistically caused different amounts of pump
starts per day. This does not affect the life cycle of the operating mechanism.

Up to 10 pump starts per day are permissible, even when the breaker is not operated. With more than 10 pump
starts per day the operating mechanism shall be monitored.

INFORMATION Upon more than 20 pump starts per day the manufacturer shall be contacted.
Please find our contact address in the product manual in chapter Gasinsulated
Switchgear in section Contact.

When determining the pump start numbers the pump starts caused by switching operations (CLOSE or OPEN)
shall be deducted from the total number of the pump starts. All specifications refer to the monthly avarage.

The leak test shall be done during a period of at least eight hours in the operating positions CLOSE and OPEN. The
test procedure is to bring the breaker into the corresponding position and to tension the disc spring assembly; to
prevent an automatic pump start by disconnecting the motor supply conductor or by switching off the miniature
circuitbreaker in the motor circuit.

The following data shall be recorded in the test protocol:

− Time
− Difference of the spring travel (measure changes as per Figure7.35)

The spring tension may diminish by 30 mm per 24 hours (with switchedoff pump motor).

Figure7.35: Measuring the internal tightness

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.38

7.3.4 Maintenance
Putting out of service

CAUTION Hazard Risk of squashing between the disk springs of the disk
spring assembly (3, Figure7.36) during automatic start of
the pump motor.
Cause By starting the pump motor the disk spring assembly is
tensioned.
Action Disconnect the electrical motor connectors or switch off
the miniature circuitbreaker.

CAUTION Hazard In the area of the disk spring assembly and the movable
parts the risk of squashing is given.
Cause The disk spring assembly (3, Figure7.36) releases in direc
tion of the arrow.
Action Ensure, that no parts of the body or tools are located in the
area of the disk spring assembly.

When doing maintenance work on the operating mechanism, the circuitbreaker shall be put out of service.
1. Disconnect the electrical motor connectors or switch off the miniature circuitbreaker
2. Remove spring cotter (1) (Figure7.36)
3. Move pressure release lever (2) in direction of the arrow

The disk spring assembly (3) releases in direction of the arrow.

1 3

1 − Spring cotter
2 − Pressure release lever
3 − Disk spring assembly
Figure7.36: Releasing the disk spring assembly

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.39

Checks

The operating mechanism operates to a large extent maintenancefree. Occasional checks are however recom
mended and serve to maintain its dependability. Table7.31 gives an overview of all necessary maintenance
actions.
Table7.31: Maintenance plan

Check Maintenance

Function to check Before commissioning, During contact

after manintenance Occasionally Every 8 years inspections on the
work circuit−breaker

Oil level check check check check

Carbon brushes check − check check

Collector − − check check

Wiring check − check check

Terminals − − check check

Auxiliary switch − − check check

Auxiliary switch, − −
check lubricate**
kinematic system

Charging time − − check check

Tightness check check check check

*) Prior to commissioning, check the carbon brushes for seat. Replace the carbon brushes if their length v 11 mm.
**) Relubricate the openings in the auxiliary switch straps after 5000 operating cycles with special grease NBT400107P0001.

Tightening torques for screws

INFORMATION Be aware that the tightening torques specified in this section are only for the circuit−
breaker operating mechanism. The tightening torques for the GIS are specified in
Chapter Installation section Installation of the GIS.

As far as no other values have been indicated in this section, the tightening torques given in the table below shall
apply.

Prior to the mounting, slightly lubricategrease the screws ( 0,14).

Table7.32: Tightening torques for the circuit−breaker operating mechanism

Thread Steel screw, 8.8 Screw A2−70 or A4−70 Thread or

diameter in mm thread in steel thread in steel thread insert
Nm Nm in aluminium

M6 10 8 6

M8 25 20 14

M10 49 38 26

M12 86 67 45

M16 210 148 100

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.310

Oil level

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are filled in the factory with a hydraulic oil quantity comprising an oil re
serve, too. If the hydraulic oil is visible in the oil gauge glass with a fully tensioned disc spring assembly there is
enough hydraulic oil available to perform the switching operations (Figure7.37).

Use only oil listed in Table7.33.

An insufficient level can be corrected by refilling via the lowpressure connector.

INFORMATION Only use filtered oil (purity level ISO 4406−13/10) for filling.

max.=middle
min.=visible

Figure7.37: Oil level in the oil gauge glass in mounting position, operating mechanism tensioned

Checking the carbon brushes

The collectorand the carbon brushes shall be checked after approx. 8years. The carbon brushes are wear parts to
replace when their length has diminished below 11mm (Figure7.38).

1
w11

1 − Carbon brushes
2 − Pump motor
Figure7.38: Pump motor

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.311

Spare parts

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are to a large extent wearfree. The manufacturer does not recommend
any stocking of spare parts. Upon an express request of the user spare parts kits
− seals
− electrical spare parts
− hydraulic spare parts

can be supplied; the spare parts should be replaced only by authorized personnel.

When ordering spare parts, read the serial and identification number of the operating mechanism off the nameplate
and communicate them.

Consumables

The consumables necessary for maintenance are listed and approved below.
Table7.33: Consumables

Consumable ABB designation Part number

Hydraulic oil
Esso Univis HVI 13 Hydraulic oil bundle 1 liter 1HDH114000R0001
(Manufacturer: Esso AG) Hydraulic oil bundle 5 liter 1HDH114000R0005

Lubricating grease NBT400107P0001

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.312

7.3.5 Technical data
Table7.34: VAC Universal motor

Rated values motor V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Tolerance % +10/−15

Motor power W 600

Motor startup current A 40 25

Continuous current A 9 4,5

Operating mode − shorttime operation ED = 10%

Table7.35: VDC Compound motor

Rated values motor V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Tolerance % +10/−15

Motor power W 600

Motor startup current A 30 20

Continuous current A 6 3

Operating mode − shorttime operation ED = 10%

Table7.36: Charging times

Rated values V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Operating sequence − OCO

Charging times, tolerance % ± 15

Closing s 5

Opening s 6

CLOSE/OPENoperation s 11

OPEN/CLOSE/OPENoperation s 17

Complete store s 30

Table7.37: Opening and closing coils

Coil ratings V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Tolerance ONsolenoid % +10/−15

Tolerance OFFsolenoid % +10/−30

Solenoid power W 300

Number of ONsolenoids − 1

Number of OFFsolenoids − 2

If the operating mechanism is equipped with an anticondensation heater, it is vented. The technical data of the
heater is listed in chapter Modules in section Anticondensation Heater.

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.313

Table7.38: Auxiliary switches

Auxiliary switch ratings

Insulation voltage V AC380/DC450

Thermal current A 25

Short circuit withstand capability A 1000(0,3s)

Switching capacity 110 ... 125 VDC A 6(L/R = 20ms)

Switching capacity 220 ... 250 VDC A 4(L/R = 20ms)

Connection − Plugin connection 4,8x0,8

Contacting principle − Sliding contacts

Contacts − Silver plated, self cleaning

Number of contacts (24 poles) −

− Normally closed 11(6)
− Normally open 11(7)
− Wipers 1
− Leading normally open 1

Information on materials for disposal

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death by breaking parts which can fly
away with high energy.
Cause The disk spring assembly is mechanically precharged with
high tension forces. Wrong disassembly can result in me
chanical overload of parts.
Action Disassembly of the disk spring column is only permitted by
authorized personnel according to ABB procedure and
safety regulation. Contact ABB for disposal.

Table7.39: Material fractions for circuit breaker operating mechanism

GIS component Weight Material

Porcellain/ceramics

Electronicparts
Ferrousmetals

Filtermaterial
Total weight

NEMetal*

Oil,grease
Castresin
Almetal*

Plastics
SF6

Fraction compared to total part weight in % per

kg kg weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + =dependant on type

Operating mechanism HMB1 97 − F F f f f f f f f

1HDG518701A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.314

7.4 Integrated current transformer 7.4

1HDG518742C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.41

7.4.1 Functional description

The figure (Figure7.41) shows the integrated current transformer in the circuit−breaker. The current transformer
cores (1) are integrated into the gas compartment of the circuit breaker enclosure (5) and can
be installed at any exit flange with diameter 735 mm of the circuit−breaker. For this an extra cast part (current trans
former enclosure) is used (6).

The integrated current transformer is delivered in variants with or without terminals. In both variants up to 60 secon
dary conductors can be connected to the cast−resin bushing insulator (3).

Variant with terminals

The secondary conductors (2) of the current transformer cores (1) are conducted out of the SF6 gas compartment
via an cast−resin bushing insulator (3) and are led to the terminals in the terminal box (4).

Variant without terminals

The secondary conductors are lead from the bushing insulator directly into the local control cubicle. There are not
extra terminals.

6
1

1 − Current transformer cores 3 − Bushing insulator 5 − Circuit-breaker enclosure

2 − Secondary conductors 4 − Terminal box 6 − Current transformer enclosure
Figure 7.4-1: Integrated current transformer

1HDG518742C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.42

7.4.2 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Electric shock due to induced voltages.

Cause If the secondary conductors of current transformers are

operated without burden dangerous high voltage can be
induced and conducted to the terminals.
Action All terminals are short−circuited and earthed for shipping.
The variant without terminals has an earthing plate
installed onto the bushing insulator (3). During the high
voltage test and the measurement of the voltage drop of
the main current path all terminals shall be short−circuited
and earthed or be cabled according to the secondary cir
cuit diagrams. After the tests and before energizing these
short−circuit connection shall be removed.

Before energizing a bay the following work shall be carried out:

1. Make sure that all current transformers are connected according to the secondary circuit diagrams
2. Make sure that the earthing of the secondary terminals of the current transformer are done according to the rele-
vant circuit diagrams

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

7.4.3 Maintenance

If the terminal box is equipped with an anti−condensation heater:

During the inspection every eight years check the functionality of the anti−condensation heater and of the ventilation
openings in the terminal boxes. Find the exact description of the inspection of the anti−condensation heater in
chapter Anti−condensation heater.

1HDG518742C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.43

7.4.4 Technical data
Table 7.4-1: Integrated current transformer

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to eart- kV 650

325 550
h)

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage kV

140 230 275
(phase to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100

Short-time withstand current kA  40

Duration of short-circuit s 3

Weight without SF6 kg *

Dimensions mm 593,5 x 534

* The weight of the integrated current transformer can vary. The weight depends on the number and specification of the ap
plied cores which is a project specific feature.

Information about materials for disposal

Table 7.4-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*

Cast resin
Al metal*

Plastics
Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Integrated current transformer ** − F F F F F

* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metal
** The weight of the integrated current transformer can vary. The weight depends on the number and specification of the ap
plied cores which is a project specific feature.

1HDG518742C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.44

7.5 Disconnector / earthing switch 7.5

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.51

7.5.1 Functional description

1 − Combined disconnector / earthing switch

2 − Operating mechanism
Figure 7.5-1: Combined disconnector / earthing switch with operating mechanism

Functional description of the device

The disconnector and the earthing switch are combined in one switching device (Figure7.51). The moving con
tacts can be switched into the three following positions for the disconnector or the earthing switch respectively:
− Disconnector ON (CLOSED)
− Disconnector OFF (OPEN) / earthing switch OFF (OPEN)
− Earthing switch ON (CLOSED)

The conductors (2) are fixed at the barrier insulators (1) (alternatively at a support insulator). The conductors (2) con
tain the fixed contacts (5) of the disconnector. The fixed contacts (3) of the earthing switch are fixed to the enclosure
of the module. Contact support (4) is fixed to barrier insulator (8) and carries the moving contact. The contact sup
ports are aligned in one row to provide the axis for the insulating shafts (6) which drive the moving contacts. The
operating mechanism generates a rotation which is lead through the rotary feedthrough (7) into the gas compart
ment. The insulating shafts (6) are connected to the feedthrough.

5
7
6 8

1
3

1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Fixed contact disconnector

2 − Conductor 6 − Insulating shaft
3 − Fixed contact earthing switch 7 − Rotary feedthrough
4 − Contact support with moving contact 8 − Barrier insulator
Figure 7.5-2: Main contacts of combined disconnector / earthing switch on busbar

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.52

In combination with the various available conductors and enclosure arrangements this layout can be used to realize
the following functional modules. The module can also be supplied without an earthing switch as a mere discon
nector :
− Busbar with integrated disconnector / earthing switch (shown in Figure 7.5-1)
− Line disconnector / earthing switch (shown in Figure 7.5-3)
− Sectionalizer

Figure7.53 shows a typical arrangement of a line disconnector / earthing switch. The line disconnector/earthing
switch is connected to the circuit−breaker via barrier insulator (1). Contact support (4) carries the moving contact.
The moving contact can be either switched to the fixed contact of the disconnector (5). Then the conductor (2) is
connected to the modules at flanges (1) and (8). Or the moving contakts can be switched to the earthing contacts
(3). Optionally these earthing contacts can be isolated from the enclosure for test purposes. At flange (9) the
counter contacts of the make−proof earthing switch are fixed.

This four−flange variant of the disconnector/earthing switch is also used to realize a sectionalizer disconnector/
earthing switch.

4
2

6 5

1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Fixed contact disconnector

2 − Conductor 6 − Insulating shaft
3 − Fixed contact earthing switch (optional optional 7 − Rotary feedthrough
isolated earthing contact) 8 − Barrier insulator
4 − Contact support with moving contact 9 − Flange for make−proof earthing switch
Figure 7.5-3: Line disconnector/earthing switch

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.53

Functional description of the operating mechanism

7 5 8 6 9

3
Earthing switch

1
Disconnector

1 − Interlocking switch 6 − Threaded spindle

2 − Rod for emergency manual operation 7 − Drive rod
3 − Position indicator 8 − Carrier
4 − Auxiliary contacts 9 − Operating mechanism motor
5 − Cam disk
Figure 7.5-4: Operating mechanism of the combined disconnector / earthing switch

The operating mechanism is normally motoroperated. Manual operation is possible in emergencies. The rotating
movement of the operating mechanism is transmitted through a threaded spindle (6) and a cam disk (5) via the drive
rod (7) onto the moving contacts (Figure7.54).

The combined disconnector/earthing switch has two operating mechanism motors(9), one for the disconnector
and one for the earthing switch. For manual emergency operation a hand crank can be attached to the rod (2) that
operates the threaded spindle (6).

The cam disk (5) is located between the threaded spindle (6) and the drive rod (7) of the moving contacts and is
actuated by a carrier (8). The cam disk (5) locks the device in the following end positions:
− Disconnector closed
− Disconnector open / earthing switch open (neutral position)
− Earthing switch closed

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.54

The cam disk (5) has the following functions (Figure7.54):
− Torque-free start-up of the operating mechanism
− End position locking
− End positioning

The motor current is interrupted by a limit switch.

When the device is manually operated, the interlocking switch (1) automatically disconnects the motor circuit.

The auxiliary contacts (4) and the position indicator (3) are linked to the operating rod(7).

All electrical connections are separated for the disconnector and the earthing switch and are connected with coded
plug connections.

7.5.2 Commissioning

Observe the general notes for commissioning in section Commissioning in subsection Tests for commissioning.

INFORMATION All works for commissioning are defined in the onsite protocol for commissioning
1HDG518680. These works shall be carried out during commissioning and shall be
recorded.

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.55

7.5.3 Operation

Manual operation of the switching device

WARNING Hazard Danger of switching error resulting in severe injury or

death.
Cause If the control voltage is not available the switching posi
tions of the installation are not interlocked anymore.
Switching the disconnector under load or switching the
earthing switch on short−circuit results in an internal arc.
Action The disconnector/earthing switch without available control
voltage shall only be operated by personnel which has
been particularly trained on this action using the necessary
tools.

NOTICE Hazard Damage of the mechanics of the operating mechanism.

Cause The attempt to switch from position disconnector ON im

mediately to position earthing switch ON or vice versa
without stopping in neutral position can damage the oper
ating mechanism.
Action Use only hand cranks with safety clutch. Always stop at
neutral position.

INFORMATION For a manual operation on the switching device the interlocking conditions must be
fulfilled (Locking). The switching position must be unlocked.

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.56

In emergencies the disconnector and the earthing switch can be operated locally directly on the device by means of
a hand crank. As soon as the hand crank is inserted, the motor circuit is automatically interrupted.

For manual operation of the disconnector/earthing switch the front cover has to be removed from the operating
mechanism (Figure7.56). The front cover is secured with 4 captive screws (4Nm).

1 2

1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 7.5-5: Operating mechanism with cover, switching contact in neutral position

1 2

1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 7.5-6: Operating mechanism after removal of its cover, switching contact in neutral position

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.57

Switching positions of interlocking slider

3 2 1 1 2 3

1 − Local manual control (hand crank): Local control with hand crank possible
2 − Interlock (electrically switchable) = Default setting: Local and remote control possible,
control with hand crank not possible
3 − Mechanically and electrically blocked
Figure 7.5-7: Switching positions of interlocking slider

Possible combinations of positions

Disconnector ON Earthing switch ON

Disconnector OFF Earthing switch OFF

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.58

Manual operation of the disconnector (Figure7.58)

3 1 2 4,5

1 − Locking bolt 4 − Cover

2 − Interlocking slider 5 − Blocking solenoid (not shown, behind 4)
3 − Opening
Figure 7.5-8: Operating elements disconnector (front view)

Precondition: Neutral Position

1. The earthing switch must be open
2. Optional: Remove padlock (if fitted), locking bolt retracts interlocking slider is in middle position
3. Move interlocking slider (2) in direction switching position local manual control until mechanical resistance
4. In case of existing control voltage:
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the operating personnel for remote control op-
eration for the further moving of the interlocking slider (2)

WARNING Hazard Danger of switching error resulting in severe injury or

death.
Cause If the control voltage is not available the switching posi
tions of the installation are not interlocked anymore.
Switching the disconnector under load or switching the
earthing switch on short−circuit results in an internal arc.
Action In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is
allowed only for specially trained personnel and can be
carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a)Remove cover (4) with tool
b)Unlock blocking solenoid (5) by pressing and hold
c)Move interlocking slider (2) on position local manual
control

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.59

 5. After release for the further moving move interlocking slider (2) until mechanical end stop for releasing the hand
crank opening (3) completely
6. Insert hand crank in opening (3)
7. Switch disconnector with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel
9. Remove hand crank
10. Tighten interlocking slider (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock (shackle diameter min. 8 mm)
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm

WARNING Hazard Danger of failure of position blocking.

Cause The shackle diameter of the padlock is crucial for the

function of the position interlocking.
Action Therefore, ONLY padlocks with a shackle diameter of 8 mm
shall be used!

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.510

Manual operation Earthing Switch (Figure7.59)

4,5 2 1 3

6 6

1 − Locking bolt 4 − Cover

2 − Interlocking slider 5 − Blocking solenoid (not shown, behind 4)
3 − Opening 6 − Padlock (shackle diameter min. 8 mm)
Figure 7.5-9: Operating Elements Earthing Switch (front view)

Precondition: Neutral Position

1. The disconnector must be open
(otherwise bring the disconnector into the OFF position first)
2. Optional: Remove padlock (6) (if fitted), locking bolt retracts (Figure 7.5-9)
3. Move interlocking slider (2) in direction switching position local manual control until mechanical resistance
4. In case of existing control voltage:
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the operating personnel for remote control op-
eration for the further moving of the interlocking slider (2)

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.511

 WARNING Hazard Danger of switching error resulting in severe injury or
death.
Cause If the control voltage is not available the switching posi
tions of the installation are not interlocked anymore.
Switching the disconnector under load or switching the
earthing switch on short−circuit results in an internal arc.
Action In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is
allowed only for specially trained personnel and can be
carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a)Remove cover (4) with tool
b)Unlock blocking solenoid (5) by pressing and hold
c)Move interlocking slider (2) on position local manual
control

5. After release for the further moving move interlocking slider (2) until mechanical end stop for releasing the hand
crank opening (3) completely
6. Insert hand crank in opening (3)
7. Switch earthing switch with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel
9. Remove hand crank
10. Tighten interlocking slider (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock (shackle diameter min. 8 mm)
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm

WARNING Hazard Danger of failure of position blocking.

Cause The shackle diameter of the padlock is crucial for the

function of the position interlocking.
Action Therefore, ONLY padlocks with a shackle diameter of 8 mm
shall be used!

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.512

Locking

It is possible to lock the disconnector/earthing switch electrically and mechanically both, in the open and in the
closed position.

In order to lock the disconnector/earthing switch, the cover must be removed from the operating mechanism
(Figure7.56).

INFORMATION After locking the device it can no longer be operated remotely or manually with the
hand crank.

Disconnector Earthing switch

1 2 2 1

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Interlocking slider
Figure 7.5-10: Operating elements disconnector and earthing switch (front view)

Precondition: Neutral Position

1. Optional: Remove padlock (if fitted)  locking bolt retracts
2. Move interlocking slider (2) by pushing in position locked

INFORMATION In a few cases the hand crank shaft remains in a disadvantageous angular position
and the interlocking slider can only be moved applying high forces into position
locked. In such a case refer to chapter Using the handle for hand crank interlock
ing.

3. Pull locking bolt (1) and fit padlock (shackle diameter min. 8 mm)

WARNING Hazard Danger of failure of position blocking.

Cause The shackle diameter of the padlock is crucial for the

function of the position interlocking.
Action Therefore, ONLY padlocks with a shackle diameter of 8 mm
shall be used!

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.513

Using the handle for hand crank interlocking

Disconnector
1. Move interlocking slider (1, Figure 7.5-11) to the right
2. Insert handle for hand crank interlocking with tip (1, Figure 7.5-12) ahead into opening (2, Figure 7.5-11) with
orientation towards the position indicator.
Insert handle (2, Figure 7.5-12) up to the edge.
If necessary turn handle slightly
3. Turn handle clockwise until stop
4. Remove handle from opening

Earthing switch
1. Move interlocking slider (3, Figure 7.5-11) to the left
2. Insert handle for hand crank interlocking with tip (1, Figure 7.5-12) ahead into opening (4, Figure 7.5-11) with
orientation towards the position indicator.
Insert handle (2, Figure 7.5-12) up to the edge.
If necessary turn handle slightly
3. Turn handle counterclockwise until stop
4. Remove handle from opening

Interlocking sliders (1, Figure7.511) or (3) can be moved with low resistance into position locked. If necessary use
the handle with borehole (3, Figure7.512) ahead as prolongation of the stud at the interlocking slider.

Disconnector 2 4 Earthing switch

1 3

1 − Interlocking slider 3 − Interlocking slider

2 − Opening 4 − Opening
Figure 7.5-11: Operating elements disconnector/earthing switch (front view)

2
3 1

1 − Tip
2 − Edge
3 − Borehole
Figure 7.5-12: Handle for hand crank interlocking

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.514

Hand crank

For manual operation of the disconnector/earthing switch a hand crank (1, Figure7.513) has been supplied. In
case the access to the disconnector/earthing switch operating mechanism from the front is restricted, a hand crank
with a cardan joint (2) is optionally available.

The handle for hand crank interlocking (3) is used against high mechanical forces during operation of the interlok
king slider during interlocking of the operation by hand crank with a padlock.

A hexagon socket screw key (4) is supplied for loosening the front cover screws.

3
4

1 − Hand crank fixed (Standard) 3 − Handle for hand crank interlocking

2 − Hand crank with cardan joint (option) 4 − Hexagon socket screw key (Allen key)
Figure 7.5-13: Hand crank and accessories

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.515

7.5.4 Maintenance

SF6gas insulated switchgear is virtually maintenancefree. Only the works listed in the following Table7.51 need to
be performed after the given time period or the given number of switching operations.
Table 7.5-1: Maintenance schedule

Works to be performed after

Component Disconnector Earthing switch

8 years
5000 CO 1000 CO

Motor Inspection Inspection Inspection

Gear box Inspection Inspection Inspection

Auxiliary switches Inspection Inspection Inspection

Solenoids Inspection Inspection Inspection

Main contacts − Inspection Inspection

SF6gas adsorber − Replacement Replacement

Inspection of operating mechanism

WARNING Hazard Danger in case of switching disconnector under load or

earthing switch on short−circuit.
Cause Maintenance involves the operation of the disconnector /
earthing switch.
Action De−energize disconnector / earthing switch before mainte
nance.

The following checks shall be performed during inspection:

− Mechanical function test of the operating mechanism with hand crank (OPEN-CLOSE)
− Inspection of the motor limit switches, the hand crank interlocking and of the position indicators
− Test of the neutral and the end positions
− Test of the hand crank and the end position locking
− Visual inspection of the electrical connections
− Electrical function test of the operating mechanism (OPEN-CLOSE)
− Measurement of the motor current at rated supply voltage
− Function test of the anti-condensation heaters (if installed)

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.516

Maintenance of the current path

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS in table Tightening torques for non−greased screws.

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.517

Dismounting the disconnector/earthing switch operating mechanism

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause During the work the enclosure is opened. The installation

work includes active parts which are under high voltage
during operation.
Action Before starting the work, de−energize the switchgear sec
tion, check for absence of voltage, secure against re−con
nection and earth working location on both sides.

INFORMATION Pay attention to the potential spring mounted in the insulating rod when pulling out
the rotary feedthrough. This potential spring needs to be put back in place when
reinstalling the operating mechanism.

This procedure describes the work for the busbar variant of the disconnector/earthing switch. The line disconnec
tor/earthing switch is treated in a similar manner. The barrier insulator which stays at the module here is the insula
tor(1) shown in Figure7.53.
1. Deenergize busbar module on all sides and earth
2. Switch operating mechanism in middle position (OFF)
3. Remove the heater leads (4)
4. Remove the connectors from the plug connections (3) (Figure 7.5-14)
5. Remove the four securing screws (1) from the operating mechanism
6. Lift the complete operating mechanism (2) off the enclosure

1 − Screws 3 − Connection plug

2 − Operating mechanism 4 − Heater leads
Figure 7.5-14: Dismounting the operating mechanism

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.518

 7. Release and remove the six screws (1) of the rotary feedthrough (2)
8. Pull rotary feedthrough (3) inclusive insulating rod behind out of flange. Take special care of the potential spring
between rotary feedthrough and insulating rod and later between all insulating rods. The potential springs are
shown in Figure 7.5-21 and Figure 7.5-23
9. Retain parts for re-assembly
10. Open transversal insertion module and disconnect busbar module on both sides. For this, see Installation instruc-
tion in chapter Installation in section Bay coupling

1 − Screws with washer

2 − Cover of rotary feedthrough
3 − Rotary feedthrough
Figure 7.5-15: Dismounting of the rotary feedthrough

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.519

Dismounting the busbar module from flange
1. Loosen nuts of flange connection (1) on the busbar side (insulator (2) remains at the flange of the adjacent modul-
e)
2. Move busbar enclosure (3) together with busbar insulator (4) out of the bolts of insulator (2)
3. As soon as the flange has moved out of the bolts, move busbar enclosure (3) approx. 50 mm into direction of the
open transversal installation module of the adjacent bay (see arrow in Figure 7.5-16)
4. Remove busbar enclosure (3) with barrier insulator (4) in direction of the arrow from the bay

1 − Flange connection
2 − Barrier insulator
3 − Busbar enclosure
4 − Barrier insulator
Figure 7.5-16: Dismounting the busbar module from flange

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.520

Replacing the moving contacts and spring contacts

NOTICE Hazard Partial discharge due to insufficient potential bonding.

Cause The electrical connection of the multiple−cog connection

between insulating shafts and drive shafts is insufficient.
Without extra potential bonding springs discharges can
occur.
Action Between all insulating shafts and multiple−cog shafts po
tential bonding springs are used. Do not forget to re−install
these.

1. Unfasten screw connections (1) of contact support

2. Dismount contact supports (2) from insulator
3. Place contact support onto clean working place. Make sure not to damage the paint on the contact support
4. Repeat the work for the other two contact supports

3 2

1 − Screwed connection
2 − Contact support
3 − Insulator
Figure 7.5-17: Replacement of moving contacts and spiral spring contacts

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.521

 5. Turn moving contact (1) with the cogged shaft (3) manually out of the contact support (2) (Figure 7.5-18)
6. Replace spiral spring contacts and guiding bands (4) in the contact support by new parts. During installation take
care that the spiral spring contacts have alternating alignment
7. Turn new moving contacts (5) into contact supports (6) with the cogged shaft
8. Move moving contacts (5, Figure 7.5-18) into mid−position. Make sure that marking on cog wheel is in alignment
with the center of the cog rod (Figure 7.5-19)

3
4
2 4 6

1 − Moving contact 4 − Spiral spring contacts and guiding band

2 − Contact support 5 − Moving contact (mid−position)
3 − Cogged shaft 6 − Contact support
Figure 7.5-18: Replacement of spiral spring contact and guiding bands in the contact supports

1 − Cog rod
2 − Marking
3 − Cog wheel
Figure 7.5-19: Adjusting mid position

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.522

 9. Replace spiral spring contacts (1) at all busbar conductors by new parts
10. Replace all spring contacts (2) of the earthing contact with new ones.

1 − Spiral spring contacts of busbar conductor

2 − Spiral spring contacts of earthing contact
Figure 7.5-20: Replacement of spiral spring contacts at busbar conductors and earthing contacts

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.523

Reinstallation of busbar

INFORMATION For reinstallation of the contact support an adjustment gauge is needed.

1. Install first contact support (1) to insulator

2. Insert potential spring (4a)
3. Attach insulating shaft (5a)
4. Insert potential spring (4b) into insulating shaft
5. Install second contact support (2) to the contact insert of the insulator
6. Insert potential spring (4c)
7. Attach insulating shaft (5b)
8. Insert potential spring (4d)
9. Install third contact support (3) to the contact insert of the insulator
10. Adjust position of all three contact supports with respect to the insulator using the adjustment gauge
11. Tighten screws at specified torque

4d

5b

4c

4b

5a

4a

1 − Contact support 4 − Potential spring

2 − Contact support 5 − Insulating shaft
3 − Contact support
Figure 7.5-21: Installation of contact supports

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.524

Reinstallation of busbar enclosure
1. Insert potential spring (1, Figure 7.5-23) into cogged shaft at contact support
2. Install busbar enclosure (1, Figure 7.5-22) with busbar insulator (2) to bay.
Follow the arrow in Figure 7.5-22, start with a displacement from center axis of approx. 50 mm

3
2

1 − Disconnector / earthing switch enclosure

2 − Busbar insulator
3 − Insulator of adjacent module
Figure 7.5-22: Install busbar enclosure

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.525

 3. Insert insulating shafts (2) at first pole
4. Screw potential spring (3) into cogged shaft of rotary feedthrough(4)
5. Insert rotary feedthrough (4), make sure that the slot of insulating shaft (2) fits
6. Insert new o−ring (5) together with cover (6) of the rotary feedthrough
7. Fix cover of rotary feedthrough with screws and washers (7) at specified torque
8. After installation of the rotary feedthrough use tool (tool no. 1HDI996057R0001, 1/2” socket key) and make 10
CO operations. Afterwards the torque at the rotary feedthrough (7) shall be p 40 Nm
9. Make sure that operating mechanism is in mid−position
10. Install operating mechanism. Make sure that operating mechanism as well as the moving contacts stay in mid−
position during installation
11. Operate disconnector/earthing switch into position disconnector CLOSED and position earthing switch CLOSED.
During the operations check the mid−position of the moving contacts through the open transversal insertion mod-
ule (protrusion of moving contacts with reference to the contact support max. 1,5 mm)
12. Couple busbar module at both sides. Refer to the instructions in chapter Installation section Bay coupling

1 − Potential spring 5 − O-ring

2 − Insulating shaft 6 − Cover of rotary feedthrough
3 − Potential spring 7 − Screws and washers
4 − Rotary feedthrough
Figure 7.5-23: Installation of rotary feedthrough

13. Carry out necessary gas handling

14. Loosen blocked disk spring packages (chapter Installation section Bay coupling)
15. Secure loose washers against vibration (chapter Installation section Bay coupling)

INFORMATION After completion of the overhaul work carry out an inspection procedure of the dis
connector/earthing switch.

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.526

7.5.5 Technical Data

Technical data of the device

Table 7.5-2: Disconnector / earthing switch

Rated Values kV 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 650

Lightning impulse withstand voltage across isolating kV 750

distance

Shorttime power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 275

Shorttime power frequency withstand voltage across kV 315

isolating distance

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

Rated current A 3150 (50 Hz)

3000 (60 Hz)

Peak current kA 104

Shorttime withstand current kA 40

Duration of short time current s 3

Power frequency withstand voltage for auxiliary circuits kV 2

SF6 minimum functional pressure/

kPa 520
filling pressure (at 20C)

SF6 filling pressure (at 20°C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6

(without transversalinstallation module)
− 3-flange 200
− 4-flange 210
kg
Weight without SF6
(with transversal installation module)
− 3-flange 250
− 4-flange 260

Weight of SF6filling
(withouttransversalinsstallationmodule)
− 3-flange 4
− 4-flange 5
kg
Weight of SF6filling
(with transversal installation module)
− 3-flange 6
− 4-flange 7

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.527

Technical data of the operating mechanism
Table 7.5-3: Motor with permanent magnet excitation

Ratings DC/AC V 60 110 125 220 250

Tolerance range % −15/+10 −15/+10 −28/+12 −15/+10 −15/+10

Standard* − IEC IEC ANSI IEC ANSI

Power W 150

Startup current A 15 12 12 6 6

Continuous current A 3 3 3 1,5 1,5

Operating mode − Shorttime operation S2 = 10sec

* IEC60694, ANSI C37.061987 & ANSI C37.331987

Table 7.5-4: Operating times for disconnector / earthing switch

Voltage DC (IEC) V 0,85 Un − 1,1 Un

Voltage DC (ANSI) V 0,72 Un − 1,12 Un

Closing time (contact making) ms

 2400

Opening time (contact separation) ms

 1500

Table 7.5-5: Motor runtime

Rating DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250

Disconnector ms
 3500

Earthing switch ms
 3500

Table 7.5-6: Contact stroke

Device Stroke

Disconnector mm 89 − 98

Earthing switch mm 89 − 98

INFORMATION If the operating mechanism is equipped with an anticondensation heater, it is

vented. The technical data of the heater are listed in chapter Modules in document
Anticondensation heater.

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.528

7.5.5.1 Interlocking switch
Table 7.5-7: Interlocking switch

Insulation ratings V AC 380, DC 220

Thermal current A 10

DCoperating current A 2 (L/R = 20ms)

Connection − plug connection 4,8 x 0,8

Contacting principle − snap mechanics, spring loaded

Contacts − silverplated, selfcleaning

7.5.5.2 Auxiliary switches

Table 7.5-8: Auxiliary switches

Insulation ratings V AC 380, DC 450

Thermal current A 25

Shortcircuit capability A 1000 (0,3 s)

Switching capacity DC 60 V A 9 (L/R = 20 ms)

Switching capacity DC 110...125 V A 3,5 (L/R = 20 ms)

Switching capacity DC 220...250 V A 2,5 (L/R = 20 ms)

Connection − plug connection 4,8 x 0,8

Contacting principle − wiping contacts

Contacts − silverplated, selfcleaning

Number of contacts disconnector

(34 poles for conventional switchgear − optional)
− normally closed 17
−
− normally open 13
− trailing normally closed 2
− leading normally open 2

Number of contacts disconnector

(22 poles for conventional switchgear)
− normally closed 12
−
− normally open 8
− trailing normally closed 1
− leading normally open 1

Number of contact earthing switch

(22 poles for conventional switchgear)
− normally closed 12
−
− normally open 8
− trailing normally closed 1
− leading normally open 1

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.529

7.5.6 Operating diagram
Insulating distance Full current carrying
reached capacity reached

Contact travel

Main contact

Auxiliary contact, NC
Auxiliary contact, NO

Figure 7.5-24: Schematic diagram of switching on the disconnector / earthing switch

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.530

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.5-9: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Disconnector/earthing switch 250 6 F f f f f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals

1HDG518717 B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.531

7.6 Insulated maintenance earthing switch 7.6

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.61

7.6.1 Functional description

The insulated maintenance earthing switch is an optional feature within the 4−flange disconnector/earthing switch
module (2). It provides access to the main current path of the de−energized and earthed GIS without any gashand
ling. During normal operation of the GIS the insulated maintenance earthing switch is used in the same way as a
conventional maintenance earthing switch. In the outdoor variant the access to the parts of the maintenance earth
ing switch is protected with cover (1).

Configuration during normal operation of the GIS

The fixed earthing contacts (7) are connected by three bushings (3) to the outside of the enclosure. Three earthing
conductors (5) are connected to short−circuit conductor (4) which connects all three phases outside the gas
compartment. The short−circuit conductor is fixed to the earthed disconnector / earthing switch enclosure.

Configuration with de−energized and earthed GIS for test purposes

Provided that the bay has been deenergized and earthed, the earthing conductors (5) can be temporarily removed
exclusively for testing purposes. This can be done individually for each phase. By that the fixed earthing contacts (7)
are insulated from earth. Tests at the three individual phases can be carried out. The test equipment can be con
nected to terminal (9) and has electrical connection via bushing (3), conductor (6) and moving contact (8) to the
main current path (10).

7
1 3

10

1 − Cover 6 − Conductor
2 − Feede−flange disconnector/earthing switch 7 − Fixed contact earthing switch
3 − Bushing 8 − Moving contact
4 − Short−circuit conductor 9 − Terminal
5 − Earthing conductor 10 − Main current path of GIS
Figure 7.6-1: 4−flange disconnector/earthing switch with insulated maintenance earthing switch

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.62

7.6.2 Installation work for test purposes

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause The earthing conductors connect the insulated earthing

contacts to the earthing system. If the earthing conductors
are removed high voltage can be conducted out of the en
closure.
Action De−energize and earth module with insulated earthing
switch and secure against re−connection before removing
the earthing conductors.

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause If the maintenance earthing switch is used at the busbar,

high−voltage potential can be conducted from busbars
which have not been de−energized and earthed to the
working location.
Action In case of a maintenance earthing switch at the busbar de−
energize and earth all busbars before removing the earth
ing conductors. Alternatively measuring systems can be
used with which the earthing conductors need not to be
removed. Contact ABB for further information.

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS in table Tightening torques for non−greased screws.

INFORMATION The screws which fix the earthing conductors have been secured with lock wire in
the factory.

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.63

Removal of the earthing conductors for test purposes

The following instruction describes the procedure for a typical bay with insulated maintenance earthing switch Q53
in the exit.
1. De-energize and earth bay and secure against re-connection:
a) Open circuit breaker Q0 (Figure7.62)
b) Switch combined disconnector / earthing switch Q1/Q51 (Figure7.62) to neutral position
c) Switch combined disconnector / earthing switch Q2/Q52 (Figure7.62) to neutral position
d) Switch combined disconnector / earthing switch Q9/Q53 (Figure7.62) to neutral position

Q1 Q2
Q51 Q52

Q0

Q53

Q9

Q8

Figure 7.6-2: Condition after de−energizing bay

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.64

 2. Earth bay
a) Close earthing switches Q51 and Q52 (Figure7.63) of the busbar modules
b) Close makingproof earthing switch Q8 (Figure7.63)
3. Earthing the working location at the insulated maintenance earthing switch Q53 (Figure 7.6-3)
a) Close earthing switch Q53 (Figure7.63)
b) Close circuit breaker Q0 (Figure7.63)
4. Secure switchgear against re-connection.
Lock all switching apparatus. All locations, which have been secured against re-connection, shall be marked with
the warning that re-connection is only admissible after the earthing conductors have been installed to the insulated
earthing switch

Q1 Q2
Q51 Q52

Q0

Q53

Q9

Q8

Figure 7.6-3: Condition of a typical bay before removal of the earthing conductor from the 4−flange module with insulated maintenance
earthing switch Q53

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.65

 5. Loosen screws (2, Figure 7.6-4) and keep them together with washers (3) for later installation
6. Remove cover (1, Figure 7.6-4)

2, 3

2, 3

1 2, 3

1 − Cover
2 − Screws
3 − Washers
Figure 7.6-4: Cover at the insulated maintenance earthing switch

7. Loosen screw (2, Figure 7.6-5) and keep it together with washers (3) for later installation
8. Loosen screw (6, Figure 7.6-5) and keep it together with nut (4) and washers (5, 7) for later installation
9. Remove earthing conductor (1)

1 6, 7

2, 3

4, 5

1 − Earthing conductor 5 − Washer

2 − Screw 6 − Screw
3 − Washer 7 − Washer
4 − Nut
Figure 7.6-5: Removal of earthing conductors

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.66

Installation of earthing conductors and re−connection of bay
1. Fix earthing conductor (1) slightly with screw (6), nut (4) and washers (5, 7)
2. Tighten screw (2) with washer (3) at specified torque
3. Tighten screw (6) and nut (4) at specified torque
4. Secure screws with lock wire again

1 6, 7

2, 3

4, 5

1 − Earthing conductor 5 − Washer

2 − Screw 6 − Screw
3 − Washer 7 − Washer
4 − Nut
Figure 7.6-6: Installation of earthing conductors

5. Put cover (1) at its place

6. Tighten screws (2) with washers (3) at specified torque
7. Unearth bay
8. The bay can be re-energized

2, 3

2, 3

1 2, 3

1 − Cover
2 − Screws
3 − Washers
Figure 7.6-7: Installation of cover

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.67

7.6.3 Operation

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause The earthing conductors connect the insulated earthing

contacts to the earthing system. If they are removed high
voltage can be conducted out of the enclosure.
Action During normal operation of the GIS the earthing conduc
tors shall be permanently installed. Do not remove the
earthing conductors or the short−circuit conductor and do
not loosen any screws while the GIS is energized.

7.6.4 Maintenance

Replacement of warning signs

The insulated maintenance earthing switch is equipped with warning signs (Figure7.68). Replace these warning
signs by new warning signs if they have become illegible.

New warning signs can be ordered as spare parts. Use the following order numbers:

1HDG171428P0002

1HDG171428P0003

Figure 7.6-8: Warning signs

7.6.5 Technical data

The technical data of the disconnector/earthing switch module can be found in chapter Modules in section DIscon
nector/Earthing switch.
Table 7.6-1: Insulated maintenance earthing switch

Rated Values

Maximum permissible testing voltage across bushing kV 10

1HDG518718 A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.68

7.7 Make−proof earthing switch 7.7

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.71

7.7.1 Functional description

Functional description of the device

The make−proof earthing switch consists of the switching device itself and the fixed contacts (4) attached to the
device to be earthed (Figure7.71).

For normal operation the short−circuit conductors (earthing bridges, 17) connect the contact pins (5) via the contact
tubes (19) with the earthed switchgear enclosure. In position ON (CLOSED) the contact pins (5) are moved into
fixed contacts (4) so that the primary conductors of the switchgear are earthed. The earthing switch has also the
capability to interrupt induced currents during unearthing an overhead line with a parallel line energized.

For setting and testing of protection relays and for measuring the voltage drop over the main conductor path, the
make−proof earthing switch can be isolated from the GIS earthing. For this reason, the contact pins (5) are fixed to
the centered drive system by contact support (6) made from insulating material.

Functional description of the operating mechanism

The make−proof earthing switch is equipped with a motor−operated snap spring operating mechanism. The normal
operation is motor operation. In emergencies, the switch can be operated manually with a hand crank. The hand
crank turns directly the rod end of the drive spindle (13) (Figure7.71).

During an opening operation, the motor (12) operates with its motor pinion (22) the cog wheel (8) which turns the
drive spindle (13). So the drive lever (10) moves and turns the switching lever (16). By this, the drive rod turns and
moves the contact support (6) within the gas compartment. The contact support holds all three contact pins (5)
which are moving out of the fixed contacts (4) into the position OFF (OPEN). At the same time, the closing spring (7)
is charged for the next closing operation.

During a closing operation, the closing spring (7) passes its dead center position. This generates a torque on the
switching lever (16) that automatically closes the device. The contact pins (5) move fast into the fixed contacts (4)
into position ON (CLOSED).

The slot in the drive lever (10) allows for independent movement of the contact system and the charging mecha
nism, once the dead center position has been passed. The end positions are determined by inner limit stops.

The auxiliary contacts (20) and the position indicator (1) are driven by linkage (18). The power supply of the motor is
deactivated by the limit switch (9). In case the device is operated manually for emergency use, the interlocking
switch opens the motor circuit. All electrical connections are made by a coded plug connector (21).

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.72

 21

20
4
19

18
2 5
1

17 6

16 7
1 8

9
11
10
14 12
15 13

3 11

16

13
22
10 12 8

1 −
Position indicator 9 − Limit switch 16 − Switching lever
2 −
Fastener 10 − Drive lever 17 − Short−circuit conductor
3 −
Cover 11 − Drive rod (earthing bridge)
4 −
Fixed contact 12 − Motor 18 − Linkage (auxiliary switch)
5 −
Contact pin 13 − Drive spindle 19 − Contact tube
6 −
Contact support 14 − Interlocking coil 20 − Auxiliary contacts
(insulating material) 15 − Elements for manual emergency 21 − Plug connector
7 − Closing spring operation 22 − Motor pinion
8 − Cog wheel
Figure 7.7-1: Operating mechanism and main contacts of the make-proof earthing switch

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.73

7.7.2 Commissioning

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause When the short−circuit conductors (17, Figure7.71) are

dismounted, high−voltage can be conducted outside the
enclosure.
Action Energize the make−proof earthing switch only when the
short−circuit conductors (17, Figure7.71) are installed. Es
pecially after maintenance work or after testing make sure
that the short−circuit conductors have been installed again.

Refer to the information concerning commissioning in chapter Commissioning in section Tests during commissio
ning.

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.74

7.7.3 Operation

Operation modes

The make−proof earthing switch can be set to one of three different operation modes. The operation mode is set
with the operation mode selector (1). The following modes are available (Figure7.72):
a) Switching position locked:
The make−proof earthing switch cannot be operated, neither manually nor by motor.
b) Motor operation:
The make−proof earthing switch can be operated by motor. The motor is tripped either by the operating elements
in the local control cubicle or by the SCADA system. The operation by hand crank is blocked.
c) Manual operation:
The make−proof earthing switch can be operated manually using a hand crank

a b c

1 − Operation mode selector a − Mode: switching position locked

b − Mode: motor operation
c − Mode: manual operation
Figure 7.7-2: Operation mode selector

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.75

Manual operation of the make−proof earthing switch with secondary voltage available

In emergency cases the makeproof earthing switch can be operated manually directly on the device using a hand
crank. As soon as the hand crank is inserted into the operating mechanism the motor circuit is automatically inter
rupted.

The procedures differ depending on the fact if the secondary voltage is available or the secondary voltage is down.

WARNING Hazard Crushing hands by fast moving mechanical parts

Cause After removing the cover of the make−proof earthing switch

mechanical parts are accessible which move fast and can
crush hands
Action After removing the cover access only the elements with
your hands described in the procedure below. Do not
touch parts behind the operating elements

INFORMATION For manual operation all the interlocking conditions have to be fulfilled. The device
has to be unlocked.

1. Make sure that the GIS section, where the make−proof earthing switch is connected to, has been
de−energized
2. Unlock fasteners and remove cover
If the make−proof earthing switch is in operation mode Switching position locked follow the description in
section Unlocking of switching position to unlock switching position first.
3. Remove padlock and locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-3)
4. Pull mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-3) and move mode selector into position Manual operation (see Figure 7.7-2)
until you sense a mechanical resistance
5. As soon as a mechanical resistance is reached and a signal for release of the respective control cubicle is given
move mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-3) further until it latches for releasing the hand crank opening (3, Figure 7.7-3)
completely
6. Insert hand crank into opening (3, Figure 7.7-3)
7. Switch make-proof earthing switch with hand crank ON or OFF according to the direction of rotation printed on
the switching device
8. Turn hand crank until freewheeling
9. Remove hand crank
10. Move operation mode selector into the desired mode
11. Insert locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-3) and attach padlock

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.76

 1

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Mode selector
3 − Opening for hand crank
Figure 7.7-3: Manual operation with hand crank

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.77

Manual operation of the makeproof earthing switch with secondary voltage down

WARNING Hazard Danger of switching on short−circuit. An outage in the high−

voltage power system can occur.
Cause During this operation the interlocking of the switchgear is
not effective anymore. Switching on short−circuit is pos
sible without any warning
Action Only personnel with sufficient qualification for this opera
tion shall do this operation

WARNING Hazard Crushing hands by fast moving mechanical parts

Cause After removing the cover of the make−proof earthing switch

mechanical parts are accessible which move fast and can
crush hands
Action After removing the cover access only the elements with
your hands described in the procedure below. Do not
touch parts behind the operating elements

INFORMATION For manual operation all the interlocking conditions have to be fulfilled. The device
has to be unlocked.

1. Make sure that the GIS section, where the make−proof earthing switch is connected to, has been
de−energized
2. Unlock fasteners and remove cover
If make−proof earthing switch is in operation mode Switching position locked follow the description in sec
tion Unlocking of switching position to unlock switching position first.
3. Remove padlock and locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-4)
4. Remove cover screw (3, Figure 7.7-4) with screwdriver
5. Pull mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-4) and move mode selector into position Manual operation (see Figure 7.7-2)
until you sense a mechanical resistance
6. Unlock interlocking coil (4, Figure 7.7-4) by pressing carefully with a screwdriver and hold
7. Move mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-4) further until it latches for releasing the hand crank opening (5, Figure 7.7-4)
completely
8. Insert hand crank into opening (5, Figure 7.7-4)
9. Switch make-proof earthing switch with hand crank ON or OFF according to the direction of rotation printed on
the switching device

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.78

 10. Turn hand crank until freewheeling
11. Remove hand crank
12. Move operation mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-4) into the desired mode
13. Insert locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-4) and fit padlock
14. Fasten the cover screw (3, Figure 7.7-4) back again

1 − Locking bolt 4 − Interlocking coil (not visible behind cover screw)

2 − Mode selector 5 − Opening for hand crank
3 − Cover screw
Figure 7.7-4: Manual operation with hand crank when secondary voltage is down

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.79

Locking and unlocking of switching position

It is possible to lock the make−proof earthing switch electrically as well as mechanically, in the open or in the closed
position.

In order to lock the make−proof earthing switch, the cover must be removed from the operating mechanism.

INFORMATION After locking the device it can no longer be operated neither with the motor drive
nor manually with the hand crank.

Locking of switching position:

Precondition: Mode selector is in position Motor operation

1. Switch the make−proof earthing switch into the switching position to be locked
2. Unlock fasteners and remove cover
3. Remove padlock and locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-5)
4. Pull operation mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-5) and move mode selector into position Switching position locked
until mode selector latches into position

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Operation mode selector
Figure 7.7-5: Locking the switching position

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.710

 5. Insert locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-6)
6. Attach padlock (2, Figure 7.7-6) through hole in locking bolt

In this operation mode the operation mode selector is blocked by the locking bolt (1). The removal of the locking
bolt is prevented by padlock (2).

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Padlock
Figure 7.7-6: Locking with a padlock

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.711

Unlocking of switching position:

Precondition: Mode selector is in position Switching position locked

1. Unlock fasteners and remove cover
2. Remove padlock
3. Remove locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-7)
4. Pull mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-7) and move mode selector into the desired position (Motor operation or
Manual operation, see Figure 7.7-2)
5. Insert locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-7)
6. Attach padlock through hole in locking bolt

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Operation mode selector
Figure 7.7-7: Unlocking the switching position

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.712

Motor operation

Precondition: Mode selector is in position Manual operation

If make−proof earthing switch is in operation mode Switching position locked follow the description in section Un
locking of switching position to unlock switching position first.
1. Unlock fasteners and remove cover
2. Remove existing padlock and locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-8)
3. Pull mode selector (2, Figure 7.7-8) and move mode selector into position Motor operation until mode selector
latches into position
4. Insert locking bolt (1, Figure 7.7-8)
5. Attach padlock through hole in locking bolt

1 − Locking bolt
2 − Mode selector
3 − Opening for hand crank
Figure 7.7-8: Motor operation

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.713

7.7.4 Maintenance

For maintenance purposes the following actions shall be taken after the mentioned period or number of switching
operations.
Table 7.7-1: Maintenance Schedule

Works to be performed after

Component
8 years 1000 CO 2 short−circuit makings

Motor Inspection Inspection −

Drive mechanics Inspection Inspection −

Auxiliary switches Inspection Inspection −

Main Ccntacts − Inspection Replacement

SF6gas adsorber in gas compartment of

− − Replacement
the adjacent module

Inspection of the operating mechanism

WARNING Hazard Danger of switching on short−circuit. An outage in the high−

voltage power system can occur.
Cause At the beginning of the maintenance work the make−proof
earthing switch must be operated.
Action Before starting work de−energize section of switchgear
where the make−proof earthing switch is connected to.

Works to be performed during inspection:

− Mechanical function test with the hand crank (OPEN-CLOSE)
− Inspection of the limit switches, the hand crank interlocking and of the position indicator
− Test of the hand crank and the end position locking
− Visual inspection of the electrical connections
− Electrical function test of the operating mechanism (OPEN-CLOSE)
− Measurement of motor current at rated supply voltage
− Function test of the anti-condensation heater (if applicable)

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.714

Replacement of the main contacts

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS.

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.715

De−energizing the make−proof earthing switch (Figure7.79)

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock

Cause During the work the enclosure is opened. The installation

work includes active parts which are under high voltage
during operation.
Action Before starting the work, de−energize the switchgear sec
tion, check for absence of voltage, secure against re−con
nection and earth switchgear section.

1. De−energize the counter contacts of the make−proof earthing switch, secure against reconnection and earth
2. Evacuate gas compartment which has a common gas compartment with the make−proof earthing switch and let
atmospheric air in
3. Disconnect plug (2)
4. Remove cover (1)
5. Disconnect supply cable (3) of anti−condensation heater
6. Loosen screw (4) and keep together with washer (5) for reinstallation
7. Dismount anti−condensation heater (6) and keep for reinstallation

4, 5

1 − Cover 4 − Screw
2 − Plug connection 5 − Washer
3 − Terminal anti−condensation heater 6 − Anti−condensation heater
Figure 7.7-9: De−energizeing the make−proof earthing switch

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.716

Dismounting the make−proof earthing switch (Figure7.710)
1. Dismount make−proof earthing switch (7) from counter flange (8)
The counter flange (8) can be a support insulator (shown in Figure7.710). Alternatively, the counter flange
can belong to the enclosure of an exit disconnector/earthing switch without support insulator (shown in
Figure7.714)
2. Place make−proof earthing switch on a clean working table
3. Loosen screw (1) and keep together with washers (2) for reinstallation
4. Dismount all three short−circuit conductors (3)
5. Loosen screws (4) and keep together with washers (5) for reinstallation
6. Dismount all three contact tubes (6)

4, 5

1, 2

1 − Screws 5 − Washers
2 − Washers 6 − Contact tube
3 − Short−circuit conductors 7 − Make−proof earthing switch
(Earthing bridges) 8 − Counter flange
4 − Screws
Figure 7.7-10: Dismounting the make−proof earthing switch

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.717

Replacement of moving contacts (Figure7.711)
1. Loosen nut (1) and dispose of
2. Dismount contact support (2) and dispose of
3. Loosen screws (3) and keep together with washers (4) for reinstallation
4. Dismount guiding assembly (5) and dispose of

3, 4

1 − Nut 4 − Washers
2 − Contact support 5 − Guiding assembly
3 − Screws
Figure 7.7-11: Replacement of moving contacts

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.718

Install moving contacts (Figure7.712)
1. Install guiding assembly (1), which has been supplied as a spare part, and fix with screws (2) and
washers (3)
2. Install nut (6) on axis of guiding assembly (1). Adjust dimension x (distance between machined surface of flange
and outer surface of nut (7), Figure 7.7-13)
3. Attach contact support (4), which contains new moving contacts (5) and has been supplied as a spare part, to the
axis of the guiding assembly (1)
4. Fix contact support (4) with new nut (7)
5. Tighten nut (7) at torque 80 Nm

Detail: 1

Detail
2, 3

4 6

1 − Guiding assembly 5 − Moving contacts

2 − Screw 6 − Nut
3 − Washer 7 − Nut
4 − Contact support
Figure 7.7-12: Installation new moving contacts

x = 135+1 mm

Figure 7.7-13: Dimension x to be adjusted

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.719

Replacement of counter contacts

NOTICE Hazard Damage of the make−proof earthing switch.

Cause If the counter contacts are not contacted and fixed prop
erly, the counter contacts can be deformed during making.
Due to insufficient current carrying capability the contacts
can weld during making.
Action Follow the sequence of the working procedure strictly. The
counter contacts must be clamped firmly on the contact
inserts by the contact supports.

The procedure differs depending on the location of the make−proof earthing switch (Figure7.714):
a) Make−proof earthing switch connected to support insulator
b) Make−proof earthing switch connected to line disconnector/earthing switch without support insulator

a b

2 2

1 − Counter contacts
2 − Contact support
Figure 7.7-14: Replacement of counter contacts (a: flange with support insulator, b: flange without support insulator)

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.720

Make−proof earthing switch connected to support insulator (Figure7.714a)
1. Loosen screws (5) of contact supports (3) which hold the counter contacts (3)
2. Unscrew all three counter contacts (1) from contact supports (2). The contact supports (2) remain fixed to the
contact inserts (1)
3. Adjust the distance between the contact supports (3) and the contact inserts (1) to a distance of 2 mm
At this moment screws (5) hold the contact supports loosely.
4. Screw new counter contacts (2), which have been supplied as spare parts, on the contact supports (3) so that they
are fixed slightly but can still be moved around their axis
5. Install the make−proof earthing switch in position ON temporarily to the flange to align the counter contacts
6. Switch the make−proof earthing switch in position OFF to prevent misalignement when the make−proof earthing
switch is removed again
7. Remove make−proof earthing switch
8. Fasten screws (5) of contact supports (3) at specified torque
Now the counter contacts (2) are fixed firmly to the contact inserts (1) and have the full current carrying
capability.
9. Use new o−ring. Install make−proof earthing switch (7) to counter flange (8) (Figure 7.7-10).

2 mm 2

3 4 5

1 − Contact insert in support insulator 4 − Washer

2 − Counter contact 5 − Screw
3 − Contact support
Figure 7.7-15: Replacement of counter contacts

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.721

Make−proof earthing switch connected to line disconnector/earthing switch (Figure7.714b)
1. Loosen screw (5) of contact supports (3) which hold the counter contacts (3)
2. Unscrew all three counter contacts (2) from contact supports (3). The contact supports (3) remain fixed to the
conductor (1) together with conductor (6)
3. Adjust the distance between the contact supports (3) and the conductor (6) to a distance of 2 mm
At the moment screws (5) hold the contact supports loosely.
4. Screw new counter contacts (2), which have been supplied as spare parts, on the contact supports (3) so that they
are fixed slightly but can still be moved around their axis
5. Install the make−proof earthing switch in position ON temporarily to the flange to align the counter contacts
6. Switch the make−proof earthing switch in position OFF to prevent misalignement when the make−proof earthing
switch is removed again
7. Remove make−proof earthing switch
8. Fasten screws (5) of contact supports (3) at specified torque
Now the counter contacts (2) are fixed firmely to conductors (1) and (6) and have the full current carrying
capability.
9. Use new o−ring. Install make−proof earthing switch (7) to counter flange (8) (Figure 7.7-10).

1 6
2 mm
2

3 4 5

1 − Conductor 4 − Washer
2 − Counter contact 5 − Screw
3 − Contact support 6 − Conductor
Figure 7.7-16: Replacement of counter contacts

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.722

Replacement of lamella contacts
1. Replace lamella contacts (3) at all three contact tubes (2) by new lamella contacts which have been supplied as a
spare part (Figure 7.7-17)
2. Insert new o-rings (1) (Figure 7.7-17)
3. Install all three contact tubes (6) and fix with screws (4) and washers (5) (Figure 7.7-10)
4. Install all three earthing bridges (3) and fix with screws (1) and washers (2) (Figure 7.7-10)

1 − O-ring
2 − Contact tube
3 − Lamella contacts
Figure 7.7-17: Replacement of lamella contacts

Recommissioning of the make−proof earthing switch

1. Evacuate gas compartment, at which the make−proof earthing switch has been installed, and fill with SF6 at fill-
ing pressure
2. Carry out commissioning tests
3. After successful commissioning tests switch the earthing switch into the desired position
4. If the earthing switch is in position OPEN, the de−energized section of the switchgear can be energized again

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.723

Replacement of warning signs

The short−circuit conductors (earthing bridges (17) Figure7.71) are equipped with warning signs (Figure7.718).
Replace these warning signs by new warning signs if they have become illegible.

New warning signs can be ordered as spare parts. Use the following order numbers:

1HDG171428P0003

1HDG171428P0004

Figure 7.7-18: Warning signs

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.724

7.7.5 Technical data

Switching device
Table 7.7-2: Make-proof earthing switch

Rated Values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 325 550 650

Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 140 230 275

Frequency Hz 50/60

Peak current/short−cir cuit making current kA 100

Shorttime withstand current kA 40

Short−circuit duration s 3

Shorttime power frequency withstand voltage

kV 2
(auxiliary circuits)

Power frequency withstand voltage between contact pin

kV 10
and enclosure with disconnected earthing brackets

SF6 minimum functional pressure/ kPa

520/600
filling pressure (at 20 °C)

Weight without SF6 (incl. operating mechanism) kg 50

Weight of SF6 filling kg 1

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.725

Operating mechanism
Table 7.7-3: Motor with permanent magnet excitation

Rated values DC V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Tolerance % +10/−15

Power W 150

Startup current A 12 6

Continuous current A 3 1,5

Operating mode − shorttime operation S2 = 10 sec

Table 7.7-4: Operating times

DC voltage V Un 0,85U n 1,1 Un

Closing time until contact making ms p3000

Opening time until contact separation ms p1500

Contact speed 5 ms before making m/s 3,6...4,5

Table 7.7-5: Motor runtime

Rated values DC V 110 − 125 220 − 250

Earthing switch ON ms <3100

Earthing switch OFF ms <1600

Table 7.7-6: Contact pin stroke

Switching device Stroke

) 2, 8
Makeproof earthing switch mm 63, 5 * 1, 8

If the operating mechanism is equipped with an anticondensation heater, it is vented. The technical data of the
heater are listed in chapter Modules in section Anticondensation heater.

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.726

Limit switch
Table 7.7-7: Rated values limit switch

Rated values insulation V AC 380, DC 220

Thermal current A 10

Operating current A 2 (L/R = 20 ms)

Connection − plug connection 4,8 x 0,8

Contacting principle − snap mechanics

Contacts − silver plated, self cleaning

Auxiliary switch
Table 7.7-8: Rated values auxiliary switch

Rated values V AC 380, DC 450

Thermal current A 25

Short−circuit withstand capability A 1000 (0,3 s)

Switching capacity DC 110...125 V A 3,5 (L/R = 20 ms)

Switching capacity DC 220...250 V A 2,5 (L/R = 20 ms)

Connection − plug connection 4,8 x 0,8

Contacting principle − wiping contacts

Contacts − silver plated, self cleaning

Number of contacts (16 poles with conventional GIS)

− Normally closed − 10
− Normally open 6

Operating diagram

Insulating distance Full current carrying

> 80% capacity reached
Contact travel
Main contact

Auxiliary contact, NC
Auxiliary contact, NO

Figure 7.7-19: Schematic diagram switching on the make-proof earthing switch

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.727

Resistance values of the main current path

ÏÏ
Ï

R p 35 

Figure 7.7-20: Resistance values of the main current path

Information about materials for disposal

Table 7.7-9: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Make−proof earthing switch with operating mechanism 50 − F F F F F f

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals

1HDG518720 C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.728

7.8 Separate current transformer 7.8

1HDG518743C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.81

7.8.1 Functional description

The figure (Figure7.81) shows the separate current transformer. The separate current transformer is designed as a
low voltage instrument transformer. The current transformer cores (1) are integrated into the gas compartment of
the current transformer enclosure (4). Usually the separate current transformer is installed to a flange of the circuit
breaker. The current transformer can be a separate gas compartment or have a common gas compartment with
the circuit−breaker. In case of a separate gas compartment the current transformer has a pressure relief device (5)
and gas valves (6). A gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is installed to one of the gas connections.

The secondary cables are conducted directly into the local control cubicle. Alternatively the secondary terminals of
the current transformer cores (1) can be conducted outside the SF6 gas compartment via a bushing insulator (3) to
the terminals (8) in the terminal box (7). Up to 60 secondary conductors can be lead via the bushing insulator (3).

8 1
7 4
9 2

1 − Current transformer cores 4 − Enclosure 7 − Terminal box

2 − Conductors 5 − Pressure relief device 8 − Terminals
3 − Bushing insulator 6 − Gas valves 9 − Secondary conductors
Figure 7.8-1: Separate current transformer

1HDG518743C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.82

7.8.2 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Electric shock due to induced voltages.

Cause If the secondary conductors of current transformers are

operated without burden dangerous high voltage can be
induced and conducted to the terminals.
Action All terminals (4) are short−circuited and earthed for ship
ping. The variant without terminals has an earthing plate
installed onto the bushing insulator (3). During the high
voltage test and the measurement of the voltage drop of
the main current path all terminals shall be short−circuited
and earthed or be cabled according to the secondary cir
cuit diagrams. After the tests and before energizing these
short−circuit connection shall be removed.

Before energizing a bay the following work shall be carried out:

1. Make sure that all current transformers are connected according to the secondary circuit diagrams
2. Make sure that the earthing of the secondary terminals of the current transformer are done according to the rele-
vant circuit diagrams

In case the separate gas compartment is a separate gas compartment:

3. Make sure that the gas compartment is filled at rated filling pressure
4. Make sure that the gas density monitor or density sensor is connected

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

7.8.3 Maintenance

If the terminal box is equipped with an anti−condensation heater:

During the inspection every eight years check the functionality of the anti−condensation heater and of the ventilation
openings in the terminal boxes. Find the exact description of the inspection of the anti−condensation heater in
chapter Anti−condensation heater.

1HDG518743C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.83

7.8.4 Technical data
Table 7.8-1: Separate current transformer

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage (phase kV

140 230 275
to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100

Short-time withstand current kA

 40

Duration of short-circuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600

SF6 filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 700

Weight without SF6 kg 550*

SF6 filling weight* kg 7**

Dimensions (length x width x height) mm 1090 x 870 x 625

* The weight of the separate current transformer can vary. The weight depends on the number and specification of the applied
cores which is a project specific feature.
** The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the partitioning concept and the size of the cores which are project specific fea
tures. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only approximate values. The exact values can be found on the SF6 gas
information of the installation.

Resistance values of the main current path

R p 11 

Figure 7.8-2: Separate current transformer

1HDG518743C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.84

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.8-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material**

Electronic parts
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Separate current transformer 550 7 F F F f F f

Cores *** f F F F

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.
*** Depending on the project−specific variant.

1HDG518743C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.85

7.9 90 degree module 7.9

1HDG518768Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.91

7.9.1 Functional description

The 90 degree module is used for changing the direction of busducts by a 90 degree angle. The figure shows one
of different possible installation positions. The module can be mounted within an installation in different positions
depending on the requirements.

The conductors (2) of the 90 degree module connect both flanges (1) of the module. The flanges can be equipped
with support or barrier insulators. If the 90 degree module is equipped with two barrier insulators, the module is a
separate gas compartment. In this case the 90 degree module is equipped with a pressure relief device (3) and gas
valves (4). In case of a separate gas compartment a gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is installed to one
of the gas valves.

1 − Flange with insulator 3 − Pressure relief device

2 − Conductor 4 − Gas valve
Figure 7.9-1: 90 degree module

7.9.2 Commissioning

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

1HDG518768Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.92

7.9.3 Technical data
Table 7.9-1: 90 degree module

Rated values kV 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage (phase kV

275
to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current kA 104

Short-time withstand current kA 40

Duration of short-circuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20 C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20 C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 kg 120

SF6 filling weight kg 4*

* The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the partitioning concept and the shape of the conductors. Therefore the values
mentioned in this table are only approximate values. The exact values can be found on the SF6 gas information of the installa
tion.

Resistance values of the main current path

R  11 

Figure 7.9-2: 90 degree module

1HDG518768Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.93

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.9-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material**

Electronic parts
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*

Plastics**
Al metal*

Cast resin
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

90 degree module 120 4 F f F f f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.

1HDG518768Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.94

7.10 Split−up module and SF6-air bushing 7.10

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.101

7.10.1 Functional description

The SF6−air bushing is used for the connection of overhead lines, transformers and air−insulated substations to the
gas−insulated switchgear via the split−up module. The conductors (5) connect the three phases to the bushings (1).
The insulator (4) can be a barrier or a support insulator. In case of a barrier insulator split−up module and bushings
are a common gas compartment. In this case the split−up module is equipped with a pressure relief device (2) and
gas valves (3). A gas density monitor or gas density sensor is installed to one of the gas valves.

6
1

2
5
4

1 − SF6−air bushings 3 − Gas valves 5 − Conductor

2 − Pressure relief device 4 − Insulator 6 − Enclosure of split−up module
Figure 7.10-1: Split−up module and SF6-air bushing

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.102

7.10.2 Installation

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

INFORMATION Before starting the work check all supplied parts for completeness and for damage.
Damaged parts shall be replaced.

INFORMATION The tightening torques for non−greased screws in threaded boreholes and for bolt
and nut connections are listed in chapter Installation in section Installation of the
GIS in table Tightening torques for non−greased screws.

INFORMATION The treatment of insulator surfaces, o−rings, sealing grooves and sealing surfaces
are described in chapter Installation in section Installation of the GIS.

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.103

Procedure

The bushings may be supplied with operating or installations instructions of the bushings’ manufacturer. Read these
documents before starting the work and follow these instructions during work.
1. Release transport gas N2 and remove transportation covers
2. Fix o−ring (2) to connection flange of bushing (Figure 7.10-2)

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to falling parts.

Cause The bushings have to be lifted with lifting devices during

installation and could fall down if handled improperly.
Action For the installation lifting devices and lifting accessories
with a lifting capacity of at least 500 kg shall be used. Fol
low the instructions in chapter Gas−insulated switchgear in
section Safety instructions.

3. Lift bushing (1) with suitable lifting accessories

4. Insert bushing (1) straight into plug contact (3). Make sure that the o−rings (2) are in their correct position
5. Fasten screws (5) with washers (6) at specified torque to the threaded boreholes in enclosure (7)
6. Install the other two bushings in the same manner
7. Carry out necessary gas handling
8. Check flanges for leakage

5, 6

4
7
3

1 − SF6−air bushing 5 − Screws

2 − O-ring for bushing 6 − Washers
3 − Plug contact 7 − Enclosure
4 − Contact bolt
Figure 7.10-2: Installation of SF6−air bushing

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.104

7.10.3 Technical data

Technical data of bushing

Due to different requirements in the project specification there are several bushing variants. Therefore the technical
data of the bushing cannot be listed here in general. The project specific technical data of the bushing can be found
in the documentation supplied with the project. Therefore the following technical data refer to the split−up module
where the bushings are fixed to.

Technical data of split−up module

Table 7.10-1: SF6-air bushing

Rated values kV 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 650

Short−time power−frequency withstand voltage kV

275
(phase to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current kA 104

Short−time withstand current kA 40

Duration of short−circuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 kg 55

SF6 filling weight kg 2*

Dimensions (width x height x depth) mm 1000 x 655 x 570

* The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the partitioning concept and the shape of the conductors. Therefore the values
mentioned in this table are only approximate values. The exact values can be found on the SF6 gas information of the installa
tion..

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.105

Resistance values of the main current path

 8 

Figure 7.10-3: Split−up module

Information about materials for disposal

Table 7.10-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material**

Electronic parts
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*

Plastics**
Al metal*

Cast resin
Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Split−up module for bushing 55 2 F f F f f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.

1HDG518773C en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.106

7.11 Compact cable termination 7.11

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.111

7.11.1 Functional description

The compact cable termination is used for the connection of high−voltage cables to the GIS. The cable termination
insulator (4) is one cast−resin part including all three phases. This allows a very compact design of the cable ter
mination. The cable termination consists of enclosure (3). On the GIS side is an insulator (1). Normally this is a sup
port insulator so that the cable termination is a common gas compartment with the adjacent module. A partitioned
variant is also available. In this case the insulator is a barrier insulator. The partitioned variant has a bursting protec
tion and two gas valves. In the partitioned variant a gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is connected to one
of the gas valves.

The connection of the cable is realized through opening (5) in the cable termination insulator (4). The cable termina
tion insulator is the gas−tight end towards the cable. Cable termination insulator (4) and insulator (1) are connected
through plug contacts (2). The plug contacts (2) enable an easy installation of the cable termination insulator.

1 − Insulator 4 − Cable termination insulator

2 − Plug contact 5 − Opening for cable plug
3 − Enclosure
Figure 7.11-1: Compact cable termination

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.112

7.11.2 Important information about planning and installation

Cable terminations are the interface between the GIS and the high−voltage system. During planning and installation
of the cable connection to the GIS in addition to the GIS manufacturer several other parties are involved. These are
for example the manufacturer of the cable, the manufacturer of the cable termination insulator and the manufacturer
of the cable accessories.

Erroneous planning or installation of the cable connection to the GIS can result in faults or damage. For this reason
we inform about the aspects which shall be considered when connecting a cable to gas−insulated switchgear. This
description is for orientation in case the GIS manufacturer is not responsible for the connection of the high−voltage
cable. We do not take any liability if aspects important for certain projects are missing.

ABB recommends to involve a planner for the planning of the cable connection, who is well−informed about the par
ticularities of high−voltage cables connected to gas−insulated switchgear. ABB disclaims any liability resulting from
wrong planning and installation of the cable connection.

Earthing of the cable shield

Cable shields can be earthed in different ways. There are cable shields earthed on one side and those earthed on
both sides.

In case of one−sided shield earthing it shall be considered that the admissible touch voltages at the end of the cable
shield are not exceeded. The use of surge arresters may be necessary. Wrong design could result in death due to
electric shock.

In case of two−sided shield earthing currents are induced in the cable shield. The cross sections of the conductors
which connect the cable shields to the earthing system must be designed correctly. The connection points shall be
designed in way that these current values can be conducted safely to the earthing system. Wrong design can result
in overheating and fire. The earthing points on the GIS enclosure of the cable termination are not designed for the
direct connection of the cable shields in general. These earthing points are intended to be used to reduce the effecs
of fast transients. Do not connect the cable shields to the GIS enclosure!

Effects of fast transients

Fast transients are generated when the disconnectors of gas−insulated switchgear are operated. These propagate
as high−frequency currents on the GIS enclosure. Since the capacitance of the cable contributes to these fast tran
sients the electrical circuit includes the cable. The high−frequency currents can cause voltage drops in the imped
ances of the earthing conductors also in those of the cable. These voltage drops can be sufficiently high that there
are flashovers in the atmospheric air in the vicinity of the cable connection. For this reason keep all earthing connec
tions as short as possible. Avoid loops. Take care that there is a low−impedance connection between unearthed
metal parts of the cable plug and the GIS enclosure. Use surge arresters if necessary. Pay particular attention to
cable type current transformers.

Installation of the cable to the cable termination insulator

The installation of the cable shall be done only by personnel with the special training and skills for this work. The
combination of cable termination insulator, cable accessories and cable must be approved by the manufacturers of
all three parts. Wrong installation of the cable can result in a fault arc with severe injury to persons and in damage to
the GIS.

Support of the mechanical load due to the cable connection

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS enclosures. This can result in leakage and in extreme cases in
bursting of the enclosure.

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS support structure. This can result in the mechanical failure of
the support structure.

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.113

7.11.3 Installation

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

The installation of the cables to or into the GIS, respectively, shall only be done by personnel which is authorized for
that work.

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.114

7.11.4 Commissioning

Commissioning of the bay without cable

INFORMATION If a bay is commissioned without cables connected, additional work becomes nec
essary at a later time. The following procedure ensures that the personnel doing
that work encounters a defined situation concerning the switching status of the
bay. In the meantime the GIS is operated without cable. Depending on the cable
termination variant gas compartments might not be monitored sufficiently at the
cable connection opening in the cable termination insulator. The following proce
dure avoids trouble with floating potentials during that time.

If the bay is commissioned without a cable connected, the cable termation shall be disconnected from the rest of
the installation and earthed:
1. Make sure that the bay is de−energized
2. Switch line disconnector into position OFF
3. Switch make−proof earthing switch at cable termination into position ON
4. Lock the switching position of the make−proof earthing switch with a padlock
5. Record the conditions of the switches in the on−site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.115

7.11.5 Technical data
Table 7.11-1: Compact cable termination

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand current (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage (phase kV

140 230 275
to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

Normal current* A 2500

Peak withstand current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100

Short-time withstand current kA  40

Duration of short-circuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 kg 85

SF6 filling weight kg 2

* The current rating refers to the GIS part. For the cables different ratings apply.

Resistance values of the main current path

R p 6 

Table 7.11-2: Compact cable termination

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.116

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.11-3: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material**

Electronic parts
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*

Plastics**
Al metal*

Cast resin
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Compact cable termination 85 2 F f F f F f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.

1HDG518770B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.117

7.12 IEC cable termination 7.12

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.121

7.12.1 Functional description
The IEC cable termination is used for the connection of high−voltage cables to the GIS. The cable termination con
sists of enclosure (1). On the GIS side is an insulator (5). Normally this is a support insulator so that the cable ter
mination is a common gas compartment with the adjacent module. A partitioned variant is also available. In this
case the insulator is a barrier insulator. The partitioned variant has a bursting protection and two gas valves. In the
partitioned variant a gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is connected to one of the gas valves.

The connection of the cable is realized through opening (4) in the cable termination insulator. The cable termination
insulator is the gas−tight end towards the cable. Cable termination insulator (2) and insulator (5) are connected
through conductors (3) and through plug contacts (6). The plug contacts (6) enable an easy installation of the cable
termination insulators. The length of conductors (3) depends on the rated voltages of the cable termination insula
tors.

The IEC cable termination is available in two variants:

− dry−type cable termination
− fluidfilled cable termination

5
5

3
6 6

1
1

2
2

1 − Enclosure 4 − Opening for cable connection

2 − Cable termination insulator 5 − Insulator
3 − Conductor 6 − Plug contacts
Figure7.121: IEC cable termination (left: fluidfilled variant, right: dry−type variant)

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.122

7.12.2 Important information about planning and installation
Cable terminations are the interface between the GIS and the high−voltage system. During planning and installation
of the cable connection to the GIS in addition to the GIS manufacturer several other parties are involved. These are
for example the manufacturer of the cable, the manufacturer of the cable termination insulator and the manufacturer
of the cable accessories.

Erroneous planning or installation of the cable connection to the GIS can result in faults or damage. For this reason
we inform about the aspects which shall be considered when connecting a cable to gas−insulated switchgear. This
description is for orientation in case the GIS manufacturer is not responsible for the connection of the high−voltage
cable. We do not take any liability if aspects important for certain projects are missing.

ABB recommends to involve a planner for the planning of the cable connection, who is well−informed about the par
ticularities of high−voltage cables connected to gas−insulated switchgear. ABB disclaims any liability resulting from
wrong planning and installation of the cable connection.

Earthing of the cable shield

Cable shields can be earthed in different ways. There are cable shields earthed on one side and those earthed on
both sides.

In case of one−sided shield earthing it shall be considered that the admissible touch voltages at the end of the cable
shield are not exceeded. The use of surge arresters may be necessary. Wrong design could result in death due to
electric shock.

In case of two−sided shield earthing currents are induced in the cable shield. The cross sections of the conductors
which connect the cable shields to the earthing system must be designed correctly. The connection points shall be
designed in way that these current values can be conducted safely to the earthing system. Wrong design can result
in overheating and fire. The earthing points on the GIS enclosure of the cable termination are not designed for the
direct connection of the cable shields in general. These earthing points are intended to be used to reduce the effecs
of fast transients. Do not connect the cable shields to the GIS enclosure!

Effects of fast transients

Fast transients are generated when the disconnectors of gas−insulated switchgear are operated. These propagate
as high−frequency currents on the GIS enclosure. Since the capacitance of the cable contributes to these fast tran
sients the electrical circuit includes the cable. The high−frequency currents can cause voltage drops in the imped
ances of the earthing conductors also in those of the cable. These voltage drops can be sufficiently high that there
are flashovers in the atmospheric air in the vicinity of the cable connection. For this reason keep all earthing connec
tions as short as possible. Avoid loops. Take care that there is a low−impedance connection between unearthed
metal parts of the cable plug and the GIS enclosure. Use surge arresters if necessary. Pay particular attention to
cable type current transformers.

Installation of the cable to the cable termination insulator

The installation of the cable shall be done only by personnel with the special training and skills for this work. The
combination of cable termination insulator, cable accessories and cable must be approved by the manufacturers of
all three parts. Wrong installation of the cable can result in a fault arc with severe injury to persons and in damage to
the GIS.

Support of the mechanical load due to the cable connection

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS enclosures. This can result in leakage and in extreme cases in
bursting of the enclosure.

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS support structure. This can result in the mechanical failure of
the support structure.

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.123

7.12.3 Installation

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

The installation of the cables to or into the GIS, respectively, shall only be done by personnel which is authorized for
that work.

Installation of a cable termination insulator

Dry type cable termination insulators are usually installed during assembly of the GIS by the GIS manufacturer. Due
to the different insulation technology fluidfilled cable termination insulators have to be installed on site.

When inserting the cable termination insulator (2, Figure7.121) make sure that the conductor of the insulator is
aligned with the axis of the plug contacts (6, Figure7.121). Otherwise the spiral spring contacts inside the plug
contacts can be damaged.

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.124

7.12.4 Commissioning
Commissioning of the bay without cable

INFORMATION If a bay is commissioned without cables connected, additional work becomes nec
essary at a later time. The following procedure ensures that the personnel doing
that work encounters a defined situation concerning the switching status of the
bay. In the meantime the GIS is operated without cable. Depending on the cable
termination variant gas compartments might not be monitored sufficiently at the
cable connection opening in the cable termination insulator. The following proce
dure avoids trouble with floating potentials during that time.

If the bay is commissioned without a cable connected, the cable termation shall be disconnected from the rest of
the installation and earthed:
1. Make sure that the bay is de−energized
2. Switch line disconnector into position OFF
3. Switch make−proof earthing switch at cable termination into position ON
4. Lock the switching position of the make−proof earthing switch with a padlock
5. Record the conditions of the switches in the on−site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.125

7.12.5 Technical data
Table7.121: IEC cable termination

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand current (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage kV

140 230 275
(phase to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current* A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100

Shorttime withstand current kA  40

Duration of shortcircuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20°C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20°C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 kg depending on variant

SF6 filling weight kg depending on variant

Information about materials for disposal

Table7.122: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronicparts
Filtermaterial**
Total weight

Oil,grease
Castresin
NFmetal*

Plastics**
Almetal*
SF6

Iron

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

IEC cable termination *** *** F f F f F f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.
*** Depending on variant.

1HDG518722A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.126

7.13 IEC cable termination 7.13

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.131

7.13.1 Functional description
The IEC cable termination is used for the connection of high−voltage cables to the GIS. The IEC standard specifying
the connection interface is IEC 62271−209. The IEC cable termination is fully according to this IEC standard. The
cable termination consists of enclosure (1). On the GIS side is an insulator (5). Normally this is a support insulator so
that the cable termination is a common gas compartment with the adjacent module.

The connection of the cable (7) is realized through opening (4) in the cable termination insulator. The cable termina
tion insulator is the gas−tight end towards the cable. Cable termination insulator (2) and insulator (5) are connected
through conductors (3) and through plug contacts (6). The length of conductor (3) depends on the rated voltage of
the cable termination insulator and the availability of an isolating link. The plug contacts (6) enable an easy installa
tion of the cable termination insulators. Normally this is a straight contact, so that the GIS is directly connected with
the cable termination insulator.

A variant with isolating link is available. In this case the connection has a removable link. The link is realized with a
split conductor (8). The isolating link shall only be used with the special earthing tools provided by ABB. A detailed
description of the isolating link can be found in the relevant chapter/document.

The IEC cable termination is available in four basic variants:

− dry−type cable termination
− fluid−filled cable termination
− dry−type cable termination with isolating link
− fluid−filled cable termination with isolating link

Optionally the cable termination can be installed with a barrier insulator. The partitioned variant has a bursting
protection and two gas valves. In the partitioned variant a gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is connected
to one of the gas valves.

Optionally the cable termination can be installed with a sensor for connection of a high voltage detecting device
(HVD). The HVD device signalizes, if the conductors carry rated voltage or not.

5
8

6
3
3
6

1
1

2
2

4
4
7 7

1 − Enclosure 5 − Insulator
2 − Cable termination insulator 6 − Plug contacts
3 − Conductor 7 − Cable
4 − Opening for cable connection 8 − Split conductor
Figure7.131: IEC cable termination (here the dry−type variants are shown)

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.132

7.13.2 Important information about planning and installation
Cable terminations are the interface between the GIS and the high−voltage system. During planning and installation
of the cable connection to the GIS in addition to the GIS manufacturer several other parties are involved. These are
for example the manufacturer of the cable, the manufacturer of the cable termination insulator and the manufacturer
of the cable accessories.

Erroneous planning or installation of the cable connection to the GIS can result in faults or damage. For this reason
we inform about the aspects which shall be considered when connecting a cable to gas−insulated switchgear. This
description is for orientation in case the GIS manufacturer is not responsible for the connection of the high−voltage
cable. We do not take any liability if aspects important for certain projects are missing.

ABB recommends to involve a planner for the planning of the cable connection, who is well−informed about the par
ticularities of high−voltage cables connected to gas−insulated switchgear. ABB disclaims any liability resulting from
wrong planning and installation of the cable connection.

Earthing of the cable shield

Cable shields can be earthed in different ways. There are cable shields earthed on one side and those earthed on
both sides.

In case of one−sided shield earthing it shall be considered that the admissible touch voltages at the end of the cable
shield are not exceeded. The use of surge arresters may be necessary. Wrong design could result in death due to
electric shock.

In case of two−sided shield earthing currents are induced in the cable shield. The cross sections of the conductors
which connect the cable shields to the earthing system must be designed correctly. The connection points shall be
designed in way that these current values can be conducted safely to the earthing system. Wrong design can result
in overheating and fire. The earthing points on the GIS enclosure of the cable termination are not for the direct con
nection of the cable shields in general. These earthing points are intended to be used to reduce the effecs of fast
transients. Do not connect the cable shields to the GIS enclosure!

Effects of fast transients

Fast transients are generated when the disconnectors of gas−insulated switchgear are operated. These propagate
as high−frequency currents on the GIS enclosure. Since the capacitance of the cable contributes to these fast tran
sients the electrical circuit includes the cable. The high−frequency currents can cause voltage drops in the imped
ances of the earthing conductors also in those of the cable. These voltage drops can be sufficiently high that there
are flashovers in the atmospheric air in the vicinity of the cable connection. For this reason keep all earthing connec
tions as short as possible. Avoid loops. Take care that there is a low−impedance connection between unearthed
metal parts of the cable plug and the GIS enclosure. Use surge arresters if necessary. Pay particular attention to
cable type current transformers. The ratings for parts for high−frequency currents have to be determined by the re
sponsible grid planners. Delivery of parts is in the scope of cable supplier, not GIS supplier.

Installation of the cable to the cable termination insulator

The installation of the cable shall be done only by personnel with the special training and skills for this work. The
combination of cable termination insulator, cable accessories and cable must be approved by the manufacturers of
all three parts. Wrong installation of the cable can result in a fault arc with severe injury to persons and in damage to
the GIS.

Support of the mechanical load due to the cable connection

Solutions for supporting the mechanical load of the cable connection may be installed. For this solutions design and
delivery of parts are in the scope of cable supplier, not GIS supplier.

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS enclosures. This can result in leakage and in extreme cases in
bursting of the enclosure.

It is strictly forbidden to add any boreholes to the GIS support structure. This can result in the mechanical failure of
the support structure.

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.133

7.13.3 Installation

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insulated
switchgear section Gashandling. The description shall be
followed strictly!

The installation of the cables to and into the GIS, respectively, shall only be done by personnel which is certified for
that work.

Installation of a cable termination insulator

Dry type cable termination insulators are usually installed during assembly of the GIS by the GIS manufacturer.

Because of the different insulation technology fluid filled cable termination insulators have to be installed on site.
Before inserting the cable termination insulator (2, Figure7.131) conductor parts from the GIS (3, Figure7.131)
have to be installed on the cable termination insulator (2, Figure7.131). Otherwise galvanic contact between GIS
and cable cannot be achieved. Before inserting the cable termination insulator (2, Figure7.131) corona shields on
the GIS insulator conductors shall be removed. Otherwise GIS components can be damaged during inserting of the
cable termination insulator.

When inserting the cable termination insulator (2, Figure7.131) make sure that the conductor of the insulator is
aligned with the axis of the plug contacts (6, Figure7.131). Otherwise the spiral spring contacts inside the plug
contacts can be damaged.

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.134

7.13.4 Commissioning
Commissioning of the bay without cable

INFORMATION If a bay is commissioned without cables connected, additional work becomes nec
essary at a later time. The following procedure ensures that the personnel doing
that work encounters a defined situation concerning the switching status of the
bay. In the meantime the GIS is operated without cable. Depending on the cable
termination variant gas compartments might not be monitored sufficiently at the
cable connection opening in the cable termination insulator. The following proce
dure avoids trouble with floating potentials during that time.

If the bay is commissioned without a cable connected, the cable termation shall be disconnected from the rest of
the installation and earthed:
1. Make sure that the bay is de−energized
2. Switch line disconnector into position OFF
3. Switch make−proof earthing switch at cable termination into position ON
4. Lock the switching position of the make−proof earthing switch with a padlock
5. Record the conditions of the switches in the on−site test protocol Commissioning 1HDG518680

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.135

7.13.5 Technical data
Table7.131: IEC cable termination

Rated values kV 60/72,5 110/126 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand current (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage kV

140 230 275
(phase to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current* A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current (at 31,5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100

Shorttime withstand current kA

 40

Duration of shortcircuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20°C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20°C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6

Dry−type cable termination 190
Fluid−filled cable termination kg 260
Dry−type cable termination with isolating link 250
Fluid−filled cable termination with isolating link 300

SF6 filling weight

Dry−type cable termination 7,3
Fluid−filled cable termination kg 10,2
Dry−type cable termination with isolating link 9,4
Fluid−filled cable termination with isolating link 12,2

* The current rating refers to the GIS part. For the cables different ratings apply.

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.136

Resistance of the main current path

 14   4   8   4 

Figure7.132: Resistance of the main current path. IEC cable termination (right). IEC cable termination with isolating link (left).

Information about materials for disposal

Table7.132: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material**
Total weight

Oil, grease
Cast resin
NF metal*

Plastics**
Al metal*

Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

7,3...
170...
IEC cable termination 12,3 F f F f F f f
280*** ***

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.
*** Depending on variant.

1HDG518724B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.137

7.14 Earthing accessories for IEC cable termination 7.14

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.141

7.14.1 Functional description
The earthing accessories are used to realize a isolating gap within the gas compartment of the IEC cable termina
tion and to earth the cable.

The earthing accessories contain two different kinds of earthing equipment. The complete earthing accessories are
stored in a transportation case:
− earthing conductors, which are short−circuit−proof for failure current (Figure7.141)
− isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing with
out touching the conductors (Figure7.142)

The different earthing equipment is used for different service cases. The service cases are:
− Testing of GIS at site according to IEC 62271−203 with installed cable (Figure7.141)
− Testing of cable at site according to IEC 60840 from remote−substation (Figure7.142)

Earthing conductors, which are short−circuit proof for failure current, used for testing of GIS at site
according to IEC 62271−203 with installed cable

Figure7.141 shows the earthing with earthing conductors short−circuit−proof. The current path of the IEC cable
termination (51) is opened. Corona shields (106a) and (106b) are installed to realize an isolating gap. The isolating
gap is the insulating distance between the corona shields (106a) and (106b). The conductors (103) which are con
nected to the cable are connected to the earthing terminal (104) which itself is connected to the earthed enclosure
of the cable termination (51).

106a

106b
105

103

104

51

51 −IEC cable termination 105 −Short−circuit−proof terminal clamp

103 −Short−circuit proof earthing conductor 106a −Corona shield GIS side
104 −Short−circuit−proof earthing terminal 106b −Corona shield cable side
Figure7.141: Earthing of the cable with earthing conductors, which are short−circuit proof for testing of GIS at site according to
IEC 62271−203 with installed cable

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.142

Isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing
without touching the conductors in case of testing the cable at site according to IEC 60840 from
remote−substation

Figure7.142 shows the earthing with the earthing stick for potential connection. The current path of the IEC cable
termination (51) is opened. Corona shields (106a) and (106b) are installed to realize an isolating gap. The isolating
gap is the insulating distance between the corona shields (106a) and (106b). The short−circuit conductor for poten
tial connection (110b) is connected to the earthed enclosure (110c) of IEC cable termination (51) and to the earthing
conductor for potential connection (110a). The earthing conductor for potential connection (110a) is connected to
the terminal clamp of earthing stick (111). With the insulated handle of the earthing stick (108), the earthing conduc
tors (110a) are connected to the terminal clamps (111).

106a

106b

111

108
110a

51

110b

110c

51 −IEC cable termination 110b −Short−circuit conductors of earthing stick for potential
106a −Corona shield GIS side connection
106b −Corona shield cable side 110c −Earthing terminal at enclosure
108 −Insulated handle of earthing stick for potential connection 111 −Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection
110a −Earthing conductors of earthing stick for potential connec-
tion
Figure7.142: Earthing with isolating earthing stick for potential connection, which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing
without touching the conductors in case of testing of cable at site according to IEC 60840 from remote−substation

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.143

Transportation case

The earthing accessories are stored in a transportation case (101). It contains:

101

102

107

103
108
104
109

105

110
106

111

Pos. Description Drawing no. Amount

101 Transportation case 2GHV531011P0001 1 piece

102 User manual 2GHV531011P0002 1 piece

103 Earthing conductor short−circuit−proof 2GHV532423R0001 2 pieces

103 Earthing conductor short−circuit−proof 2GHV532423R0002 1 piece

104 Earthing terminal short−circuit−proof 2GHV531424R0001 1 piece

105 Terminal clamp short−circuit−proof 2GHV531422R0001 3 pieces

106 Corona shield 2GHV531425P0051 6 pieces

107 Sign for service condition 2GHV531449P0052 1 piece

108 Insulated handle of earthing stick for potential connection 2GHV532428P0051 1 piece

109 Holder for sign 2GHV531449R0001 1 piece

Earthing and short−circuit conductors of earthing stick for potential

110 2GHV531441R0001 1 piece
connection

111 Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection 2GHV531422R0002 3 pieces

Figure7.143: Transportation case with earthing accessories

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.144

7.14.2 Transport and Storage
The transportation case (101, Figure7.143) with earthing accessories is building site material for the GIS. The stor
age of the transportation case (101, Figure7.143) with accessories has to be indoor in dry area. Make sure the
technical data for the transportation case is fulfilled. The transportation case (101, Figure7.143) has a manual
pressure release valve. In case the transportation case (101, Figure7.143) cannot be opened, use the manual
pressure release valve. The transportation shall be done with a transportation device. Alternative the transportation
case (101, Figure7.143) can be transported by hand. For transportation by hand use the free running wheels and
the handle on the transportation case (101, Figure7.143).

WARNING Hazard Human injury due to heavy lifting.

Cause Heavy weight of the transportation case.

Action Using the handle minimal 2 persons together shall trans
port the case.

Read the user manual (102, Figure7.143) carefully. Use the equipment like following:
− Earthing conductors, which are short−circuit−proof for failure current (Figure7.141)
− Use (103), (104), (105), (106), (107), (109) in Figure7.143
− Isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing with
out touching the conductors (Figure7.142)
− Use (106), (107), (108), (109), (110), (111) in Figure7.143

In case the earthing accessories will be installed and deinstalled check the material in the case always for complete
ness.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to internal arc.

Cause Parts are forgotten inside the gas compartment and cause
an internal arc.
Action Follow the procedure in the document. Use the two−man
rule to confirm the installations. Count the used tools.
Check if the correct material is missing inside the trans
portation case during and after installations. Identify the
material with drawing number.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.145

7.14.3 Installation

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause Installation process in this document was not followed cor

rectly. Earthing during installation was not performed cor
rectly.
Action Always wear gloves. Follow the steps for installation. Take
care of the remarks in this document. Use the tools as de
scribed in the document. Use the two−man rule to cross
check all installation and switching steps. Pay attention to
the warning symbols

WARNING Hazard Work on high voltage switchgear which can result in severe
injury or death.
Cause During improper handling an internal arc can occur which
releases hot gases through the bursting protection. After
opening the enclosure parts under high voltage can be ac
cessible.
Action Carry out the work described in this chapter only, if all in
structions, safety precautions and warnings of the product
manual, especially those in chapter Gas−insulated switch
gear in section Safety instructions have been read and un
derstood and if all necessary conditions are fulfilled. ABB
denies any liability due to improper handling.

WARNING Hazard Bursting GIS parts can result in severe injury or death.

Cause Overload of pressurized parts due to false filling pressure,

especially during work on barrier insulators can result in
bursting of GIS parts.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

WARNING Hazard Danger of intoxication or skin irritation by SF6 decomposi

tion products.
Cause SF6 gas compartments can contain toxic decomposition
products after switching operations or an internal arc.
Action All work related to SF6 is described in chapter Gas−insu
lated switchgear section Gashandling. The description
shall be followed strictly!

NOTICE Hazard Damage of the cable termination assembly

Cause During installation parts can fall down and damage insulat
ing parts. During installation parts can be scratched due to
interference with other parts.
Action Always wear gloves. Perform the installations with two per
sons. Use the two−man rule to crosscheck all installation
and switching steps. Communicate failures directly before
commissioning the GIS.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.146

Preparation before installation
− The installation of the accessories is for service condition.
− Use the installed accessories only for a temporary time in service case.
− Before starting the installation make a detailed planning of the service case.
− Get the approval for the installation from the responsible person in charge of the grid section.
− Take care, that no civil work is performed in the cable grid section connected to the cable termination.
− For commissioning follow the steps in this document.
− Check the pollution level of the working area before the installation. In case the area is not dry and indoor
use additional equipment to prevent particle migration inside the gas compartment.
− Explanations will be performed for reference on a typical double−busbar bay cable exit according to
Figure7.144.
− Make a detailed and specific planning for the switching steps in the grid section of installations besides the
explanations in this document.

2 M 2 M

M remote−substation
3

2 M
M M

5 6 6

7
8 8
9

1 − Busbar 6 − Earthing switch

2 − Disconnector with maintenance earthing switch 7 − Cable termination isolating link with earthing point
3 − Circuit breaker 8 − cable termination insulator
4 − Current transformer 9 − cable
5 − Voltage transformer
Figure7.144: Typical double−busbar bay cable exit with isolating link in cable termination

Figure7.144 shows two earthing switches (6). One earthing switch (6) on the side of cable termination isolating link
with earthing point (7) and one earthing switch (6) on remote−substation side. These earthing switches are required
for the service condition. Without the earthing switches or a diffrent possibility to earth both sides of the cable, the
installations on the isolating link (7) cannot be performed.

People performing the installation have to be trained and authorized for the work. To get trainings contact your local
ABB contact. Only use the foreseen earthing accessories for the installation. Check the earthing accessories:
− Contact surfaces. Clean the contact surfaces in case of oxidation.
− Voltage carrying surfaces. Polish the voltage carrying surfaces in case of damage.
− Material is clean and dry. Clean and dry the material if necessary.
− Relevant threadings for installation. Only rethread outside the gas compartments.

In case the accessory cannot be repaired, replace none repairable accessory. Refer to the Figure7.143 for material
details.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.147

Installation of the earthing conductors, which are short−circuit−proof for failure current for testing of GIS at
side according IEC 62271−203 with installed cable

The procedure for installing the isolating link is summarized as follows. For carrying out the work follow the detailed
description on the next pages:
1. De−energize and earth IEC cable termination and cable at all cable ends, secure against reconnection at all
cable ends
2. Carry out the necessary gas handling at the cable termination and open the cable termination service
flange
3. Install short−circuit−proof terminal clamp (105)
4. Install short−circuit−proof earthing terminal (104)
5. First screw earthing conductor (103) to earthing terminal (104) then to terminal clamp (105)
6. Remove the splittable contact
7. Install corona shield (106)
8. Close the gas compartment and install sign (107) to signalize service condition
9. Continue with procedure for GIS testing according IEC 62271−203

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.148

The detailed description of the procedure is the following:
1. De−energize and earth IEC cable termination and cable at all cable ends, secure against reconnection at
all cable ends

M M

M
M M

Figure7.145: De−energize and earth IEC cable termination for typical double−busbar bay cable exit

The earthing point from the cable termination isolating link is opened in nominal condition. Disconnect all cable
ends. In Figure_1.1−5 two cable sides are shown. In case the cable has more than two cable ends, all cable ends
have to be disconnected. Make a detailed planning of the switching. Generally:
− Open all relevant short−circuit breakers
− Disconnect all relevant cable exit from busbar
− Close all relevant earthing switches

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.149

 2. Carry out the necessary gas handling at the cable termination and open the cable termination service
flange
c) Make sure that all earthing switches are in correct position and secured against reconnection. Other
wise switching operations can cause high voltage in working area and cause severe injury or death.
d) Start the evacuation.
e) Check voltage free status of the cable.
f) Check substation in working area as well as all connected substations to the cable exit.
g) Untighten the screw connection (1) and remove the service flange cover (2).
h) Use additional help for removing the service flange cover (2), e.g. a crane.

1 − Screw connection
2 − Service flange
Figure7.146: Opening of cable termination service flange

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1410

 3. Install short−circuit−proof terminal clamp (105)
a) Clean the contact surfaces (1)
b) Install terminal clamp (105) for the middle phase. Use grease for the connection. Tighten the screws
(2).
c) Install terminal clamp (105) for the other phases. Use grease for the connection. Tighten the screws
(2).

1 105

1 − Contact surface
2 − Screw connection
105 −Terminal clamp short−circuit−proof
Figure7.147: Installation of terminal clamp short−circuit−proof (105)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1411

 4. Install short−circuit−proof earthing terminal (104)
a) Remove oxidation from aluminum surface (1) and clean the contact surfaces. Use grease for the con
nection.
b) Tighten the screws (2).
c) Make sure that earthing terminal (104) connects to enclosure.
d) Make sure that enclosure has a connection to earth.

104

1 2

1 − Contact surface 104 −Earthing terminal short−circuit−proof

2 − Screw Connection
Figure7.148: Installation of earthing terminal short−circuit−proof (104)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1412

 5. First screw earthing conductor (103) to earthing terminal (104) then to terminal clamp (105)
a) Clean contact surfaces (2)
b) Earthing conductor (103) for the middle phase is longer than earthing conductors (103) for the outer
phases. Only assemble the longer earthing conductor (103) on the middle phase. Use grease for the
connection. Tighten the screws (3).
c) Install the earthing conductors for the outer phases (103). Use the shorter earthing conductors (103).
Use grease for the connection. Tighten the screws (3).
d) With installation the earthing conductors the earthing connection in the cable termination is closed (1).

103

M M

M
M M

1 − Closed earthing connection 3 − Screw Connection

2 − Contact surface 103 −Earthing conductor short−circuit−proof
Figure7.149: Installation of earthing conductors short−circuit−proof (103)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1413

 6. Remove the splittable contact
a) Check the earthing connection before opening splitable contact (4).
b) Open splitable contact (4) by untighten the screws (3). The connection between the spiral springs (2)
and the splitable contact (4) opens. The splitable contact (4) directly opens in both sides. Take care
that no part falls down.
c) Store the removed contacts (4) in the transportation case (101, Figure7.143) during service condi
tion. Use the free spots of the installed accessory to store the removed contacts (4).
d) Opening the splitable contact (4) opens the connection between GIS cable exit and cable. GIS cable
exit and cable have an isolating gap (1).

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause Cable has potential due to induced voltages, even if earth

ing connection is closed on remote−substation side.
Action Do not remove the earthing connections. Use the two−man
rule to crosscheck all installation and switching steps.

3
M M

2 4

M
M M

1 − Isolating gap 3 − Screw Connection

2 − Spiral springs 4 − Splitable contact
Figure7.1410: Removing of the splitable contact (4)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1414

 7. Install corona shield (106)
a) Grease the contact surface of the corona shield (106)
b) Push the corona shields (106) on the spiral spring (1). Push the corona shield (106) up to the end. To
remove the corona shield (106) use the threading inside the corona shield.
c) Install the corona shield (106) on GIS side as well as cable side.
d) Check if all accessories are installed correctly.
e) Check if the correct accessory was removed from the transportation case (101, Figure7.143).
f) Clean the gas compartment adequately. Make the gas compartment ready for gas filling.

106

1 − Spiral springs 106 −Corona shield

Figure7.1411: Installation of the corona shield (106).

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1415

 8. Close the gas compartment and install sign (107) to signalize service condition
a) Install the o−ring (2) for the service flange.
b) In case a pressure relief device is installed, check if the drying material needs to be renewed.
c) Install the service flange cover (5) with the screw connection on the service flange (3), (4).
d) Use additional help for installing the service flange cover (5), e.g. a crane.
e) Install the holder for sign (109) with the top screw connection of the flange (4).
f) Install the sign for service condition (107) on the holder for sign (109). The sign indicates the service
case. In case the sign is not installed, service case can be forgotten. Do not install the service sign
with pressurized gas compartment.
g) Tighten the screw connection (3), (4).
h) After installation and checking, the gas compartment has to be filled with gas. Filling pressure is the
nominal pressure of the gas compartment.

4
1
109
2
107

3
5

1 − Service flange 5 −Cover service flange

2 − O−ring 107 −Sign for service condition
3 − Screw connection service flange 109 −Holder for sign
4 − Screw connection service flange
Figure7.1412: Closing of the gas compartment and installation of sign (107)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1416

 9. Continue with procedure for GIS testing according IEC 62271−203
a) Make a detailed planning of the further steps for GIS testing.

The final picture of the installation of the earthing accessory for earthing conductors short−circuit−proof for failure
current can be seen in Figure7.1413.

109

106 107

M M
105

103

M
M M

104

103 −Earthing conductor short−circuit−proof 106 −Corona shield

104 −Earthing terminal short−circuit−proof 107 −Sign for service condition
105 −Terminal clamp short−circuit−proof 109 −Holder for sign
Figure7.1413: Final picture of the installation of the earthing accessory for earthing conductors short−circuit−proof

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1417

Installation of earthing with isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not short−circuit
proof, used for earthing without touching the conductors in case of testing of cable at side according
IEC60840 from remote−substation

The procedure for installing the isolating link is summarized as follows. For carrying out the work follow the detailed
description on the next pages:
1. De−energize and earth IEC cable termination and cable from all cable ends, secure against reconnection
from all cable ends
2. Evacuate the cable termination and open the cable termination service flange
3. Install terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection (111)
4. Screw earthing conductor (110b) to cable termination enclosure and use insulated handle (108) to connect
earthing conductors (110a) to terminal clamp (111)
5. Remove the splitable contact
6. Install corona shield (106)
7. Use insulated handle (108) to remove earthing conductors (110a) from terminal clamp (111) and remove
short−circuit conductor (110b) from cable termination enclosure
8. Close the gas compartment and install sign (107) to signalize service condition
9. Continue with procedure for cable testing at side according IEC 60840 from remote−substation

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1418

The detailed description of the procedure is the following:
1. De−energize and earth IEC cable termination and cable from all cable ends, secure against reconnection
from all cable ends
Follow the section 1.De−energize and earth IEC cable termination and cable from all cable ends, secure
against reconnection from all cable ends" on page 7.149.
2. Evacuate the cable termination and open the cable termination service flange
Follow the section 2.Evacuate the cable termination and open the cable termination service flange" on
page 7.1410.
3. Install terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection (111)
a) Clean the contact surfaces (1).
b) First install terminal clamp (105) for the middle phase, than for the other phases. Use grease for the
connection.
c) Align the clamps (111) according to the tolerances with flexible standard measuring tools:
− In the point of minimal distance from the clamp (111) to enclosure wall (3), a distance of 42 mm is
required.
− From center to center beetween the outer clamps (111) a distance of 235 mm is required.
− The middle clamp shall be in line to the service flange.
− The alignment of the clamps (111) makes the accessory able to withstand the specified voltage−
rating.
− Without aligning the conductors correctly, a flashover can occur during testing and damage the
cable termination assembly.
d) Tighten the screws (2).

(50)

(25)

2 111

111

42±2 42±2

235±4

1 − Contact surface 3 −Enclosure

2 − Screw Connection 111 −Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection
Figure7.1414: Installation of terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection (111). Dimensions are specified in millime
ters.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1419

 4. Screw earthing conductor (110b) to cable termination enclosure and use insulated handle (108) to connect
earthing conductors (110a) to terminal clamp (111)
a) Remove oxidation from aluminum surface and clean the contact surfaces (2) (Figure7.1415(c)).
b) Connect the short−circuit conductor of earthing stick for potential connection (110b) to the enclosure.
Use grease for the connection. Tighten the screw (3). The short−circuit conductor (110b) connects to
enclosure. Make sure that enclosure has a connection to earth. Refer to the Figure7.1415(c).
c) Install the connection clamp for terminal clamp (5) on the insulated handle (108) according
Figure7.1415(b). Push connection clamp (104) in insulated handle (108) and turn connection clamp
(104).
d) Both parts are connected via bayonet mount. Make sure, that the bayonet mount beetween connec
tion clamp (5) and insulated handle (108) is fixed. Refer to the Figure7.1415(b).
e) Use the insulated handle (108) to hang connection clamp (5) in the terminal clamps (111). Never
touch the insulated handle (108) across the hand limit (4), because it reduces the insulation distance.
Refer to the Figure7.1415(c).
f) Rotate the insulated handle (108) until rotation is not possible any more. Rotation tightens the con
nection between connection clamp (5) and the terminal clamps (111). Set the connection tight. Refer
to the Figure7.1415(c).
g) Remove the insulated handle (108) from first phase by using the bayonet mount (Figure7.1415(b)).
h) Continue with the same procedure for each phase, until each phase is earthed.
i) After earthing the last phase remove the insulated handle (108) completely from the assembly by us
ing the bayonet mount. Refer to the Figure7.1415(b).
j) Installation of the earthing conductors closes the earthing connection in the isolating link (1). Refer to
the Figure7.1415(a).

M M 111
4
108
5 110a

M
110b

M
M M

1
108

Figure7.1415(a) Figure7.1415(b Figure7.1415(c)

1 − Closed earthing connection 110a −Earthing conductors of earthing stick for potential con-
2 − Contact surface nection
3 − Screw Connection 110b −Short−circuit conductors of earthing stick for potential
4 − Hand limit of insulated handle connection
5 − Connection clamp for terminal clamp 111 −Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connec-
108 −Insulated handle of earthing stick for potential connec- tion
tion
Figure7.1415: Installation of earthing conductor (110b) to cable termination enclosure with insulated handle (108)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1420

 5. Remove the splitable contact
a) Make sure that the earthing connection is fixed.
b) Follow the section 6.Remove the splitable contact" on page 7.1414 to remove the splitable contact.
Refer to the Figure7.1416.
c) Opening the splitable contact (4) opens the connection between GIS cable exit and cable. GIS cable
exit and cable have an isolating gap (1).

M M 4
2

M
M M

1 − Isolating gap 3 − Screw Connection

2 − Spiral springs 4 − Splitable contact
Figure7.1416: Removing of the splitable contact (3)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1421

 6. Install corona shield (106)
Follow the section 7.Install corona shield" on page 7.1415. Refer to Figure7.1417.

106

1 − Spiral springs 106 −Corona shield

Figure7.1417: Installation of the corona shield (106)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1422

 7. Use insulated handle (108) to remove earthing conductors (110a) from terminal clamp (111) and remove
short−circuit conductor (110b) from cable termination enclosure
a) Check if all accessories are installed correctly. Check if the correct accessory was removed from the
transportation case (101, Figure7.143).
b) Make the gas compartment ready for gas filling. Clean the gas compartment adequately.
c) Install the fixed connection clamp (4) on the insulated handle (108). Push insulated handle (108) in
connection clamp (4) and turn insulated handle (108). Both parts are connected via bayonet mount.
Make sure that connection clamp (4) is fixed with insulated handle (108) with the bayonet mount. Re
fer to the Figure7.1418(b).
d) Untighten the connection between terminal clamp and connection clamp (4) by rotating the insulated
handle (108). Rotate the insulated handle up to the point where no rotation is possible any more.
Never touch the insulated handle (108) across the hand limit (4), because it reduces the insulation dis
tance. Refer to the Figure7.1418(c).
e) Remove the earthing conductor (110a) from the terminal clamp (111) by using the insulated handle
(108). Refer to the Figure7.1418(c).

INFORMATION By removing the earthing connection a spark may occur. The spark occurs due to
induced voltages in the cable. The spark has low energy and will disappear after a
short time.

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause Touching of the conductors during the work, because the

enclosure is opened and conductors are under potential.
After opening earthing connection parts are under poten
tial, even if earthing connection is closed on remote−
substation side. Cause is induced voltage inside the
cables.
Action Do not get near to the conductors. Do not touch the con
ductors after opening the earthing connection. Always
wear gloves. Use the two−man rule to crosscheck all instal
lation and switching steps. Remove not needed parts from
the installation area to minimize trip hazard.

f) Open the bayonet mount between connection clamp (4) and insulated handle (108) in safe area. Refer
to the Figure7.1418(b).
g) Use the same procedure for each phase. For each phase use the insulated handle (108) to remove
the earthing conductor (110a) from the terminal clamp (111). Refer to the Figure7.1418(c).
h) After deinstallation of all earthing conductors the connection from short−circuit conductor (110b) and
cable termination enclosure can be opened. Untighten the screw connection (2). Do not open the
connection before deinstallation of all earthing conductors. Refer to the Figure7.1418(c).
i) The procedure opens the earthing connection (2) for cable on GIS side without touching the conduc
tors. Earthing connection needs to be removed for cable testing according IEC 60840. Refer to the
Figure7.1418(a).

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1423

 4
111
M M 108
110a
3

4
M

110b

M
M M

2
1

108

Figure7.1418( Figure7.1418( Figure7.1418(c)

a) b)
1 − Open earthing connection 108 −Insulated handle of earthing stick for potential connection
2 − Screw connection 110a −Earthing conductors of earthing stick for potential connec-
3 − Hand limit of insulated handle tion
4 − Connection clamp for terminal clamp of earthing stick 110b −Short−circuit conductors of earthing stick for potential
for potential connection connection
111 −Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection
Figure7.1418: Deinstallation of earthing conductors (110a) with insulated handle (108)

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1424

 8. Close the gas compartment and install sign (107) to signalize service condition

DANGER Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock.

Cause Touching of conductors during the work, because the en

closure is opened and conductor is under potential. After
opening earthing connection parts are under potential,
even if earthing connection is closed on remote−substation
side. Cause is induced voltage inside the cables.
Action Do not get near to the conductors. Do not touch the con
ductors after opening the earthing connection. Always
wear gloves. Use the two−man rule to crosscheck all instal
lation and switching steps. Remove not needed parts from
the installation area to minimize trip hazard.

Follow the section 8.Close the gas compartment and install sign (107) to signalize service condition
(109)" on page 7.1416. Refer to the Figure7.1419 for closing of the gas compartment.

4
1
109

2
107

1 − Service flange 5 −Cover service flange

2 − O−ring 107 −Sign for service condition
3 − Connection service flange 109 −Holder for sign
4 − Connection service flange
Figure7.1419: Closing of the gas compartment and installation of sign

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1425

 9. Continue with procedure for cable testing at side according IEC 60840 from counter−substation
a) Make a detailed planning of the further steps for cable testing.
The final picture of the installation of isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not
short−circuit proof, used for earthing without touching the conductors can be seen in Figure7.1420.

109

107
M M
106

111
M

M
M M

106 −Corona shield 109 −Holder for sign

107 −Sign for service condition 111 −Terminal clamp of earthing stick for potential connection
Figure7.1420: Final picture of the installation of the earthing accessory for Isolating earthing stick for potential connection only,
which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing without touching the conductors

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1426

7.14.4 Deinstallation and Commissioning
The deinstallation of the earthing accessory is the procedure of installation in reverse order. Observe the description
in section 7.14.3 Installation.

Make a detailed planning for the switching steps in the grid section. During deinstallation of the earthing accessory
check the following points before commissioning:
− Visual check of the spiral spring contact. Replace the spring contact in case of plastic deformation of the
spiral springs or damage of the outer surface.
− Check the material for completeness after the deinstallation. Refer to the section 7.14.2.

Make sure that the cable termination is prepared for nominal service condition according to Figure7.1421.
− The splitable contact is closed (1). The screws of the splitable contact (1) are tightened.
− The earthing connections in the cable termination are removed (2).
− The service flange cover is closed (3).

M M
2

3
M

M
M M

1
2

1 − Closed splitable contact 3 − Closed service flange

2 − Removed earthing connection
Figure7.1421: Final picture after all deinstallations of cable termination accessory

After the deinstallation the GIS has to be commissioned. For commissioning the GIS use the soak test according
IEC 62271−203.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to internal arc.

Cause Commissioning of the GIS without testing the GIS after the
service condition causes internal arc due to assembling
failures
Action Use the soak test according IEC 62271−203. The part of the
GIS to be tested shall be energized by the service voltage
through the largest possible impedance in order to reduce
damage caused by a possible disruptive discharge. The
test period shall be at least 24 h.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1427

7.14.5 Technical data
Table7.141: Transportation case

Rated values

Temperature range °C −30 to 55

Weight (incl. earthing accessory) kg 50

Table7.142: IEC cable termination isolating gap

Rated values

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 750

Short−time power frequency withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 325

SF6 minimum functional pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520 / 600

Table7.143: Earthing conductors, which are short−circuit−proof for failure current

Rated values

Copper cross section mm2 750

Peak withstand current (60Hz, 45ms, factor 2.6) kA 164

Short−time withstand current kA 63

Duration of short−circuit s 3

Table7.144: Isolating earthing stick for potential connection only, which is not short−circuit proof, used for earthing without
touching the conductors

Rated values

Copper cross section mm2 35

Peak withstand current (60Hz, 45ms, factor 2.6) kA not rated

Short−time withstand current kA not rated

Duration of short−circuit s not rated

Withstand voltage according IEC 60840 for voltage test after installation kV 150
(phase to ground / phase to phase)

Duration of withstand voltage according IEC 60840 h 1

Withstand voltage for partial discharge test according IEC 60885−3 kV 131
(phase to ground / phase to phase)

Sensitivity for partial discharge test according IEC 60885−3 pC 5

SF6 minimum functional pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520 / 600

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1428

Information about materials for disposal
Table7.145: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Aluminum and its alloys

Porcellaine/Ceramics
Nonferrous metals

Electronic parts
Filter material *
Iron or steel

Cast resing
Total weight

Oil, grease
Plastics *
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Transportation case with earthing accessory 50 F f F F F f

* Only if module is a separate gas compartment.
** Depending on variant.

1HDG518796Aen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1429

7.15 Extension module 7.15

1HDG518762Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.151

7.15.1 Functional description

The extension module is used, if certain requirements concerning the service continuity of the GIS have to be ful
filled during extension, repair or maintenance. The figure shows one of the possible installation positions. The mod
ules can be mounted within an installation in different positions depending on the requirements. Typical positions of
the extension module are at the end of busbars, in the course of the busbar or between busbar and circuit−breaker.

The conductors (2) of the extension module connect both flanges (1) of the module. The flanges can be equipped
with support or barrier insulators. If the extension module is equipped with two barrier insulators, the module is a
separate gas compartment. In this case the extension module is equipped with a pressure relief device (3) and gas
valves (4). In case of a separate gas compartment a gas density monitor or a gas density sensor is installed to one
of the gas valves.

1
4
2

1
3

1 − Flange with insulator 3 − Pressure relief device

2 − Conductor 4 − Gas valve
Figure 7.15-1: Extension module

7.15.2 Commissioning

INFORMATION The necessary work concerning commissioning is defined in the On Site Test Pro
tocol 1HDG518680. Carry out this work during commissioning and record the re
sults in the protocol.

1HDG518762Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.152

7.15.3 Technical data
Table 7.15-1: Extension module

Rated values kV 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 650

Short−duration power−frequency withstand voltage (phase kV

275
to earth)

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

3150 (at 50 Hz)

Normal current A
3000 (at 60 Hz)

Peak withstand current kA 100

Short-time withstand current kA 40

Duration of short-circuit s 3

SF6 minimum functional pressure (at 20 C) kPa 520

SF6 filling pressure (at 20 C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 kg 40

SF6 filling weight kg 2*

Dimensions (width x height x depth) mm 520 x 700 x 340

* The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the partitioning concept and the shape of the conductors. Therefore the values
mentioned in this table are only approximate values. The exact values can be found on the SF6 information of the installation.

Resistance values of the main current path

R  6 

Figure 7.15-2: Extension module

1HDG518762Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.153

Information about materials for disposal
Table 7.15-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material**

Electronic parts
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*

Plastics**
Al metal*

Cast resin
Iron
SF6
Content compared to part total weight
kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Extension module 40 2 F f F f f f

Barrier insulator 26 F F

Support insulator 18 F F
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** Only if module is a separate gas compartment.

1HDG518762Cen ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.154

7.16 Voltage transformer VT0 7.16

1HDG518730B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.161

7.16.1 Equipment description
Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary voltage is proportional to and in
phase with the primary voltage for all practical purposes. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the power
system voltage to be measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective devices. At
the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically separated from each other.

The inductive voltage transformer complies with the relevant IEC, ANSI and IEEEstandards. Usually it has two
secondary windings and one auxiliary winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are projectspecific.

The inductive voltage transformer is separated from the adjacent GIS compartment by means of a barrier insulator
(5). It is equipped with two gas valves (4), a SF6gas adsorber and a pressure relief device (2).

2
3

1 − Terminal box 4 − Gas valve

2 − Pressure relief device 5 − Barrier insulator
3 − Cable outlet
Figure7.161: Voltage transformer VT0

1HDG518730B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.162

7.16.2 Installation

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may leed to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Never reduce the pressure below 150 kPa SF6.

The voltage transfomer can be mounted on several places of the switchgear. Possible mounting locations are:
S Mounting on outgoing disconnector
S Mounting on T or Xmodule on feeder side
S Mounting on the end of a busbar

For mounting the voltage transformer strictly observe the description in chapter Modules in the following sections:
Table7.161: Description of the installation of the voltage transformer VT0

Mounting location Chapter

Outgoing disconnector Disconnector / earthing switch

T or Xmodule T or Xmodule

End of busbar Disconnector / earthing switch

1HDG518730B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.163

7.16.3 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to high voltage at the terminal
block of the voltage transformer.
Cause Some voltage transformers are equipped with test discon
nect terminal blocks. If the connection in these terminal
blocks between the primary earth wiring of the voltage
transformer and the cubicle wiring is disconnected the
earthing of the primary voltage transformer winding is not
effective. High voltage will be conducted to the terminal
blocks and causes an electric shock.
Action Do not energize the voltage transformer with the discon
necting gap in test disconnect terminal blocks open. Insert
the switching lock. Cover the terminal block with protection
cover and warning sign. Check all measures before ener
gizing.

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may leed to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Never reduce the pressure below 150 kPa SF6.

Carry out the following work before commissioning:

1. Check voltage transformer for external damages.
In case of any damages contact the manufacturer.
2. Check shock indicators.
In case the shock indicators were activated, contact the manufacturer
3. Check if connections in the terminal box are consistent with projectspecific circuit diagram
4. Check if earthing of primary and secondary winding are consistent with projectspecific circuit diagram
5. Check if micro circuitbreakers of secondary circuits work
6. Fill voltage transformer with SF6 at filling pressure. Observe strictly that the voltage transformer never shall
be evacuated.

Check in the drawings of the secondary circuits if the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal
blocks. In case the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal blocks:
7. Check that the disconnecting gap of the terminal block is closed. If not, close disconnecting gap
8. Check that the switch interlock is inserted. If not, insert switch interlock
9. Check that the cover including the warning sign is installed on the terminal block. If not, install the cover
10. Record the result in the OnSite Test Protocol 1HDG518680

1HDG518730B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.164

7.16.4 Technical data
Electrical and mechanical data
Table7.162: Voltage transformer VT0

Rated values kV 72,5

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (to earth) kV 325

Power frequency withstand voltage (to earth) kV 140

Frequency Hz 50/60

Min. functional pressure SF6/filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520/600

Weight without SF6 (approx.) kg 280*

Weight of SF6 filling (approx.) kg 4**

* The weight of the voltage transformer can vary. The weight depends on the specification of the device which is a project
specific feature.
** The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the specification of the device. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only
approximate values. The exact values can be found on the nameplates of the installation.

Information on materials for disposal

Table 7.16-3: Material fractions for voltage transformers VT0

GIS component Weight Material

Porcellain/ceramics

Electronic parts
Ferrous metals

Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF−metal*

Cast resin
Al-metal*

Plastics
SF6

Fraction compared to total part weight in% per

kg kg weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + =dependant on type

Voltage transformer VT0 280 4 F F F F F f

* Al−metal = aluminum or aluminum alloy, NF−metal = non−ferrous metal

1HDG518730B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.165

7.17 Voltage transformer VT1 7.17

1HDG518731B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.171

7.17.1 Equipment description

Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary voltage is proportional to and in
phase with the primary voltage for all practical purposes. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the power
system voltage to be measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective devices. At
the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically separated from each other.

The inductive voltage transformer complies with the relevant IEC, ANSI and IEEEstandards. Usually it has two
secondary windings and one auxiliary winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are projectspecific.

The inductive voltage transformer is separated from the adjacent GIS compartment by means of a barrier insulator
(5) or (7). It is equipped with two gas valves (4), a SF6gas adsorber and a bursting protection (2).

The voltage transformer VT1 is made in a design for connection to flanges with diameter 520 mm and in a design
for connection to flanges with diameter 735 mm.

4
1
4
6
1
2 6

2
3

3
6

5
7

1 − Terminal box 5 − Barrier insulator 735

2 − Bursting protection 6 − Lifting hooks
3 − Cable outlet 7 − Barrier insulator 520
4 − Gas valve
Figure 7.17-1: Voltage transformer VT1

1HDG518731B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.172

7.17.2 Installation

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may lead to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Never reduce the pressure below 150 kPa SF6.

The voltage transformer can be mounted on several places of the switchgear. Possible mounting locations are:
S Mounting on outgoing disconnector
S Mounting on T- or X-module on feeder side
S Mounting on the end of a busbar

For mounting the voltage transformer strictly observe the description in chapter Modules in the following sections:
Table 7.17-1: Description of the installation of the voltage transformer VT1

Mounting location Chapter

Outgoing disconnector Disconnector / earthing switch

T or Xmodule T or Xmodule

End of busbar Disconnector / earthing switch

1HDG518731B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.173

7.17.3 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to high voltage at the terminal
block of the voltage transformer.
Cause Some voltage transformers are equipped with test discon
nect terminal blocks. If the connection in these terminal
blocks between the primary earth wiring of the voltage
transformer and the cubicle wiring is disconnected the
earthing of the primary voltage transformer winding is not
effective. High voltage will be conducted to the terminal
blocks and causes an electric shock.
Action Do not energize the voltage transformer with the discon
necting gap in test disconnect terminal blocks open. Insert
the switching lock. Cover the terminal block with protection
cover and warning sign. Check all measures before energi
zing.

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may lead to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Never reduce the pressure below 150 kPa SF6.

Carry out the following work before commissioning:

1. Check voltage transformer for external damages.
In case of any damages contact the manufacturer.
2. Check shock indicators.
In case the shock indicators were activated, contact the manufacturer
3. Check if connections in the terminal box are consistent with project-specific circuit diagram
4. Check if earthing of primary and secondary winding are consistent with project-specific circuit diagram
5. Check if micro circuit-breakers of secondary circuits work
6. Fill voltage transformer with SF6 at filling pressure. Observe strictly that the voltage transformer never shall be
evacuated.

Check in the drawings of the secondary circuits if the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal
blocks. In case the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal blocks:
7. Check that the disconnecting gap of the terminal block is closed. If not, close disconnecting gap
8. Check that the switch interlock is inserted. If not, insert switch interlock
9. Check that the cover including the warning sign is installed on the terminal block. If not, install the cover
10. Record the result in the On-Site Test Protocol 1HDG518680

1HDG518731B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.174

7.17.4 Technical data

Electrical and mechanical data

Table 7.17-2: Voltage transformer VT1

Rated values kV 72,5 123 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (to earth) kV 325 550 650

Power frequency withstand voltage (to earth) kV 140 230 275

Frequency Hz 50 / 60

Min. functional pressure SF6 / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600 / 700

Weight without SF6 (approx.) kg 570*

Weight of SF6 filling (approx.) kg 9**

* The weight of the voltage transformer can vary. The weight depends on the specification of the device which is a project
specific feature.
** The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the specification of the device. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only
approximate values. The exact values can be found on the nameplates of the installation.

Information on materials for disposal

Table 7.17-3: Material fractions for voltage transformers VT1

GIS component Weight Material

Porcellain/ceramics

Electronic parts
Ferrous metals

Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al-metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
SF6

Fraction compared to total part weight in% per

kg kg weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + =dependant on type

Voltage transformer VT1 (flange 520) 550 9 F F F F F f

Voltage transformer VT1 (flange 735) 570 9 F F F F F f

* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metal

1HDG518731B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.175

7.18 Voltage transformer VT1
with motor−operated isolating device (Alstom)
7.18

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.181

7.18.1 Functional description

Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary voltage is proportional to and in
phase with the primary voltage for all practical purposes. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the power
system voltage to be measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective devices. At
the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically separated from each other.

The voltage transformer is equipped with an integrated isolating device so that the voltage transformer active parts
can be isolated from the switchgear. The isolation device is motor operated. A manual operation (emergency opera
tion) is possible, e.g. in case of supply voltage outage.

The cast resin insulator is designed for the use with SF6. It is installed to the flange of the voltage transformer enclo
sure and closes the gas compartment tightly. The voltage transformer is available with flange diameter 520 mm and
flange diameter 735mm. Depending on the flange diameter the installation procedures differ.

The inductive voltage transformer complies with the relevant IEC, ANSI and IEEEstandards. Usually it has two
secondary windings and one auxiliary winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are projectspecific.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to internal arc.

Cause If the position of the isolating device is not in the exact

position OPEN or CLOSED and the voltage transformer is
energized an internal arc can occur. An internal arc can
also occur, if the isolating device is operated when the volt
age transformer is energized.
Action Operate the voltage transformer only if the integrated iso
lating device is in position CLOSED or OPEN. Operate the
isolating device only if the switchgear section has been
de−energized and earthed.

INFORMATION The isolating device is not a disconnector in the sense of IEC 62271−102. Use the
disconnecting device only for testing purposes.

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.182

The inductive voltage transformer is separated from the adjacent GIS compartment by means of a barrier insulator
(6). It is equipped with two gas valves (4), one SF6 gas adsorber and a pressure relief device (2). The terminal box (1)
holds terminal blocks, fuses and wiring.

1 10
7 2
8

3
5

6 4 7

1 − Terminal box with terminal blocks 6 − Barrier insulator

2 − Pressure relief device 7 − Liifting lugs
3 − Cable glands 8 − Nameplate
4 − Gas valves 9 − Motor
5 − Earthing terminal 10 − Hand crank for manual operation
Figure 7.18-1: Three-phase encapsulated inductive voltage transformer with motor operated isolation device

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.183

7.18.2 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to high voltage at the terminal
block of the voltage transformer.
Cause Some voltage transformers are equipped with test discon
nect terminal blocks. If the connection in these terminal
blocks between the primary earth wiring of the voltage
transformer and the cubicle wiring is disconnected the
earthing of the primary voltage transformer winding is not
effective. High voltage will be conducted to the terminal
blocks and causes an electrical shock.
Action Do not energize the voltage transformer with the discon
necting gap in test disconnect terminal blocks open. Insert
the switching lock. Cover the terminal block with protection
cover and warning sign. Check all measures before energi
zing.

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may lead to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Always keep a minimum pressure of 150 kPa SF6.

Carry out the following work before commissioning:

1. Check voltage transformer for external damages.
In case of any damages contact the manufacturer.
2. Check shock indicators.
In case the shock indicators were activated, contact the manufacturer
3. Check if connections in the terminal box are consistent with project-specific circuit diagram
4. Check if earthing of primary and secondary winding are consistent with project-specific circuit diagram
5. Check if micro circuit-breakers of secondary circuits work
6. Fill voltage transformer with SF6 at filling pressure. Observe strictly that the voltage transformer never shall be
evacuated.

Check in the drawings of the secondary circuits if the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal
blocks. In case the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal blocks:
7. Check that the disconnecting gap of the terminal block is closed. If not, close disconnecting gap
8. Check that the switch interlock is inserted. If not, insert switch interlock
9. Check that the cover including the warning sign is installed on the terminal block. If not, install the cover
10. Record the result in the On-Site Test Protocol 1HDG518680

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.184

7.18.3 Operation of the integrated isolating device

The voltage transformer is equipped with an integrated isolating device so that the voltage transformer active parts
can be isolated from the switchgear.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death if isolating device is operated when

voltage transformer is energized.
Cause Switching the energized voltage transformer can result in
an internal arc.
Action Make sure that the switchgear section, where the voltage
transformer is connected to, has been de−energized and
earthed.

7.18.3.1 Functional description of the isolating device

The integrated isolating device is equipped with a motor (6, Figure7.182). The position of the isolating device is
indicated in window (1, Figure7.182) for position CLOSED, in window (2, Figure7.182) for position OPEN. If the
supply voltage may be down, the isolating device can be operated by a hand crank (3, Figure7.182) as an emer
gency operation procedure.

6 3

7 4

CLOSED OPEN

3 2 1
5

4
2 1

5
1 − Position indication CLOSED 5 − Padlock
2 − Position indication OPEN 6 − Housing of motor
3 − Handcrank 7 − Knurled wheel
4 − Interlocking lever 8 − Operating direction handcrank
Figure 7.18-2: Elements for motor operation and manual emergency operation

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.185

Motor operation and manual emergency operation have three interlocking positions (Figure7.183), in order to
avoid accidental operation. These three interlocking positions are selected by an interlocking lever (4,
Figure7.182). The usual position is that at 0 degree. The second position is reached by turning the interlocking
lever by 30 degrees. The third position is reached from position 30 degrees by pressing the knurled wheel (7,
Figure7.182) downwards and turning the interlocking lever by additional 60 degrees.

90 degrees

30 degrees

0 degree

Figure 7.18-3: Three interlocking positions at housing of motor

All three interlocking positions are listed in Table7.181. When the switchgear section, where the voltage trans
former is connected to, is energized again, the interlocking lever has to be moved into position 0 degree and the
padlock has to be attached before.
Table 7.18-1: Interlocking conditions of all three positions of the interlocking lever

Position interlocking lever Motor Manual (handcrank)

0 degree (padlock) locked locked

30 degrees unlocked locked

90 degrees locked unlocked

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.186

7.18.3.2 Operation of the isolating device by motor

OPEN isolating device

Position OPEN (Figure7.184) means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are not connected.
1. De-energize and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2)
3. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 30 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
4. Operate installation specific control element in the control cubicle. For details see order related documents sup-
plied with the switchgear

The control element supplies a signal to the motor. The motor runs till final position OPEN is reached. A limit switch
stops the motor.
5. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 0 degree (Figure 7.18-3)
6. Attach padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2) and lock

CLOSE isolating device

Position CLOSED (Figure7.184) means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are connected.
1. De-energize and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2)
3. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 30 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
4. Operate installation specific control element in the control cubicle. For details see order related documents sup-
plied with the switchgear

The control element supplies a signal to the motor. The motor runs till final position CLOSED is reached. A limit
switch stops the motor.
5. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 0 degree (Figure 7.18-3)
6. Attach padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2) and lock

Interlocking towards switching device of the switchgear

In addition to the interlocking of motor and hand crank of the isolating device, the isolating device can be electrically
interlocked towards switching devices within the switchgear. This interlocking is planned individually for each proj
ect. For details see interlocking overview within project specific documents supplied with the switchgear.

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.187

 1

Position ON/CLOSED:

2 4

Position OFF/OPEN

1 − Motor operation with manual emergency operation 3 − Contact towards switchgear

2 − Voltage transformer active part 4 − Shaft
Figure 7.18-4: Positions of the isolating device

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.188

7.18.3.3 Manual operation of isolating device (emergency operation)

If the supply voltage of the secondary circuits is down, e.g. in case of an outage, it is possible to operate the isolat
ing device manually (emergency operation).

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death if isolating device is operated when

voltage transformer is energized.
Cause In case of manual operation of the isolating device all inter
locking towards switching devices within the switchgear is
ignored. Switching the energized voltage transformer can
result in an internal arc.
Action Only personnel which is authorized for switching opera
tions with missing interlocking shall operate the isolating
device manually. Make sure that the switchgear section,
where the voltage transformer is connected to, has been
de−energized and earthed.

WARNING Hazard Malfunction of the isolating device can result in severe in
jury or death. Severe injury or death due to electrical
shock.
Cause If the isolating device is not in one of its end positions and
the switchgear is energized, an internal arc can occur. The
precision of the optical position indicator is not sufficient
for indicating the exact position.
Action Supervise the final position of the isolating device at the
position switches S3 and S5, S4 and S6 respectively, using
a continuity tester. Make sure, that the circuits of the posi
tion switches are de−energized and secured against ener
gising.

Figure 7.18-5: Arrangement of position switches S3 and S5 (position OPEN), S4 and S6 (position CLOSED)

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.189

OPEN isolating device

Position OPEN (Figure7.184) means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are not connected.
1. De-energize and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2)
3. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 30 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
4. Push knurled wheel (7, Figure 7.18-2) down and turn interlocking lever to position 90 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
5. Turn handcrank into direction OPEN
b) Connect continuity tester to position switches S3 and S5 or to the appropriate terminal blocks
c) Turn hand crank approx. 2200 to 2500 times. For assistance the hand crank can be removed. An electric
screwdriver can be attached with a square wrench socket
d) When the continuity tester indicates position OPEN, turn the hand crank 20 times more so that the position
switch indicates the position reliably
6. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 0 degree (Figure 7.18-3)
7. Attach padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2) and lock

CLOSE isolating device

Position CLOSED (Figure7.184) means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are connected.
1. De-energize and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2)
3. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 30 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
4. Push knurled wheel (7, Figure 7.18-2) down and turn interlocking lever to position 90 degrees (Figure 7.18-3)
5. Turn handcrank into direction OPEN
a) Connect continuity tester to position switches S4 and S6 or to the appropriate terminal blocks
b) Turn hand crank approx. 2200 to 2500 times. For assistance the hand crank can be removed. An electric
screwdriver can be attached with a square wrench socket
c) When the continuity tester indicates position CLOSED, turn the hand crank 20 times more so that the posi-
tion switch indicates the position reliably
6. Turn interlocking lever (4, Figure 7.18-2) to position 0 degree (Figure 7.18-3)
7. Attach padlock (5, Figure 7.18-2) and lock

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1810

7.18.4 Technical data

Electrical and mechanical data

Table 7.18-2: Voltage transformer VT1 with motor−operated isolating device

Rated values kV 72,5 123 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (phase to earth) kV 325 550 650

Shorttime power frequency withstand voltage (phase to kV 140 230 275

earth)

Frequency Hz 50/60

Min. functional pressure SF6/filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600/700

Weight without SF6 (approx.) kg 640*

Weight of SF6 filling (approx.) kg 13,5**

* The weight of the voltage transformer can vary. The weight depends on the specification of the device which is a project
specific feature.
** The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the specification of the device. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only
approximate values. The exact values can be found on the SF6 information of the installation.

Information on materials for disposal

Table 7.18-3: Material fractions for voltage transformers VT1

GIS component Weight Material

Porcellain/ceramics

Electronic parts
Ferrous metals

Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al-metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
SF6

Fraction compared to total part weight in% per

kg kg weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + =dependant on type

Voltage transformer VT1 640 13,5 F F F F F f f

* Almetal = Aluminum, NEMetal = Nonferrous metal

1HDG518734Ben ABBProductManualR58: 01.07.2015|Modules|7.1811

7.19 Inductive voltage transformer VT1
with isolating device (manual operation, interlocked)
7.19

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.191

7.19.1 Design and functional description
Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary voltage is proportional to and in
phase with the primary voltage for all practical purposes. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the power
system voltage to be measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective devices. At
the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically separated from each other.

The voltage transformer is equipped with an integrated isolating device so that the voltage transformer active parts
can be isolated from the switchgear. The isolation device is motor operated. A manual operation (emergency opera
tion) is possible, e.g. in case of supply voltage outage.

The cast resin insulator is designed for the use with SF6. It is installed to the flange of the voltage transformer enclo
sure and closes the gas compartment tightly. The voltage transformer is available with flange diameter 520 mm and
flange diameter 735mm. Depending on the flange diameter the installation procedures differ.

The inductive voltage transformer complies with the relevant IEC, ANSI and IEEEstandards. Usually it has two
secondary windings and one auxiliary winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are projectspecific.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to internal arc.

Cause If the position of the isolating device is not in the exact

position OPEN or CLOSED and the voltage transformer is
energized an internal arc can occur. An internal arc can
also occur, if the isolating device is operated when the volt
age transformer is energized.
Action Operate the voltage transformer only if the integrated iso
lating device is in position CLOSED or OPEN. Operate the
isolating device only if the switchgear section has been
de−energized and earthed.

INFORMATION The isolating device is not a disconnector in the sense of IEC 62271−102. Use the
disconnecting device only for testing purposes.

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.192

The inductive voltage transformer is separated from the adjacent GIS compartment by means of a barrier insula
tor(5). It is equipped with two gas valves (4), one SF6 gas adsorber and a bursting disk (2). The terminal box holds
terminal blocks, fuses and wiring.

7
8

6
6

2
5 3

1 − Terminal box with terminal blocks 5 − Barrier insulator

2 − Bursting disk 6 − Lifting eye
3 − Gas valve 7 − Hand crank
4 − Gas valve with density monitor 8 − Padlock
Figure7.191: Threephase encapsulated voltage transformer with manually operated isolating device with electrical interlocking

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.193

7.19.2 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to high voltage at the terminal
block of the voltage transformer.
Cause Some voltage transformers are equipped with test discon
nect terminal blocks. If the connection in these terminal
blocks between the primary earth wiring of the voltage
transformer and the cubicle wiring is disconnected the
earthing of the primary voltage transformer winding is not
effective. High voltage will be conducted to the terminal
blocks and causes an electrical shock.
Action Do not energize the voltage transformer with the discon
necting gap in test disconnect terminal blocks open. Insert
the switching lock. Cover the terminal block with protection
cover and warning sign. Check all measures before energi
zing.

NOTICE Hazard Loss of isolating capacity. Damage of the voltage trans

former.
Cause The voltage transformer is equipped with an isolating foil
which was impregnated with SF6 during manufacturing.
Evacuating the voltage transformer may leed to insufficient
isolation with SF6.
Action Never evacuate the voltage transformer.
Always keep a minimum pressure of 150 kPa SF6.

Carry out the following work before commissioning:

1. Check voltage transformer for external damages.
In case of any damages contact the manufacturer.
2. Check shock indicators.
In case the shock indicators were activated, contact the manufacturer
3. Check if connections in the terminal box are consistent with projectspecific circuit diagram
4. Check if earthing of primary and secondary winding are consistent with projectspecific circuit diagram
5. Check if micro circuitbreakers of secondary circuits work
6. Fill voltage transformer with SF6 at filling pressure. Observe strictly that the voltage transformer never shall
be evacuated.

Check in the drawings of the secondary circuits if the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal
blocks. In case the voltage transformer is equipped with test disconnect terminal blocks:
7. Check that the disconnecting gap of the terminal block is closed. If not, close disconnecting gap
8. Check that the switch interlock is inserted. If not, insert switch interlock
9. Check that the cover including the warning sign is installed on the terminal block. If not, install the cover
10. Record the result in the OnSite Test Protocol 1HDG518680

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.194

7.19.3 Operation of the integrated isolating device
The voltage transformer is equipped with an integrated isolating device so that the voltage transformer active parts
can be isolated from the switchgear.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death if isolating device is operated when

voltage transformer is energized.
Cause Switching the energized voltage transformer can result in
an internal arc.
Action Make sure that the switchgear section, where the voltage
transformer is connected to, has been de−energized and
earthed.

7.19.3.1Functional description of the isolating device

The voltage transformer is equipped with an integrated isolating device so that the voltage transformer active parts
can be isolated from the switchgear.

The integrated isolating device is equipped with a hand crank (1, Figure7.192) for manual operation. The position
of the isolating device is indicated in the transparent tube beneath the hand crank (3 for position CLOSED and 4 for
position OPEN). The hand crank is secured for unintentional operation by a padlock (2).

An electrical interlocking can be realised by a locking solenoid. The electrical contacts for position indication are
within the terminal box.

If the supply voltage of the locking solenoid is down, the locking solenoid can be unlocked manually during an
emergency operation procedure.

1
2 5

CLOSED CLOSED

OPEN OPEN

3 4
1 − Hand crank 4 − Position indication CLOSED
2 − Padlock 5 − Locking plate
3 − Position indication OPEN
Figure7.192: Elements for manual operation with electrical interlocking

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.195

7.19.3.2Operation of the isolating device with electrical interlocking

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death if isolating device is operated when

voltage transformer is energized.
Cause Switching the energized voltage transformer can result in
an internal arc.
Action Make sure that the switchgear section, where the voltage
transformer is connected to, has been de−energized and
earthed.

OPEN isolating device

Position OPEN means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are not connected.
1. Deenergise and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (2, Figure7.192). The interlocking solenoid must be released by the electrical interlock
ing circuit
3. Push locking plate (5, Figure7.192) into position UNLOCK
4. Turn hand crank (1, Figure7.192) into position OPEN

CLOSE isolating device

Position CLOSED means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are connected.
1. Deenergise and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Turn hand crank 81, Figure7.192) into position CLOSED
3. Position hand crank so that surface of its square rod is in parallel to the slot of the locking plate. Pull lock
ing plate (5, Figure7.192) into position LOCK until the locking soleniod latches
4. Install padlock (2, Figure7.192)

Interlocking towards switching devices of switchgear

The isolating device may be interlocked towards switching devices within the switchgear. These interlockings are
planned individually for each project. For details see interlocking overview within project specific documents sup
plied with the switchgear.

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.196

7.19.3.3Operation of isolating device in case supply voltage is down

In case the supply voltage of the auxiliary circuits is down, e.g. during an outage, it is possible to override the elec
trical interlocking of the isolating device manually.

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death if isolating device is operated when

voltage transformer is energized.
Cause Switching the energized voltage transformer can result in
an internal arc. When supply voltage is down (emergency
operation) all interlocking towards switching devices within
the switchgear is ignored.
Action Make sure that the switchgear section, where the voltage
transformer is connected to, has been de−energized and
earthed.

OPEN isolating device

Position OPEN means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are not connected.
1. Deenergise and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Remove padlock (2, Figure7.192). The interlocking solenoid must be released by the electrical interlock
ing circuit
3. Remove plastic cap from interlocking plate (5, Figure7.192)
4. Push bolt of locking solenoid using a suitable screwdriver
5. Push locking plate into position UNLOCK
6. Turn hand crank (1, Figure7.192) into position OPEN

CLOSE isolating device

Position CLOSED means that voltage transformer active parts and switchgear are connected.
1. Deenergise and earth switchgear section, where the voltage transformer is connected to
2. Turn hand crank into position closed (1, Figure7.192)
3. Position hand crank so that surface of its square rod is in parallel to the slot of the locking plate. Pull lock
ing plate into position LOCK until the locking soleniod latches
4. Insert plastic cap into locking plate
5. Install padlock (2, Figure7.192)

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.197

7.19.4 Technical Data
Electrical and mechanical data
Table7.191: Voltage transformer VT1

Rated values kV 72,5 123 145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (to earth) kV 325 550 650

Power frequency withstand voltage (to earth) kV 140 230 275

Frequency Hz 50/60

Min. functional pressure SF6/filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600/700

Weight without SF6 (approx.) kg 640*

Weight of SF6 filling (approx.) kg 13,5**

* The weight of the voltage transformer can vary. The weightdepends on the specification of the device which is a project spe
cific feature.
** The weight of the SF6 filling depends on the specification of the device. Therefore the values mentioned in this table are only
approximate values. The exact values can be found on the nameplates of the installation.

Information on materials for disposal

Table7.192: Material fractions for voltage transformers VT1

GIS component Weight Material

Porcellain/ceramics

Electronic parts
Ferrous metals

Filter material
Total weight

NE-Metal *

Oil, grease
Cast resin
Al-metal*

Plastics
SF6

Fraction compared to total part weight in% per

kg kg weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + =dependant on type

Voltage transformer VT1 640 13,5 F F F F F f f

* Almetal = Aluminum, NEMetal = Nonferrous metal

1HDG518735Aen ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.198

7.20 Surge arrester MWGX/MWGXi 7.20

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.201

7.20.1 Functional description

Surge arresters are used in SF6−insulated switchgear for protection from atmospheric and switching overvoltages.
The arresters can be connected to any unused flange of the switchgear.

The surge arrester MWGX/MWGXi is a three−phase encapsulated surge arrester which is a separate gas compart
ment. The gas compartment is sealed with barrier insulator (10). Baseplate (1 or 11 resp.) and enclosure (2) are from
aluminium. A pressure relief device (4) and gas valves (3) are provided. A gas density monitor or gas density sensor
is installed to one of the gas valves.

The active parts of the surge arrester consist of several serially connected metal−oxide resistors (8). The metal−oxide
resistors have a non−linear resistance property. At the maximum operating voltage UC only a small capacitive current
flows. At higher voltages the resistance changes to a very low value practically without delay. In this way any further
increase of voltage is limited to the specified residual voltage values. Once the surge wave has ended the arrester
returns to the non−conductive state. The length of the resistor stakes depends on the project specific data.

The surge arrester MWGX is equipped with a baseplate (1) and cannot be equipped with surge counters. The surge
arrester MWGXi can be equipped with surge counters through the insulating bushings (7) in the baseplate (11). Fur
ther information concerning the surge arrester MWGXi with surge counters can be found in the following chapters. If
the surrge arrester MWGXi is not yet equipped with surge counters the bushings (7) are short−circuited with con
ductors (6). Conductors (6) are connected to the earthed baseplate (11) with earthing conductor (5).

At the outer surface of the baseplate tapholes M12 are provided to connect the earthing conductors which provide
the earthing connection to the earthing grid of the substation.

For earthing of the surge arrester refer to chapter Installation section Earthing and the project specific earthing plan.

5
6

1 11 7

2 2

8
3 3
3 3

4 4

10

1 − Baseplate 5 − Earthing conductor 9 − Contact

2 − Enclosure 6 − Short−circuit conductor 10 − Barrier insulator
3 − Gas valves 7 − Insulating bushing 11 − Baseplate for insulating
4 − Pressure relief device 8 − Metal−oxide resistor stack bushings
Figure 7.20-1: Surge arrester MWGX (left) and surge arrester MWGXi (right) with bushings for surge counter

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.202

Surge counter type SAM−3

The surge counter type SAM−3 consists of the monitoring units (1) and sensors (2). Monitoring units and sensors
are connected by signal cables. The sensors (2) are installed in the current path between the resistor stack and
earth. The sensors measure the surge current through conductor (4). Conductor (4) is connected to the earthed
enclosure by earthing conductor (3).

For further information about the surge counter type SAM−3 refer to the operating manual supplied with the system.

3
4

1 − Monitoring unit 4 − Conductor

2 − Sensor 5 − Insulating bushing
3 − Earthing conductor
Figure 7.20-2: Surge arrester with surge counter type SAM−3

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.203

Surge counter type Bowthorpe

The surge counter type Bowthorpe consists of the device (4) which is connected to the surge arrester through
short−circuit conductors (2) and conductor (3). It monitors the surge current through conductor (3). The support (5)
is connected to the other terminal of the device (4). Support (5) holds the device (4) and in addition is the electrical
earthing connection to the enclosure of the GIS.

For further information about the surge counter type Bowthorpe refer to the operating manual supplied with the
system.

1 − Insulating bushing 4 − Surge counter type Bowthorpe

2 − Short−circuit conductor 5 − Support and earthing conductor
3 − Conductor
Figure 7.20-3: Surge arrester with surge counter type Bowthorpe

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.204

7.20.2 Commissioning

WARNING Hazard Severe injury or death due to electric shock

Cause The conductors of the insulating bushings are connected

to the resistor stacks in the gas compartment. If these con
ductors outside the gas compart are not earthed high−volt
age potential is conducted out of the enclosure.
Action Energize the surge arresters only after all bushings are
connected to earth potential with the specified oonductors.
Use only the original conductors provided with the GIS.

Before energizing the surge arrester check the following items:

1. Make sure that the surge arrester data on the rating plate fits the operating voltage of the power system
where the surge arrester is installed to
2. Make sure that the conductors of the insulating bushings are connected to the earthed enclosure of the
surge arrester
3. In case of surge counters: Make sure that the conductors are earthed behind the surge counters. Other
wise surges cannot be detected

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.205

7.20.3 Technical data
Table 7.20-1: Surge arrester MWGX and MWGXi

Rated values

Maximum continuous voltage UC kV 44...59

Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60

Nominal discharge current (peak value) kA 10

Energy absorption capacity per kV UC kJ 8

Line discharge class IEC 60099−4 − 3

Permissible ambient temperature (without heating) °C −30...+45

Minimum functional pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520

Filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600

Weight without SF6 (MWGX/MWGXi):

Maximum continuous voltage UC 42...44 kV kg 110/120
Maximum continuous voltage UC 48...59 kV 115/125

SF6 weight:
Maximum continuous voltage UC 42...44 kV kg 4
Maximum continuous voltage UC 48...59 kV 5

Maximum length (MWGX/MWGXi):

Maximum continuous voltage UC 42...44 kV mm 940/1240
Maximum continuous voltage UC 48...59 kV 1040/1340

Information about materials for disposal

Table 7.20-2: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Electronic parts **
Porcelain/Ceramic

Filter material
Total weight

NF metal *

Oil, grease
Al metal *

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Surge arrester MWGX

Maximum continuous voltage UC 42...44 kV 110 4 F f F f f
Maximum continuous voltage UC 48...59 kV 115 5

Surge arrester MWGXi

Maximum continuous voltage UC 42...44 kV 120 4 F f F f F f f
Maximum continuous voltage UC 48...59 kV 125 5
* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals
** if equipped with surge counters

1HDG518790A en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.206

7.21 Gas density monitor 7.21

1HDG518780B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.211

7.21.1 Functional description
1 5 8

6 4 7
2

1 − Tendency indication 6 − Metal bellows

2 − Cable connection 7 − Ventilation membrane
3 − Screw terminal 8 − Micro switch
4 − Compartment with reference gas 9 − Alternative cable outlet
5 − Gas compartment
Figure 7.21-1: Gas density monitor

The gas density monitor measures the gas density of the connected gas compartment. The purpose of the gas
density monitor is to ensure a sufficient gas density for the operation of the GIS. The gas density monitor indicates a
lack of gas by generating a signal to inform the operator. The signal consists of two stages.

The gas density monitor has three contacts (1 x warningstage 1, 2 x blockingphase 2), which are directly con
ducted to the operating mechanism cabinet of the circuit breaker, where they are processed.

The gas density monitors provided for the other gas compartments of the GIS have three contacts as well. Nor
mally, two of these, namely those inside the control cubicle of the GIS, can be used to indicate warning signals.
(1 x warningstage 1, 1 x collective indicationstage 2). For information about the pressure levels refer to chapter
Gas−insulated switchgear in section

Measuring principle

The gas density to be supervised in the gas compartment (5) is continuously compared with the gas density of an
identical gas in the reference volume (4) (Figure7.211). Since the gas in both volumes has the same temperature,
the densities can be compared through a comparison of the pressures.

The differential pressure between the two gas volumes (4) and (5) moves the metal bellows (6). This movement is
transferred through the operating rod to the micro switch (8). The micro switches (8) are electrically connected with
the screw terminal (3) and release at pressure drop the respective signal. The terminal (3) can be mounted and dis
mounted without any tools.

1HDG518780B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.212

Tendency Indication

The gas density monitor has a tendency indication. From this display the measured range and an indication of the
actual pressure value can be read from a scale. The switching points are marked with colour gradients (green/yel
low, yelow/red) on the scale. The coloured ranges signify:

Green: Gas density is OK

Yellow: Gas density has dropped, measures by the operator are necessary
Red: Gas density ist too low, operation prohibited

The density monitors are designed that tendency indication and micro switch work independently from each other.

INFORMATION All pressures of the GIS and the recalculation to the ambient temperatures are de
scribed in detail in chapter Gas−insulated switchgear in section Filling Pressures.

1HDG518780B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.213

7.21.2 Technical data
Table 7.21-1: Gas density monitor

Rated values

Manufacturer Trafag AG, Switzerland

Measuring principle − Reference gas measurement

Indicator mechanism − Stainless steel, aluminium

Enclosure material − AlSi10Mg

Pressure range kPa 0 up to 1100 (pre−calibrated)

Ambient temperature °C −40 up to +80

Switching point tolerance kPa + 20

Number of switching points − up to 3

Accuracy of indication kPa ±10

Leakage rate of the referance gas volume kPa/year < 0,5

Tension torque for screw cap Nm 50

Weight g approx. 930

Maintenance − none

Degree of protection − IP 67

Outdoor suitability − yes

Electrical connection − Screw terminal

Table 7.21-2: Switching capacity

Operating voltage V 250 (AC) 250 (DC) 220 (DC) 110 (DC) 24 (DC)

Switching capacity of the micro switch (resistive) A 10,0 0,1 0,25 0,5 2

Information about materials for disposal

Table 7.21-3: Materials of the GIS parts

GIS part Weight Material

Porcelain/Ceramic

Electronic parts
Filter material
Total weight

Oil, grease
NF metal*
Al metal*

Cast resin
Plastics
Iron
SF6

Content compared to part total weight

kg kg in % per weight:
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depends on type

Gas density monitor 0,93 − F F F F F

* Al metal = aluminum or its alloys, NF metal = non−ferrous metals

1HDG518780B en ABB Product Manual R58: 01.07.2015|Modules| 7.214